Posted on Leave a comment

Chemical fingerprint analysis of Phellodendri Amurensis Cortex by ultra performance LC/Q-TOF-MS methods combined with chemometrics

Ultra performance LC with quadrupole TOF MS (UPLC/Q-TOF-MS) fingerprinting is first developed for the identification of the major components of Phellodendri Amurensis Cortex (PAC). The PAC samples are separated using a Waters ACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 (2.1×50 mm, 1.7 μm) by linear gradient elution using water (containing 0.2% formic acid) and acetonitrile (containing 0.2% formic acid) as the mobile phase. Ten batches of PAC are selected to construct the UPLC/Q-TOF-MS fingerprint. Sixteen common peaks in the fingerprint are obtained, ten of which are tentatively identified, with reference to the literature data, as phellodendrine, magnoflorine, tetrahydropjatrorrhizine, menisperine, tetrahydropalmatine, jatrorrhizine, palmatine, berberine, obacunone, and limonin. Chemometric methods are also employed to evaluate the variation of herbal drugs and other closely related herbs based on the characteristics of peaks in the UPLC/Q-TOF-MS profiles. The developed fingerprint assay is a powerful method that may be used to conduct quality control of PAC.

Posted on Leave a comment

Waters Micromass Q-ToF Guide

Micromass Q-Tof micro Mass Spectrometer Operator’s Guide 34 Maple Street Milford, MA 01757 71500058502 Revision A NOTICE The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Waters Corporation. Waters Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. This document is believed to be complete and accurate at the time of publication. In no event shall Waters Corporation be liable for incidental or consequential damages in connection with, or arising from, the use of this document. © 2002 WATERS CORPORATION. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THIS DOCUMENT OR PARTS THEREOF MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER. Micromass and Waters are registered trademarks, and MassLynx is a trademark of Waters Corporation. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the sole property of their respective owners. Safety Information General The Micromass Q-Tof micro is designed solely for use as a mass spectrometer; any attempt to use it for any other purpose is liable to damage the instrument and will invalidate its warranty. The Micromass Q-Tof micro mass spectrometer conforms to European standard EN61010-1:2001, Safety Requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use – Part 1: General requirements. The instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with recognized safety standards. If the instrument is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired. Whenever the safety protection of the instrument has been compromised, disconnect the instrument from all power sources and secure the instrument against unintended operation. The instrument must be installed in such a manner that the user can easily access and isolate the power source. Safety Symbols Warnings in this User’s Guide, or on the instrument, must be observed during all phases of service, repair, installation and operation of the instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions violates the safety standards of the design and intended use of the instrument. Micromass UK Limited assumes no liability for the user’s failure to comply with these requirements. The following safety symbols may be used in the User’s Guide, or on the instrument. A Caution is an instruction that draws the user’s attention to the risk of injury or death; a Attention is an instruction that draws attention to the risk of damage to the instrument. Caution: This is a general warning symbol, indicating that there is a potential health or safety hazard; the user should refer to this User’s Guide for instructions. Caution: This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages may be present Caution: This symbol indicates that hot surfaces may be present. Caution: This symbol indicates that there is danger from corrosive substances. Caution: This symbol indicates that there is danger from toxic substances. Caution: This symbol indicates that there is danger from flammable substances. Caution: This symbol indicates that there is danger from laser radiation. Attention: This is a general caution symbol, indicating that care must be taken to avoid the possibility of damaging the instrument, or affecting its operation. Q-Tof micro Mass Spectrometer Information Intended Use The Micromass Q-Tof micro Mass Spectrometer can be used as a research tool to deliver authenticated exact mass in both MS and MS-MS mode. It is not for use in diagnostic prodedures. Biological Hazard When you analyze physiological fluids, take all necessary precautions and treat all specimens as potentially infectious. Precautions are outlined in “CDC Guidelines on Specimen Handling,” CDC – NIH Manual, 1984. Calibration Follow acceptable methods of calibration with pure standards to calibrate methods. Use a minimum of five standards to generate a standard curve. The concentration range should cover the entire range of quality-control samples, typical specimens, and atypical specimens. Quality Control Routinely run three quality-control samples. Quality-control samples should represent subnormal, normal, and above-normal levels of a compound. Ensure that quality-control sample results are within an acceptable range, and evaluate precision from day to day and run to run. Data collected when quality-control samples are out of range may not be valid. Do not report this data until you ensure that system performance is acceptable. Table of Contents vii Table of Contents Preface ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1 Chapter 1 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 1.1 Instrument Description………………………………………………………………………….. 6 1.1.1 Ionisation Techniques ………………………………………………………………. 6 1.1.2 Atmospheric Pressure Chemical Ionisation …………………………………. 6 1.1.3 Electrospray ……………………………………………………………………………. 6 1.1.4 Nanoflow Electrospray …………………………………………………………….. 7 1.2 Ion Optics ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 1.3 Internal Layout …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 1.3.1 Mechanical Components………………………………………………………….. 10 1.3.2 Electrical Components ……………………………………………………………. 10 1.4 The Vacuum System……………………………………………………………………………. 12 1.4.1 Fine Pumping…………………………………………………………………………. 12 1.4.2 Rotary Pumping …………………………………………………………………….. 13 1.4.3 Pressure Measurement ……………………………………………………………. 13 1.4.4 Vacuum Protection …………………………………………………………………. 13 1.5 Front Panel Connections ……………………………………………………………………… 14 1.5.1 Desolvation Gas and Probe Nebuliser Gas …………………………………. 14 1.5.2 High Voltage …………………………………………………………………………. 14 1.5.3 Heaters …………………………………………………………………………………. 14 1.5.4 Front Panel Controls and Indicators …………………………………………. 15 1.6 Rear Panel Connections ………………………………………………………………………. 16 1.6.1 Water …………………………………………………………………………………….. 16 1.6.2 Nitrogen Gas In ……………………………………………………………………… 16 1.6.3 Exhausts ……………………………………………………………………………….. 17 1.6.4 Supply Inlet …………………………………………………………………………… 17 viii Table of Contents 1.6.5 Electronics ……………………………………………………………………………. 17 1.6.6 Rotary Pump …………………………………………………………………………. 17 1.6.7 Event Out ……………………………………………………………………………… 17 1.6.8 Contact Closure In …………………………………………………………………. 18 1.6.9 Analog Channels ……………………………………………………………………. 18 1.7 MassLynx Data System……………………………………………………………………….. 18 1.7.1 Software ………………………………………………………………………………… 19 Chapter 2 Routine Procedures …………………………………………………………………………….. 21 2.1 Start Up Following a Complete Shutdown……………………………………………… 21 2.1.1 Preparation …………………………………………………………………………….. 21 2.1.2 Pumping ……………………………………………………………………………….. 22 2.1.3 MCP Detector Conditioning ……………………………………………………. 23 2.1.4 Instrument Warm-up ………………………………………………………………. 24 2.1.5 Using the Instrument ………………………………………………………………. 24 2.2 Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown……………………………………………….. 24 2.2.1 Preparation for Electrospray Operation ……………………………………… 25 2.2.2 Preparation for APcI Operation ……………………………………………….. 26 2.2.3 Transient Pressure Trip …………………………………………………………… 27 2.2.4 Power Failure ………………………………………………………………………… 27 2.2.5 Nitrogen Supply …………………………………………………………………….. 28 2.3 Automatic Startup and Shutdown …………………………………………………………. 28 2.3.1 The Shutdown Editor ……………………………………………………………… 28 2.3.2 The Shutdown Editor Toolbar …………………………………………………. 29 2.3.3 Shutdown Page ……………………………………………………………………… 29 2.3.4 The Auto Control Tasks Page …………………………………………………. 33 2.3.1 Shutdown Log ……………………………………………………………………….. 36 Table of Contents ix Chapter 3 Electrospray ………………………………………………………………………………………… 39 3.1 Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 39 3.1.1 Post-column Splitting …………………………………………………………….. 41 3.1.2 Megaflow ……………………………………………………………………………… 43 3.2 Operation…………………………………………………………………………………………… 43 3.2.3 Megaflow Hints …………………………………………………………………….. 49 3.2.4 Removing the Probe ……………………………………………………………….. 50 3.3 Sample Analysis and Calibration ………………………………………………………….. 50 3.3.5 General Information ……………………………………………………………….. 50 3.4 Chromatographic Interfacing ……………………………………………………………….. 52 3.4.1 LC-MS Sensitivity Enhancement ……………………………………………… 53 Chapter 4 Nanoflow Electrospray ……………………………………………………………………….. 55 4.1 Installing the Interface…………………………………………………………………………. 57 4.1.1 Operation of the Camera System ……………………………………………… 60 4.1.2 Glass Capillary Option ……………………………………………………………. 61 4.2 Nano-LC Option…………………………………………………………………………………. 63 4.2.1 Installation …………………………………………………………………………….. 63 4.2.2 Operation ……………………………………………………………………………… 65 4.3 Changing Options……………………………………………………………………………….. 66 Chapter 5 APcI …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 67 5.1 Preparation ………………………………………………………………………………………… 68 5.1.1 Checking the Probe…………………………………………………………………. 68 5.2 Obtaining an Ion Beam ……………………………………………………………………….. 69 5.3 Hints for Sample Analysis……………………………………………………………………. 71 5.4 Removing the Probe ……………………………………………………………………………. 72 x Table of Contents Chapter 6 Tuning ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 75 6.1 Tuning ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 75 6.2 Tune Page ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 77 6.2.1 Tune Page Basics ……………………………………………………………………. 77 6.2.2 Saving and Restoring Parameter Settings ………………………………….. 78 6.2.3 Changing the Peak Display ……………………………………………………… 79 6.2.4 Source Tuning Page ……………………………………………………………….. 81 6.2.5 Quadrupole Tuning Page (Analyzer) ………………………………………… 83 6.2.6 Time Of Flight Page ……………………………………………………………….. 85 6.2.7 Other Tune Page Settings ………………………………………………………… 88 6.3 Obtaining an Ion Beam ……………………………………………………………………….. 89 6.3.1 Standard Tune Parameters ……………………………………………………….. 90 6.3.2 Checking the Resolution …………………………………………………………. 90 Chapter 7 Calibration …………………………………………………………………………………………. 93 7.1 Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 93 7.1.1 Nominal Mass Accuracy – Lteff ………………………………………………. 94 7.1.2 Calibration ……………………………………………………………………………. 95 7.1.3 Lock Mass …………………………………………………………………………….. 96 7.1.4 Deadtime Correction ………………………………………………………………. 96 7.2 Generation of an Instrument Calibration………………………………………………… 97 7.2.1 Calculation of Lteff…………………………………………………………………. 97 7.2.2 Acquire Data for Calibration …………………………………………………… 99 7.2.3 Check for Deadtime Distortion ………………………………………………. 100 7.2.4 Calibration ………………………………………………………………………….. 102 7.2.5 LockMass Correction ……………………………………………………………. 106 7.2.6 Deadtime Correction …………………………………………………………….. 106 7.3 Exact Mass Measurement: Additional Hints…………………………………………. 109 Table of Contents xi Chapter 8 Data Acquisition ………………………………………………………………………………… 111 8.1 Starting an Acquisition………………………………………………………………………. 111 8.1.1 Starting an Acquisition from the Tune Page……………………………… 111 8.1.2 Multiple Samples …………………………………………………………………. 114 8.2 Monitoring an Acquisition …………………………………………………………………. 114 8.2.1 The Acquisition Status Window ……………………………………………… 114 8.2.2 Chromatogram Real-Time Update ………………………………………….. 115 8.2.3 Spectrum Real-Time Update ………………………………………………….. 115 8.2.4 System Manager ………………………………………………………………….. 115 8.2.5 Stopping an Acquisition ………………………………………………………… 115 8.3 The Experiment Setup Editor……………………………………………………………… 115 8.3.1 The Experiment Setup Editor Toolbar ……………………………………… 116 8.3.2 Adding a New Function ………………………………………………………… 117 8.3.3 Modifying an Existing Function …………………………………………….. 117 8.3.4 Copying an Existing Function ……………………………………………….. 118 8.3.5 Removing a Function ……………………………………………………………. 118 8.3.6 Changing the Order of Functions ……………………………………………. 118 8.3.7 Setting a Solvent Delay …………………………………………………………. 119 8.3.8 Analog Channels ………………………………………………………………….. 120 8.3.9 Saving and Restoring a Function List ……………………………………… 120 8.3.10 Setting up an MS Scan Function …………………………………………….. 121 8.4 Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) …………………………………… 125 8.4.1 Creating a Data Dependent MS to MS/MS Switching Experiment. 126 8.4.2 Survey ………………………………………………………………………………… 127 8.4.3 MS to MSMS ………………………………………………………………………. 128 8.4.4 MSMS to MS ………………………………………………………………………. 131 8.4.5 MSMS Template ………………………………………………………………….. 132 8.4.6 Include Masses …………………………………………………………………….. 133 8.4.7 Collision Energy ………………………………………………………………….. 135 xii Table of Contents 8.4.8 Exclude Masses ……………………………………………………………………. 137 Chapter 9 Parent Ion Discovery …………………………………………………………………………. 139 9.1 Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment………………………………………… 139 9.1.1 Parent Survey Window ………………………………………………………….. 140 9.1.2 Product Ions ………………………………………………………………………… 142 9.1.3 Neutral Loss ………………………………………………………………………… 143 9.1.4 MSMS Template ………………………………………………………………….. 144 9.1.5 MS to MSMS ………………………………………………………………………. 145 9.1.6 MSMS to MS ………………………………………………………………………. 148 9.1.7 Include ……………………………………………………………………………….. 149 9.1.8 Exclude ………………………………………………………………………………. 151 9.1.9 Collision Energy ………………………………………………………………….. 152 Chapter 10 Maintenance and Fault Finding ……………………………………………………….. 155 10.1 Electronics Maintenance ……………………………………………………………………. 156 10.1.1 Cooling Fans and Air Filters ………………………………………………….. 156 10.1.2 The Vacuum System …………………………………………………………….. 156 10.2 The Source……………………………………………………………………………………….. 159 10.2.1 Cleaning the Sample Cone in Situ …………………………………………… 160 10.2.2 Removing and Cleaning the Sample Cone ………………………………. 163 10.2.3 Removing and Cleaning the Source Block and Extraction Cone … 165 10.2.4 Removing and Cleaning the RF Lens Assembly ………………………. 167 10.2.5 Reassembling and Checking the Source ………………………………….. 168 10.2.6 The Corona Discharge Pin …………………………………………………….. 169 10.3 The Electrospray Probe ……………………………………………………………………… 170 10.3.1 Replacement of the Stainless Steel Sample Capillary ………………… 171 10.4 The APcI Probe ………………………………………………………………………………… 172 10.4.1 Cleaning the Probe Tip ………………………………………………………….. 173 Table of Contents xiii 10.4.2 Replacing the Probe Tip Heater ……………………………………………… 174 10.4.3 Replacing the Fused Silica Capillary ………………………………………. 175 10.5 The Analyzer ……………………………………………………………………………………. 176 10.5.1 Removing the MS1 and Collision Cell Optical Bench Assembly … 177 10.5.2 Dismantling and Cleaning the Entrance Prefilter ……………………… 178 10.5.3 Cleaning the MS1 Analyzer Assembly ……………………………………. 178 10.5.4 Replacing the MS1 and Gas Cell Optical Bench Assembly ……….. 178 10.5.5 The MS2 Analyzer and Detector Assembly …………………………….. 179 10.6 Fault Finding ……………………………………………………………………………………. 179 10.6.1 No Beam ……………………………………………………………………………… 179 10.6.2 Unsteady Beam ……………………………………………………………………. 180 10.6.3 High Back Pressure ………………………………………………………………. 181 10.6.4 Loss of Sensitivity ……………………………………………………………….. 182 10.6.5 Incorrect Isotope Distributions ………………………………………………. 182 10.6.6 High Noise Levels ……………………………………………………………….. 182 10.6.7 Poor Analyzer Vacuum …………………………………………………………. 183 10.7 Cleaning Materials ……………………………………………………………………………. 184 10.8 Preventive Maintenance Check List…………………………………………………….. 184 10.8.1 Daily……………………………………………………………………………………. 185 10.8.2 Weekly ……………………………………………………………………………….. 185 10.8.3 Monthly ………………………………………………………………………………. 185 10.8.4 Four-Monthly ………………………………………………………………………. 185 Appendix A Reference Information ………………………………………………………………………. 187 A.1 Positive Ion ………………………………………………………………………………. 188 A.2 Negative Ion …………………………………………………………………………….. 190 A.3 Preparation of Calibration Solutions ………………………………………………. 192 xiv Table of Contents Appendix B Instrument Specifications …………………………………………………………………. 195 B.1 Room Location …………………………………………………………………………. 195 B.2 Environment …………………………………………………………………………….. 195 B.3 Water Supplies ………………………………………………………………………….. 196 B.4 Power Requirements ………………………………………………………………….. 197 B.5 Gases and Regulators …………………………………………………………………. 198 B.6 Exhaust Outlets …………………………………………………………………………. 199 B.7 Performance Specifications ………………………………………………………….. 199 List of Figures xv List of Figures 1-1 The Micromass Q-tof micro ……………………………………………………………. 5 1-2 Q-Tof micro Ion Optics…………………………………………………………………… 8 1-3 Mechanical Components – Internal View…………………………………………. 10 1-4 Rear View of Instrument……………………………………………………………….. 11 1-5 Q-Tof micro Vacuum System…………………………………………………………. 12 1-6 Front Panel………………………………………………………………………………….. 14 1-7 Rear Panel Connections ………………………………………………………………… 16 1-8 Rear Panel Outputs ………………………………………………………………………. 18 2-1 MCP Conditioning Dialog …………………………………………………………….. 23 2-2 Shutdown Page ……………………………………………………………………………. 30 2-3 Shutdown on Error Configuration Dialog ……………………………………….. 31 2-4 Configure Event In Dialog…………………………………………………………….. 32 2-5 Gas Threshold Dialog …………………………………………………………………… 33 2-6 Auto Control Tasks Page ………………………………………………………………. 33 2-7 Shutdown Startup Log ………………………………………………………………….. 36 2-1 Log Parameters Dialog …………………………………………………………………. 37 3-1 Electrospray Scheme…………………………………………………………………….. 39 3-2 Post Column Split ………………………………………………………………………… 42 3-3 Comparison of Normal and Megaflow Electrospray…………………………. 42 3-4 ESI Source ………………………………………………………………………………….. 43 3-5 Electrospray Tip…………………………………………………………………………… 45 3-6 Optimum Probe Position……………………………………………………………….. 46 3-7 Probe Adjustment ………………………………………………………………………… 46 4-1 The Nanoflow Interface ………………………………………………………………… 55 4-2 Nanoflow Electrospray Scheme……………………………………………………… 56 4-3 Electrospray Source Being Removed ……………………………………………… 57 xvi List of Figures 4-4 Nanoflow Source Without Cover……………………………………………………. 58 4-5 Nanoflow Source with Cover and End Flange …………………………………. 59 4-6 Nanoflow Camera and Microscope System……………………………………… 60 4-7 Nanovial Tip Position …………………………………………………………………… 62 4-8 Nano-LC Assembly ……………………………………………………………………… 64 5-1 Schematic Representation of APcI …………………………………………………. 67 5-2 Illustration of Probe Adjustment…………………………………………………….. 70 5-3 APcI Probe showing twin Thumb Nuts used for Removal…………………. 72 6-1 The Ion Optical System of the Q-Tof micro …………………………………….. 76 6-2 The QTof micro Tune Page……………………………………………………………. 77 6-3 The Customize Display Menu ……………………………………………………….. 79 6-4 The Customise Plot Appearance Dialog………………………………………….. 79 6-5 The Source Tuning Page……………………………………………………………….. 81 6-6 The Quadrupole Tuning Page ………………………………………………………… 83 6-7 The Time Of Flight Page ………………………………………………………………. 85 6-8 The TDC Settings Dialog ……………………………………………………………… 88 6-9 The Tune Page Acquisition Dialog…………………………………………………. 91 6-10 Combined Spectrum of Leucine Enkephalin Showing Peak Width at Half Height 92 7-1 TDC Settings Dialog…………………………………………………………………….. 95 7-2 The Tune Page Acquisition Dialog…………………………………………………. 97 7-3 Indicated Mass of Leucine Enkephalin prior to Lteff Correction………… 98 7-4 Indicated Mass of Leucine Enkephalin after Lteff Correction. …………… 99 7-5 The TOF Accurate Mass dialog……………………………………………………. 100 7-6 The TOF Spectrum Center Dialog………………………………………………… 101 7-7 Comparison of Centered Spectra With (top) and Without (bottom) Deadtime Correction 101 7-8 The Calibration Window……………………………………………………………… 102 7-9 The Display Calibration Graphs Dialog ………………………………………… 103 7-10 Calibration Window Showing Residual Errors……………………………….. 104 List of Figures xvii 7-11 The Calibration Parameters Dialog……………………………………………….. 105 7-12 The Accept Calibration Dialog …………………………………………………….. 105 7-13 Calibration Window Deadtime Distortion ……………………………………… 106 7-14 Same data as Figure 7-13 but with Np multiplier of 0.7…………………… 107 7-15 Two Spectra One (bottom) with no Deadtime Correction and the Other (top) with. 108 8-1 Tune Page Acquisition Dialog ……………………………………………………… 112 8-2 The Scan Report Dialog………………………………………………………………. 114 8-3 The Experiment Setup Editor ………………………………………………………. 116 8-4 The Solvent Delay Dialog……………………………………………………………. 119 8-5 The Analog Data Dialog ……………………………………………………………… 120 8-6 The TOFMS Scan Dialog ……………………………………………………………. 122 8-7 The MSMS Scan Dialog ……………………………………………………………… 124 8-8 Survey Scan Dialog: Qtof MicroSurvey Page ………………………………… 127 8-9 Survey Scan Dialog: MS to MSMS Page ………………………………………. 128 8-10 Survey Scan Dialog: MSMS to MS Page ………………………………………. 131 8-11 Survey Scan Dialog: MSMS Template Page ………………………………….. 132 8-12 Survey Scan Dialog: Include Masses Page…………………………………….. 133 8-13 Survey Scan Dialog: Collision Energy Page ………………………………….. 135 8-14 The CE Profile Dialog ………………………………………………………………… 136 8-15 The Modify Charge State Dialog………………………………………………….. 137 8-16 Survey Scan Dialog: Exclude Masses Page……………………………………. 138 9-1 Parent Scan Dialog: Parent Survey Page ……………………………………….. 140 9-2 Example of a Screen Capture……………………………………………………….. 142 9-3 Parent Scan Dialog: Neutral Loss Page …………………………………………. 143 9-4 Parent Scan Dialog: MSMS Template …………………………………………… 144 9-5 Parent Scan Dialog: MSMS to MS Page ……………………………………….. 148 9-6 Parent Scan Dialog: Include Page…………………………………………………. 149 9-7 Parent Scan Dialog: Exclude Dialog …………………………………………….. 151 9-8 Parent Scan Dialog: Collision Energy Page……………………………………. 152 xviii List of Figures 9-9 The CE Profile Dialog ………………………………………………………………… 153 9-10 The Modify Charge State Dialog………………………………………………….. 154 10-1 Rotary Pump ……………………………………………………………………………… 158 10-2 Removing The Source Enclosure …………………………………………………. 161 10-3 The Source, With Housing Removed ……………………………………………. 162 10-4 Removing the Cone ……………………………………………………………………. 164 10-5 Source Block and Extraction Cone Removed…………………………………. 165 10-6 Removing The RF Lens Assembly……………………………………………….. 167 10-7 The RF Lens Assembly……………………………………………………………….. 168 10-8 Removing the Stainless Steel Capillary form the Source …………………. 171 10-9 The APcI Probe Tip Heater………………………………………………………….. 174 10-10 Replacing the Fused Silica Capillary on the APcI probe………………….. 175 10-11 The Prefilter and Main Analyzer of the Q-Tof micro………………………. 176 1 Preface The Micromass QTof micro Mass Spectrometer is intended for a wide variety of users whose familiarity with Mass Spectrometers, computers and software ranges from novice to expert. This guide describes the basics of how to Startup the instrument, obtain an Ion Beam, Calibrate and Acquire Data using MassLynx Software, and maintain the instrument. Organization This guide contains the following: Chapter 1 gives a brief description and overview of the instrument Chapter 2 describes the routine procedures that are required to Startup and Shutdown the Instrument Chapter 3 describes the the Electrospray Interface. Chapter 4 describes the Nanoflow Interface. Chapter 5 describes the APcI Interface. Chapter 6 describes the Tuning page and how to Obtain an Ion Beam. Chapter 7 describes how to calibrate the instrument. Chapter 8 describes how to Acquire data from the MassLynx sample list and how to set up a method. Chapter 9 describes a Parent Ion Discovery experiment. Chapter 10 describes Maintenance and Fault Finding for the instrument. Related Documentation Waters Licenses, Warranties, and Support: Provides software license and warranty information, describes training and extended support, and tells how Waters handles shipments, damages, claims, and returns. Online Documentation MassLynx Help: Describes all MassLynx windows, menus, menu selections, and dialog boxes for the base software and software options. Also included are help Files 2 on Inlet Control, Interfacing, Security and any application software that may have been purchased. MassLynx ReadMe File: Describes product features and enhancements, helpful tips, installation and/or configuration considerations, and changes since the previous version. Printed Documentation for Base Product Instrument User’s Guides: Provides an introduction to the running and maintenance of the Instrument and also basic instructions on how to acquire data and calibrate the instrument. MassLynx User’s Guide: Provides a comprehensive introduction to the MassLynx software. Describes the basics of how to use MassLynx software to acquire data develop an acquisition method, review and process results, and print a report. MassLynx Interfacing Guide: Provides information on how to interface MassLynx with other Software applications. MassLynx Inlet Control Guide: Provides information on how to install and run Autosamplers, LC and GC systems, UV detectors using MassLynx. MassLynx Security User’s Guide: Describes how to add security to your MassLynx system. Printed Documentation for Software Options QuanLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using QuanLynx Software. OpenLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using OpenLynx Software. FractionLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using FractionLynx Software. MetaboLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using MetaboLynx Software. BioLynx and ProteinLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using BioLynx and ProteinLynx Software. MicrobeLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using MicrobeLynx Software. 3 NeoLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using NeoLynx Software. TargetLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using TargetLynx Software. GCLynx User’s Guide: Describes the procedures for installing, configuring and using GCLynx Software. Documentation on the Web Related product information and documentation can be found on the World Wide Web. Our address is http://www.waters.com/micromass. Documentation Conventions The following conventions can be used in this guide: Convention Usage Bold Bold indicates user action such as keys to press, menu selections, and commands. For example, “Click Next to go to the next page.” Italic Italic indicates information that you supply such as variables. It also indicates emphasis and document titles. For example, “Replace file_name with the actual name of your file.” Courier Courier indicates examples of source code and system output. For example, “The SVRMGR> prompt appears.” Courier Bold Courier bold indicates characters that you type or keys you press in examples of source code. For example, “At the LSNRCTL> prompt, enter set password oracle to access Oracle.” Keys The word key refers to a computer key on the keypad or keyboard. Screen keys refer to the keys on the instrument located immediately below the screen. For example, “The A/B screen key on the 2414 Detector displays the selected channel.” … Three periods indicate that more of the same type of item can optionally follow. For example, “You can store filename1, filename2, … in each folder.” > A right arrow between menu options indicates you should choose each option in sequence. For example, “Select File > Exit” means you should select File from the menu bar, then select Exit from the File menu. 4 Notes Notes call out information that is helpful to the operator. For example: Note: Record your result before you proceed to the next step. Attentions Attentions provide information about preventing damage to the system or equipment. For example: Cautions Cautions provide information essential to the safety of the operator. For example: Attention: To avoid damaging the detector flow cell, do not touch the flow cell window. Caution: To avoid burns, turn off the lamp at least 30 minutes before removing it for replacement or adjustment. Caution: To avoid electrical shock and injury, unplug the power cord before performing maintenance procedures. Caution: To avoid chemical or electrical hazards, observe safe laboratory practices when operating the system. Caution: Operating the source without the source enclosure will result in solvent vapor escape. Caution: Strong acid causes burns. Carry out this procedure in a fume cupboard using protective equipment. Caution: Cleaning the source requires the use of solvents and chemicals which may be flammable. 5 1 Chapter 1 Overview This chapter gives a brief description of the following • The Micromass Q-Tof micro Section 1.1 • The Ion Optics Section 1.2 • The Internal Layout Section 1.3 • The Vacuum System Section 1.4 • Front and Rear Panel Connections Section 1.5 and Section 1.6 • The MassLynx Data System Section 1.7 Figure 1-1 The Micromass Q-tof micro 6 Overview 1 1.1 Instrument Description The Q-Tof micro hybrid quadrupole time of flight mass spectrometer is available with electrospray ionisation (ESI) and atmospheric pressure chemical ionisation (APcI). Q-Tof micro utilises a high performance, research grade quadrupole mass analyser, incorporating a prefilter assembly to protect the main analyser from contaminating deposits, and an orthogonal acceleration time of flight (TOF) mass spectrometer. A hexapole collision cell, between the two mass analysers, can be used to induce fragmentation to assist in structural investigations. Ions emerging from the second mass analyser are detected by the microchannel plate detector and ion counting system. A PC computer runs the MassLynx NT software system to control Q-Tof micro, and to acquire and process data. 1.1.1 Ionisation Techniques Using the Micromass Z-spray atmospheric pressure ionisation (API) source, two techniques are available. 1.1.2 Atmospheric Pressure Chemical Ionisation Atmospheric pressure chemical ionisation (APcI) generally produces protonated or deprotonated molecular ions from the sample via a proton transfer (positive ions) or proton abstraction (negative ions) mechanism. The sample is vapourised in a heated nebuliser before emerging into a plasma consisting of solvent ions formed within the atmospheric source by a corona discharge. Proton transfer or abstraction then takes place between the solvent ions and the sample. Eluent flows up to 2 millilitres/minute can be accommodated without splitting the flow. 1.1.3 Electrospray Electrospray ionisation (ESI) takes place as a result of imparting a strong electrical charge to the eluent as it emerges from the nebuliser. An aerosol of charged droplets emerges from the nebuliser. These undergo a reduction in size by solvent evaporation until they have attained a sufficient charge density to allow sample ions to be ejected from the surface of the droplet (“ion evaporation”). Instrument Description 7 1 A characteristic of ESI spectra is that ions may be singly or multiply charged. Since the mass spectrometer filters ions according to their mass-to-charge ratio ( ), compounds of high molecular weight can be determined if multiply charged ions are formed. Eluent flows up to 1 ml/min can be accommodated although it is often preferable with electrospray ionisation to split the flow such that 5-50 µl/min of eluent enters the mass spectrometer. 1.1.4 Nanoflow Electrospray The optional nanoflow interface allows electrospray ionisation to be performed in the flow rate range 5 to 1000 nanolitres per minute. For a given sample concentration, the ion currents observed in nanoflow are comparable to those seen in normal flow rate electrospray. Great sensitivity gains are therefore observed when similar scan parameters are used, due to the great reductions in sample consumption. 8 Overview 1 1.2 Ion Optics Figure 1-2 Q-Tof micro Ion Optics The principal components of the ion optical system are shown in Figure 1-2. Ions generated in the Z-spray source are transferred to the quadrupole analyser MS1 via the independently pumped RF lens. After leaving the quadrupole analyser the ions flow into the orthogonal time of flight analyser MS2. The ion beam is focused into the pusher by the acceleration, focus, steer and tube lenses. The pusher then pulses a section of the beam towards the reflectron, which then reflects ions back to the detector. As ions travel from the pusher to the detector they are separated in mass according to their flight times, with ions of the highest mass to charge ratio ( ) arriving later. Probe MS1 (Quadrupole MS) MS2 (TOF MS) MCP Detector Pusher Z-spray Ion Source RF Lens Hexapole Transfer Lens Quadrupole Analyser Hexapole Collision Cell Reflectron Internal Layout 9 1 The pusher may be operated at repetition frequencies of up to 30 kHz, resulting in a full spectrum being recorded by the detector every 33 microseconds. Each spectrum is summed in the histogram memory of the time to digital converter until the histogrammed spectrum is transferred to the host PC. If the user has requested an acquisition rate of 1 spectrum/second, each spectrum viewed on the host PC will be the result of summing up to 30,000 individual spectra recorded at the detector. Unlike scanning instruments, the TOF performs parallel detection of all masses within the spectrum at very high sensitivity and acquisition rates. This characteristic is of particular advantage when the instrument is coupled to fast chromatography, since each spectrum is representative of the sample composition at that point in time, irrespective of how rapidly the sample composition is changing. 1.3 Internal Layout Caution: The covers should not be removed without first isolating the instrument at the electricity supply. Attention: The internal layout is shown in the following diagrams for information only, and does not imply that labelled components are user-serviceable. 10 Overview 1 1.3.1 Mechanical Components Figure 1-3 Mechanical Components – Internal View. The main internal mechanical components of the instrument are: • The source housing, containing the RF (hexapole) lens. • The MS1 analyser housing, containing the quadrupole analyser, hexapole collision cell and hexapole transfer lens • The TOF analyser housing, containing the pusher, detector and reflectron assemblies. • One 250 litre/second turbomolecular pump, plus one split-flow turbomolecular pump. • Two active inverted magnetron (Penning) gauges and two Pirani gauges. 1.3.2 Electrical Components The main electronics unit is located in the lower rear section of the instrument. This contains: Osmc Osmc DESOLVATION GAS CAPILLARY CORONA NANOFLOW PROBES NEBULISER GAS LOAD INJECT GAS CELL NANOFLOW RF Generator PSU Z-spray Source Turbomolecular Pumps Internal Layout 11 1 • High voltage power supplies. • These supply the probe or corona, reflectron, TOF flight tube and lens circuits. • Low voltage power supplies. • These supply the PCBs, high voltage supplies and turbomolecular pumps. • Main PCBs. • For communications, lenses and quadrupole control. Figure 1-4 Rear View of Instrument Main PCBs Flight Tube High Voltage PSU 12 Overview 1 1.4 The Vacuum System Figure 1-5 Q-Tof micro Vacuum System 1.4.1 Fine Pumping Q-Tof micro is equipped with three water cooled turbomolecular pumps, providing independent fine pumping of the source hexapole, quadrupole and TOF analysers. Details of the operation and maintenance of the pumps can be found in the manufacturer’s manuals provided. TOF Analyser Quadrupole Analyser Automatic Vent (to N ) Exhaust 2 Oil Mist Filter Rotary Pump Pirani Gauge Active Inverted Magnetron Gauge Pirani Gauge Turbomolecular Pump Split Flow Turbomolecular Pump CID Gas Solenoid Valve Speedivalve Probe Z-spray Ion Source Gas Cell The Vacuum System 13 1 1.4.2 Rotary Pumping Source pumping and turbomolecular pump backing is by a direct drive rotary pump. The rotary pump is situated at the front of the instrument. Details of the operation and maintenance of the pump can be found in the manufacturer’s manual provided. 1.4.3 Pressure Measurement The backing pressure is monitored by an active Pirani gauge. The analyser and TOF pressures are monitored by active inverted magnetron (Penning) gauges. These gauges act as vacuum switches, switching the instrument out of Operate mode if the pressure is too high. Pressure readings may be displayed on the MassLynx NT tune page. The analyser Penning gauge only comes on when the vacuum display window is open. At other times the gauge is off. The analyser Pirani gauge is used when the diaply is off, though no pressures are shown. 1.4.4 Vacuum Protection The vacuum system is fully interlocked to provide adequate protection in the event of: • a fault in the vacuum system. • a failure of the power supply. • a failure of the water supply. • a vacuum leak. 14 Overview 1 1.5 Front Panel Connections Figure 1-6 Front Panel 1.5.1 Desolvation Gas and Probe Nebuliser Gas The PTFE gas lines for the Desolvation Gas and probe Nebuliser Gas are connected to the front of the instrument using threaded metal fittings. Cone Gas is connected internally. 1.5.2 High Voltage The electrical connection for the ESI capillary or the APcI corona discharge pin is via the coaxial high voltage connector. This socket is labeled Capillary / Corona. 1.5.3 Heaters The electrical connection for the APcI probe or the ESI desolvation heater is via the multi-way connector labeled Probes. This is removed from the front panel by pulling on the metal sleeve of the plug. Both the electrospray desolvation heater and the APcI probe heater use this connector. The power for the source block heater is permanently connected. As a consequence, the source block assembly is usually very hot, and should not be touched. Front Panel Connections 15 1 1.5.4 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Status Display The display on the front panel of the instrument consists of two 3-colour light emitting diodes (LEDs). The display generated by the Pump LED is dependent on the vacuum status of the instrument. The Operate LED depends on both the vacuum status and whether the operate mode has been selected from the Data System. Further information is included in Automatic Pumping and Vacuum Protection (see Routine Procedures). Divert / Injection Valve The divert / injection valve may be used in several ways depending on the plumbing arrangement: • As an injection valve, with the needle port and sample loop fitted. • As a divert valve, to switch the flow of solvent during a LC run. • As a switching valve to switch, for example, between a LC system and a syringe pump containing calibrant. This valve is pneumatically operated, using the same nitrogen supply as the rest of the instrument. The two switches marked Load and Inject enable the user to control the valve when making loop injections at the instrument. 16 Overview 1 1.6 Rear Panel Connections Figure 1-7 Rear Panel Connections 1.6.1 Water Water is used to cool the turbomolecular pumps. 1.6.2 Nitrogen Gas In The nitrogen supply (100 psi, 7 bar) should be connected to the Nitrogen Gas In push-in connector using 6mm PTFE tubing. If necessary this tubing can be connected to ¼ inch tubing using standard ¼ inch fittings. Caution: Use only PTFE tubing or clean metal tubing to connect between the nitrogen supply and the instrument. The use of other types of plastic tubing will result in chemical contamination of the source. Rotary Pump Power Supply Inlet Water In Collision Gas In Nitrogen In Nitrogen Out PC Port Power In Network Connection Water Out Rear Panel Connections 17 1 1.6.3 Exhausts The exhaust from the rotary pump should be vented to atmosphere outside the laboratory. The gas exhaust, which also contains solvent vapours, should be vented via a separate fume hood, industrial vent or cold trap. The gas exhaust should be connected using 10mm plastic tubing connected to the push-in fitting. Caution: Do not connect these two exhaust lines together as, in the event of an instrument failure, rotary pump exhaust could be admitted into the source chamber producing severe contamination. 1.6.4 Supply Inlet The mains power cord should be wired to a 230V mains outlet using a suitable plug, or to a transformer. For plugs with an integral fuse, the fuse should be rated at 13 amps (UK only). 1.6.5 Electronics This circuit breaker switches power to the electronics. In the event of the instrument drawing more than the rated current, the circuit breaker will trip. 1.6.6 Rotary Pump This circuit breaker switches power to the rotary and turbomolecular pumps. In the event of the pumps drawing more than the rated current, it will trip. 1.6.7 Event Out Four outputs, Out 1 to Out 4 (Figure 1-8), are provided to allow various peripherals to be connected to the instrument. Switches S1 to S4 allow each output to be set to be either a contact closure (upper position) or a voltage output (lower position). Out 1 and Out 2, when set to voltage output, each have an output of 5 volts. The voltage output of both Out 3 and Out 4 is 24 volts. During a sample run an event output may be configured to close between acquisitions and is used typically to enable an external device to inject the next sample. 18 Overview 1 1.6.8 Contact Closure In In 1 and In 2 inputs are provided ((Figure 1-8) to allow an external device to start sample acquisition once the device has performed its function (typically sample injection). 1.6.9 Analog Channels Four analog channel (Figure 1-8) inputs are available, for acquiring simultaneous data such as a UV detector output. The input differential voltage must not exceed one volt. Figure 1-8 Rear Panel Outputs 1.7 MassLynx Data System A PC computer runs the MassLynx NT software system to control Q-Tof micro, and to acquire and manipulate data from it. A high resolution colour monitor is also supplied. Interaction with MassLynx NT is via the mouse and keyboard using menu-driven commands. Printing, file management and other routine procedures are performed using the appropriate Windows NT modules. EVENT OUT C ON TAC T C LO SU RE CONTACT CLOSURE IN P U TS AN ALOG UE INPUTS IN 1 4 1Vmax 24V MUX IN OUT 24V 5V 5V 4 3 2 1 2 1Vmax 1 1Vmax 3 1Vmax IN 2 MassLynx Data System 19 1 1.7.1 Software The following software packages are supplied with Q-Tof micro: • MassLynx NT. • DataBridge, a utility to convert other format data files into MassLynx format. • Microsoft Windows NT/2000/XP graphical environment. • Mouse configuration. A range of optional software modules for different applications is also available. The MassLynx NT User’s Guide describes the many facilities of the Micromass software. Documentation for the other software is also supplied. 20 Overview Start Up Following a Complete Shutdown 21 2 Chapter 2 Routine Procedures The following Routine Procedures are described in this chapter: • Section 2.1, Start Up Following a Complete Shutdown • Section 2.2, Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown • Section 2.3, Automatic Startup and Shutdown 2.1 Start Up Following a Complete Shutdown 2.1.1 Preparation If the instrument has been unused for a lengthy period of time, proceed as follows: 1. Check the level of oil in the rotary pump sight glass. Refill or replenish as necessary as described in the pump manufacturer’s literature. 2. Connect a supply of dry, high purity nitrogen to the connector on the service panel at the rear of the instrument. Adjust the outlet pressure to 7 bar (100 psi). 3. Connect the water supply to the connections at the rear of the instrument. 4. Check that the rotary pump exhaust is connected to a suitable vent. 5. Check that the instrument, data system and other peripheral devices (LC equipment, printer etc.) are connected to suitable mains supplies. 6. Check that the etherlink connection is made between the control PC and the instrument PC. 7. Switch on the host PC. Log on to Windows NT and wait for the system to boot up before the Q-Tof micro is switched on. 8. Switch on the mains to the mass spectrometer using the two circuit breakers situated on the service panel at the rear of the instrument. Attention: Do not connect the two exhaust lines together. In the event of an instrument failure, rotary pump exhaust could be admitted into the source chamber, producing severe contamination 22 Routine Procedures 2 9. Switch on the embedded PC using the switch at the rear of the instrument. 10. Log on to Micromass account (password analysis). Note: Windows NT and MassLynx are configured to prevent unauthorized access. 11. On the host PC, select Instrument >MS Tune from the MassLynx Shortcut bar. This will invoke the Instrument Tune Page. 2.1.2 Pumping 1. Select Vacuum from the menu bar at the top of the tune page. 2. Click on Pump. 3. The rotary pump and the turbomolecular pumps start simultaneously. 4. The Vacuum LED on the front of the instrument shows amber as the system pumps down. When the system has reached operating vacuum the Vacuum LED changes to a steady green. 5. If the rotary pump oil has been changed or replenished, open the gas ballast valve on the rotary pump. See the pump manufacturer’s literature for details. Rotary pumps are normally noticeably louder when running under gas ballast. 6. If opened, close the gas ballast valve when the rotary pump has run under gas ballast for 30 minutes. Attention: To minimize wear to the lubricated components of the rotary pump, the manufacturers recommend that the pump is not started when the oil temperature is below 12°C. Start Up Following a Complete Shutdown 23 2 2.1.3 MCP Detector Conditioning Figure 2-1 MCP Conditioning Dialog The MCP detector must be conditioned before use, by gradually increasing the applied voltage over a long time period. This is necessary to allow escape of all absorbed water from within the microchannels. Under normal operation the analyzer automatically vents to dry nitrogen. However, if the nitrogen supply was not connected to the instrument when last vented, or if the instrument has been left vented for more than one day, a significant amount of water vapor may have entered the analyzer. Under these circumstances it is good practice to allow the instrument to pump for 12 hours before commencing the conditioning process. In all cases, the TOF pressure must be 2e-6 mbar prior to commencing MCP conditioning. MCP conditioning should be repeated after every instrument venting. Note: It is not necessary to recondition the detector if the instrument has been left out of the operate mode while still under vacuum. Note: During routine cleaning of the source sample cone, the source isolation valve is closed in order to maintain analyzer vacuum. It is not, therefore, necessary to recondition the detector after this procedure. The procedure for MCP conditioning is as follows: 1. Ensure that the TOF pressure is 2e-6 mbar. 2. Check that the MCP Detector voltage is set to zero on the tune page. 3. Switch the instrument into Operate. 24 Routine Procedures 2 4. Select Options > MCP Conditioning to access the MCP conditioning program (Figure 2-1). 5. Set Start to 100V, Stop to 2700V, Duration to 600 minutes and Step to 5 minutes. 6. A ‘quick condition’ may be performed following brief venting, after source cleaning for example. 7. Set Start to 100V, Stop to 2700V, Duration to 180 minutes and Step to 1 minute. 2.1.4 Instrument Warm-up Switch the instrument into the operate mode by selecting Operate on the MassLynx tune page. For the best mass accuracy to be obtained the instrument temperature must be stabilized for a minimum of two hours after switching into operate. Note: Leaving the instrument continuously in operate does not shorten the detector lifetime. It is recommended that the instrument is left in operate at all times (except of course during maintenance procedures) in order to reduce mass scale drifts due to temperature changes. Switching the instrument out of operate mode overnight is not necessary. 2.1.5 Using the Instrument The Q-Tof micro is now almost ready to use. To complete the start up procedure and prepare for running samples, follow the instructions in Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown in the following pages. 2.2 Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown The instrument will have been left in the operate mode under vacuum. It is recommended that the data system is left on overnight. However, if the data system has been switched off, switch it on as described in the preceding section. Attention: Failure to follow the recommended MCP conditioning procedure can severely reduce detector lifetime. Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown 25 2 2.2.1 Preparation for Electrospray Operation If the corona discharge pin is fitted, proceed as follows: 1. Deselect Operate from the tune page to put the instrument into standby mode. 2. Disconnect the gas and electrical connections from the front panel. 3. Unscrew the probe thumb nuts and remove the probe. 4. Undo the three thumb screws and remove the probe adjustment flange and glass tube. 5. Disconnect the APcI high voltage cable from the socket positioned at the bottom right corner of the source flange. 6. Remove the corona discharge pin from its mounting contact, and fit the blanking plug. 7. Replace the glass tube and adjustment flange. 8. Ensure that the source enclosure is in place. Note: The Z-spray source enclosure consists of the glass tube and the probe adjustment flange. 9. With the corona discharge pin removed, the plug fitted and the source enclosure in place, proceed as follows: 10. Connect the source’s gas line to Desolvation Gas on the front panel. Tighten the nut to ensure a good seal. 11. Check that the lead of the probe adjustment flange is plugged into the socket labelled Probes on the front panel. 12. Connect the electrospray probe’s gas line to Nebuliser Gas on the front panel. 13. Connect the liquid flow of a LC system or syringe pump to the probe. 14. Insert the probe into the source and tighten the two thumb nuts to secure the probe firmly. Caution: The ion source block can be heated to temperatures of 150°C, and will be maintained at the set temperature when the source enclosure is removed. Touching the ion block when hot may cause burns to the operator Caution: Operating the source without the source enclosure will result in solvent vapor escape and the exposure of hot surfaces and high voltages. 26 Routine Procedures 2 15. Plug the probe lead into Capillary / Corona on the front panel. 16. If necessary, change the ionization mode using the Ion Mode command. 17. Set Source Block Temp to 100°C and Desolvation Temp to 120°C. 2.2.2 Preparation for APcI Operation If the corona discharge pin is not fitted, proceed as follows: 1. Deselect Operate from the tune page to put the instrument into standby mode. 2. Disconnect the gas and electrical connections from the front panel. 3. Unscrew the probe thumb nuts and remove the probe. 4. After a period of operation at high flow rates, allow the glass source enclosure to cool before removal. 5. Undo the three thumb screws and remove the probe adjustment flange and glass tube. 6. Remove the blanking plug from the discharge pin mounting contact and fit the corona discharge pin, ensuring that the tip is in line with the tip of the sample cone. 7. Connect the APcI high voltage cable between Capillary / Corona and the socket positioned at the bottom left corner of the source flange. 8. Replace the glass tube, adjustment flange and moulded cover. 9. With the corona discharge pin fitted and the source enclosure in place, proceed as follows: 10. Insert the APcI probe into the source and tighten up the two thumb screws. 11. If necessary, change the ionization mode using the Ion Mode command. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. Attention: The ion source block can be heated to temperatures of 150°C, and will be maintained at the set temperature when the source enclosure is removed. Touching the ion block when hot may cause burns to the operator. Caution: Operating the source without the source enclosure will result in solvent vapor escape and the exposure of hot surfaces and high voltages. Start Up Following Overnight Shutdown 27 2 12. Set Source Temp to 150°C. Note: Do not start the liquid flow until the gas flow and probe heater are switched on with the probe inserted. 2.2.3 Transient Pressure Trip The transient trip is designed to protect the instrument from potentially damaging pressure surges and operates routinely whenever the pressure rises. Should the vacuum gauge(s) detect a pressure surge above the preset trip level (normally set at 1e-5 mbar by software) the following events occur: • The green Pump lamp becomes amber. • If in the operate mode, the system turns off the critical source, analyzer and detector voltages, and the green Operate lamp becomes amber. • Acquisition continues though, of course, no real data are recorded. When the vacuum recovers: • The amber Pump lamp becomes green. • If previously in the operate mode, voltages are restored and Operate reverts to green. The period during which the trip was operative will appear in a raw total ion chromatogram as a period of reduced baseline noise. Further deterioration of the system pressures results in a “vacuum fault” condition and the system is shut down (see below). 2.2.4 Power Failure In the event of an unexpected failure of the electrical supply the instrument is vented safely. If power is unlikely to be restored quickly, follow the shutdown procedure described later in this chapter. When power is restored follow the startup procedure. Should the power fail and then be restored while the instrument is unattended, the system will continue to vent, and will require to be pumped down in accordance with the start-up procedure. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. 28 Routine Procedures 2 2.2.5 Nitrogen Supply Replacement of nitrogen cylinders should be conducted in accordance with the operation, handling and storage instructions provided by the local gas supplier. Toggle the API gas button to Off, to close the nitrogen inlet valve prior to disconnecting the supply. Set the nitrogen inlet pressure to 7 bar (100 psi). 2.3 Automatic Startup and Shutdown MassLynx comes with automatic Startup and Shutdown files. They are found in the C:\MassLynx\Shutdown directory and are called ShutDownxxx.acl and StartUpxxx.acl where xxx refers to the instrument configuration. E.g. ShutDownESI_ACE.acl for an instrument configured as an ACE system. 2.3.1 The Shutdown Editor The shutdown editor allows the automatic startup and shutdown procedures to be modified or new procedures to be created. These can be run automatically before or after a batch if the relevant boxes are checked in the Batch Control frame of the Shutdown Page (Section 2.3.3). Select Edit Shutdown or Startup from the MassLynx Instrument Shortcut Bar. This Invokes the Shutdown Editor which has two tabbed pages, the Shutdown Page (described in Section 2.3.3 on page 29) and the Auto Control Tasks Page (described in Section 2.3.4 on page 33) Attention: Under no circumstances should the nitrogen pressure exceed 10 bar (140 psi). Automatic Startup and Shutdown 29 2 2.3.2 The Shutdown Editor Toolbar 2.3.3 Shutdown Page Select Edit Shutdown or Startup from the MassLynx Instrument Shortcut Bar. By default the Shutdown Page is displayed (Figure 2-2) with the following parameters. Toolbar Button Menu Equivalent Purpose File… New Create a new Startup or Shutdown file File… Open Open an existing Startup or Shutdown file File… Save or Save As Save a Startup or Shutdown file File… Print Print a Startup or Shutdown file Control List..Run List Run a Startup or Shutdown file Control List…Stop List Stop a Startup or Shutdown file Enable startup before batch Enables/disables the running of a task file before the start of a batch of samples. Startup Enabled will appear on the right of the Status bar on the bottom of the MassLynx window when checked. Startup file The file name of the task file that is run before the start of a batch. Browse startup file Brings up a file dialog allowing a task file to be selected for the startup before batch procedure. Enable shutdown after batch Enables/disables the running of a task file after the end of a batch of samples. Shutdown Enabled will appear on the right of the Status bar on the bottom of the MassLynx window when checked. 30 Routine Procedures 2 Figure 2-2 Shutdown Page Configure Shutdown on Error Clicking on the Configure Error Shutdown button displays the following dialog. Shutdown file The file name of the task file that is run after the end of a batch. Browse shutdown file Brings up a file dialog allowing a task file to be selected for the shutdown after batch procedure. Shutdown Time This is the delay (in minutes) between the batch finishing and the shutdown procedure initiating. Shutdown On Error This allows shutdown on error to be enabled/disabled and to determine whether the shutdown tasks should be initiated immediately, or after the time entered in the Shutdown Time edit box. Configure Error Shutdown Brings up the Shutdown on Error Configuration dialog (see Section on page 30). Optimization Check this box to optimize the procedure. E-mail on Shutdown Check box and enter the e-mail address for shutdown information to be sent. Automatic Startup and Shutdown 31 2 Figure 2-3 Shutdown on Error Configuration Dialog Configure Contact Closures Clicking on the Configure CCs displays the following dialog. MS error Enables/disables running a task file when an MS error occurs. MS error shutdown file The task file to run on an MS error. MS error browse file Allows user to browse for task files. MS Comms Error Enables/Disables running task file when MS comms error occurs MS comms error shutdown file The task file to run on an MS comms error. Inlet fatal error Enables/disables running a task file when a LC error occurs. Inlet error shutdown file The task file to run when a LC error occurs. Inlet error browse file Allows user to browse for task files. Ext. device error Enables/disables running a task file when an external device error occurs. Ext. device shutdown file The task file to run when an external device error occurs. Ext. device browse file Allows user to browse for task files. Gas Threshold Invokes the Gas Threshold dialog (see Section on page 32) Configure CCs Invokes the Configure Event In dialog (see Section on page 31). 32 Routine Procedures 2 Figure 2-4 Configure Event In Dialog This window is used to configure the Event In contact closures on the back of the MS. These can be used to detect errors in external devices enabling the External device error flag to be set. Only contact closures not used to signal the completion of an injection, or not used by MUX systems, are enabled. Each of the CCs available has the following controls. Gas Thresholds Clicking on the Gas Thresholds button displays the following dialog. Event In Number Relates to the Event In number on the rear of the MS. Availability This can either be ‘Used By Inlet’ , ’Available’ , ‘Used by MUX’ or ‘Not Configured’. The controls are only enabled if the CC is ‘Available’. Use For Ext. Dev. Error Enables/disables the use of this contact closure to signal an error in an external device. State When in Error Determines what state the CC will be in when an error is present in an external device. Automatic Startup and Shutdown 33 2 Figure 2-5 Gas Threshold Dialog Clicking Gas Thresholds on the Configure Shutdown on Error dialog (Figure 2-3) invokes the Gas Threshold dialog; an MS error is flagged if the source gas flow rate falls below the value entered in the Low Threshold… (L/Hr) text box. Note: The Gas Thresholds button is only available when the MS error option is selected. 2.3.4 The Auto Control Tasks Page Figure 2-6 Auto Control Tasks Page Task This is a dropdown list box with all the available tasks. Pre-Delay This is the length of time that will elapse before the current task is performed 34 Routine Procedures 2 To Add a Task 1. Select a task from the dropdown Task list box. 2. Enter the required parameters. 3. Press the add button. Note: If this is a new task timetable the task will be added to the end of the list. If a task has been inserted into the task timetable then all subsequent tasks will be added after the inserted task. To add a task to the end of the timetable after inserting a task, double click below the last entry in the timetable and then add the new task. To Insert a Task 1. Click on the entry in the task timetable before which you want to insert the new task. 2. Select a task from the dropdown Task list box. 3. Enter the required parameters. 4. Press the add button. The task will be inserted before the selected entry. To Modify a Task 1. Click on the entry in the task timetable. The details for the task will be displayed in the fields on the left of the screen. 2. Change the required parameters. 3. Press the modify button. The details will change in the task timetable. To Delete a Task 1. Click on the entry in the task timetable. The details for the task will be displayed in the fields on the left of the screen. Post-Delay This is the length of time that will elapse after the current task has been completed and before the next task is started. E.g. a Post delay of 60s, in the Tune File task above, means that there will be a delay of 60 seconds before the next task is started, to allow the machine to stabilize with the new tune page settings. Ion Mode This is a dropdown list box with all the available ionization modes. File Name This is the name of the Tune file to be used. The file name can be typed in, including the full path name, or selected from the browser displayed when the Browse button is pressed. Automatic Startup and Shutdown 35 2 2. Press the add button. The task selected will be deleted from the task timetable. To Delete All Tasks Press the add button. All tasks will be deleted from the task timetable. To Change the Width of a Column The width of the columns can be changed, by positioning the mouse pointer on the heading between two columns until the symbol appears, and then click and drag until the column is the required width. Saving/Loading Startup and Shutdown Files To Open a Startup or Shutdown file 1. Press or select Open from the File menu. This displays the Open file dialog. 2. Select a data file and press the Open button. To Save a Startup or Shutdown file 1. Press or select Save or Save As from the File menu. If this is a new file, or the Save As option has been selected, the Save As dialog is displayed 2. Type a name into the File Name box and press the Save button. Printing Startup and Shutdown Files 1. Press or select Print from the File menu. This displays the Print dialog. 2. Select the printer, print range and number of copies and press the OK button. Creating Startup and Shutdown Files Press or select New from the File menu. Running Startup and Shutdown Files If Startup or Shutdown is selected from the MassLynx Short cut bar or from the Shutdown editor Control List menu then the automatic startup and shutdown files are run. To Run a Different Startup or Shutdown file: – 1. Open the required file in the Shutdown editor and press the toolbar button or select Run List from the Shutdown editor Control List menu. 36 Routine Procedures 2. Press the toolbar button or select Stop List from the Shutdown editor Control List menu if you wish to stop running this file. Alternatively if the Enable startup before batch or Enable shutdown after batch options are checked on the Shutdown Page (Section 2.3.3) the files will be run before or after a Sample List run. 2.3.1 Shutdown Log Figure 2-7 Shutdown Startup Log Shutdown / Startup Log The Shutdown / Startup Log keeps a record of the most recent startups and shutdowns. Select Shutdown Log > Recent Shutdowns and Startups invokes the Shutdown Startup Log (Figure 2-7). Selecting the most Recent Shutdowns and Startups in the top pane will show the tasks carried out in the bottom pane. Automatic Startup and Shutdown 37 2 Log Parameters Figure 2-1 Log Parameters Dialog Selecting Shutdown Log > Log Parameters from the main menu bar invokes the Shutdown Log Parameters dialog. The number of startups and shutdowns recorded in the Startup / Shutdown Log can be altered by changing the number in the text box. 38 Routine Procedures Introduction 39 3 Chapter 3 Electrospray 3.1 Introduction Figure 3-1 Electrospray Scheme The ESI interface consists of the standard Z-spray source fitted with an electrospray probe. See the following chapter for additional information concerning the optional nanoflow interface. Mobile phase from the LC column or infusion pump enters through the probe and is pneumatically converted to an electrostatically charged aerosol spray. The solvent is evaporated from the spray by means of the desolvation heater. The resulting analyte and solvent ions are then drawn through the sample cone aperture into the ion block, from where they are then extracted into the analyzer. The electrospray ionization technique allows rapid, accurate and sensitive analysis of a wide range of analytes from low molecular weight (less than 200 Da) polar compounds to biopolymers larger than 100 kDa. Sample Probe Nebuliser Gas Desolvation Gas Source Enclosure Isolation Valve Sample Cone Extraction Cone Rotary Pump Turbomolecular Pumps Analyser RF Lens Cleanable Baffle Cone Gas Exhaust Liner Exhaust Purge Gas 40 Electrospray 3 Generally, compounds of less than 1000 Da produce singly charged protonated molecules ([M+H]+) in positive ion mode. Likewise, these low molecular weight analytes yield ([M-H]–) ions in negative ion mode, although this is dependent upon compound structure. High mass biopolymers, for example peptides, proteins and oligonucleotides, produce a series of multiply charged ions. The acquired data can be transformed by the data system to give a molecular weight profile of the biopolymer. The source can be tuned to fragment ions within the ion block. This can provide valuable structural information for low molecular weight analytes. The most common methods of delivering sample to the electrospray source are: Syringe Pump and Injection Valve A flow of mobile phase solvent passes through an injection valve to the electrospray source. This is continuous until the pump syringes empty and need to be refilled. Sample is introduced through the valve injection loop (usually 10 or 20µl capacity) switching the sample plug into the mobile phase flow. Tuning and acquisition are carried out as the sample plug enters the source. (At a flow rate of 10 µl/min a 20µl injection lasts 2 minutes.) Reciprocating Pump and Injection Valve A flow of mobile phase solvent passes through an injection valve to the electrospray source. Sample injection and analysis procedure is the same as for the syringe pump. The pump reservoirs are simply topped up for continuous operation. The most suitable reciprocating pumps for this purpose are those which are specified to deliver a flow between 1 µl/min and 1 ml/min. A constant flow at such rates is more important than the actual flow rate. The injection valve on reciprocating pumps may be replaced by an autosampler for unattended, overnight operation. Infusion Pump The pump syringe is filled with sample in solution. The infusion pump then delivers the contents of the syringe to the source at a constant flow rate. This arrangement allows optimization and analysis while the sample flows to the source at typically 5-30 µl/min. Further samples require the syringe to be removed, washed, refilled with the next sample, and replumbed. A 50:50 mixture of acetonitrile and water is a suitable mobile phase for the syringe pump system and the reciprocating pump systems. This is appropriate for positive and negative ion operation. Introduction 41 3 Positive ion operation may be enhanced by 0.1 to 1% formic acid in the sample solution. Negative ion operation may be enhanced by 0.1 to 1% ammonia in the sample solution. Acid should not be added in this mode. These additives should not be used in the mobile phase for flow injection analysis (FIA) studies, to allow easy change over between positive and negative ion analysis. Degassed solvents are recommended for the syringe and reciprocating pumps. Degassing can be achieved by sonification or helium sparging. The solvents should be filtered, and stored under cover at all times. It is wise periodically to check the flow rate from the solvent delivery system. This can be carried out by filling a syringe barrel or a graduated glass capillary with the liquid emerging from the probe tip and timing a known volume, say 10µl. Once the rate has been measured and set, a note should be made of the back pressure readout on the pump as fluctuation of this reading can indicate problems with the solvent flow. 3.1.1 Post-column Splitting Although the electrospray source can accommodate flow rates up to 1 ml/min, it is recommended that the flow is split post-column to approximately 200 µl/min. Also, even at lower flow rates, a split may be required to save valuable samples. The post-column split consists of a zero dead-volume tee piece connected as shown in Figure 3-2. The split ratio is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the back pressure created in the waste line, by changing either the length or the diameter of the waste tube. A UV cell may also be incorporated in the waste line, avoiding the requirement for in-line, low volume “Z cells”. As the back pressure is varied, the flow rate at the probe tip should be checked as described above. These principles apply to splitting for both megaflow and normal flow electrospray. 42 Electrospray 3 Figure 3-2 Post Column Split Figure 3-3 Comparison of Normal and Megaflow Electrospray To Waste or UV Cell LC Column Probe PTFE Sleeve PTFE Sleeve Fused Silica Tube 1/16″ o.d. 0.007″ i.d. Peek Tube Injector Normal Flow Electrospray Megaflow Electrospray Operation 43 3 3.1.2 Megaflow Megaflow electrospray (Figure 3-3) enables flow rates from 200 µl/min to 1 ml/min to be accommodated. This allows microbore (2.1mm) or 4.6mm diameter columns to be interfaced without splitting. Changing Between Flow Modes When changing between megaflow and standard electrospray operation, it is essential that the correct tubing is used to connect the probe to the sample injector. For megaflow operation 1/16″ o.d., 0.007″ i.d. peek tubing, easily identified by its yellow stripe, is used. This replaces the standard fused silica tube, together with the PTFE sleeves. 3.2 Operation Figure 3-4 ESI Source Caution: Operating the source without the source enclosure will result in solvent vapor escape and the exposure of hot surfaces and high voltages. Blanking Plug Corona Discharge Pin Mounting Contact Exhaust Liner High Voltage Socket Cleanable Baffle 44 Electrospray 3 Ensure that the source is assembled as described in Maintenance and Fault Finding, and that the instrument is pumped down and prepared for electrospray operation as described in Routine Procedures. Ensure that a supply of nitrogen has been connected to the gas inlet at the rear of the instrument and that the head pressure is between 6 and 7 bar (90-100 psi). Ensure that the exhaust liner and the cleanable baffle are fitted to the source. This is important for optimum electrospray intensity and stability when operating at low flow rates. Checking the ESI Probe 1. Connect the electrospray probe to a pulse free pump. 2. Solvent should be degassed to prevent beam instabilities caused by bubbles. 3. Connect the PTFE tubing of the electrospray probe to Nebuliser Gas on the front panel. Secure with the nut provided. 4. With the probe removed from the source turn on the liquid flow at 10 µl/min and check that liquid flow is observed at the tip of the capillary. 5. To avoid unwanted capillary action effects, do not allow liquid to flow to the probe for long periods without the nitrogen switched on. 6. Turn on Nitrogen by selecting API Gas, and check that a nebuliser flow of less than 100 litres/hour is registered. 7. To monitor the flow rate, select Window then Gas Flow on the tune page and observe the readback window. 8. Check that there is gas flow at the probe tip and ensure that there is no significant leakage of nitrogen elsewhere. 9. Adjust the probe tip to ensure complete nebulization of the liquid. Operation 45 3 There should be approximately 0.5 mm of sample capillary protruding from the nebulizing capillary (Figure 3-5). Figure 3-5 Electrospray Tip The tip of the electrospray probe can influence the intensity and stability of the ion beam. A damaged or incorrectly adjusted probe tip will lead to poor electrospray performance. 10. Using a magnifying glass ensure that both inner and outer stainless steel capillaries are straight and circular in cross-section. 11. Ensure that the inner stainless steel capillary is coaxial to the outer capillary. If the two capillaries are not coaxial, it is possible to bend the outer capillary slightly using thumbnail pressure. 12. Insert the probe into the source and tighten the two thumb screws. 13. Plug the probe high voltage cable into Capillary / Corona on the front panel. Obtaining an Ion Beam 1. If necessary, change the ionization mode using the Ion Mode command. 2. Using the needle valve on the front panel, set the desolvation gas flow rate to 300 litres/hour. 3. Turn on the liquid flow at 10 µl/min and set Desolvation Temp to 100°C. 0.6mm Sample Capillary Nebulising Capillary Probe Tip Assembly 46 Electrospray 3 Tuning and Optimization The following parameters, after initial tuning, should be optimized using a sample representative of the analyte to be studied. It will usually be found, with the exception of the sample cone voltage, that settings will vary little from one analyte to another. Probe Position Figure 3-6 Optimum Probe Position The position of the probe (Figure 3-6) is adjusted using the probe adjustment collar (in and out) and the adjustment knob (sideways) located to the left of the probe (Figure 3-7). The two screws can be adjusted singly or simultaneously to optimize the beam. The position for optimum sensitivity and stability for low flow rate work (10 µl/min) is shown. Figure 3-7 Probe Adjustment 8mm Cone Gas 4mm Nozzle Probe Tip In / Out Probe Adjustment Sideways Probe Adjustment Operation 47 3 Small improvements may be gained by varying the position using the sample and solvent system under investigation. The following information should be considered when setting the probe position: • 10 mm of movement is provided in each direction, with 1.25mm of travel per revolution of the probe positioning controls. • At higher liquid flow rates the probe tip should be positioned further away from the sample cone to achieve optimum stability and sensitivity. The position is less critical than at lower flow rates. Nebuliser Gas Optimum nebulization for electrospray performance is achieved with a nitrogen flow between 70 and 90 litres per hour. This can be achieved by fully opening the Nebuliser flow control valve, which is situated on the instrument’s front panel. Desolvation Gas The desolvation gas, also nitrogen, is heated and delivered as a coaxial sheath to the nebulized liquid spray by the desolvation nozzle. Note: The position of the desolvation nozzle heater is fixed relative to the probe tip and requires no adjustment. The Desolvation Gas flow rate is adjusted by the control value situated on the instrument’s front panel. The optimum Desolvation Temp and flow rate is dependent on mobile phase composition and flow rate. A guide to suitable settings is given below. The Desolvation Gas flow rate indicated on the MassLynx tune page represents total drying flow, that is desolvation gas + cone gas (nanoflow only) + purge gas (if enabled). Solvent Flow Rate µl/min Desolvation Temp OC Desolvation Gas Flow Rate Litres/hour <10 100 – 120 200 – 250 10 – 20 120 – 250 200 – 400 20 – 50 250 – 350 200 – 400 >50 350 – 400 500 – 750 48 Electrospray 3 Higher desolvation temperatures give increased sensitivity. However increasing the temperature above the range suggested reduces beam stability. Increasing the gas flow rate higher than the quoted values leads to unnecessarily high nitrogen consumption. Cone Gas The cone gas reduces the intensity of solvent cluster ions and solvent adduct ions. The cone gas flow rate should be optimized by increasing until solvent cluster ions and / or adduct ions are reduced as much as possible without diminishing the intensity of the ion of interest, normally (M+H)+. Typical cone gas flow rates are in the range 100 to 300 litres per hour. Purge Gas The purge gas is not necessary for most ESI applications. It may be useful for megaflow operation where an analyte is susceptible to acetonitrile adducting. Purge gas is enabled simply by removing the blanking plug from the outlet situated within the source enclosure. Purge gas flow rate is a constant fraction (30%) of the total desolvation gas flow. Source temperature 100°C is typical for 50:50 CH3CN:H2O at solvent flow rates up to 50 µl/min. Higher source temperatures, up to 150°C, are necessary for solvents at higher flow rates and higher water content. Capillary Voltage Capillary usually optimizes at 3.0kV, although some samples may tune at values above or below this, within the range 2.5 – 4.0kV for positive electrospray. For negative ion operation a lower voltage is necessary, typically between 2.0 – 3.5kV. At high flow rates this parameter may optimize at a value as low as 1kV. Attention: Do not operate the desolvation heater for long periods of time without a gas flow. To do so could damage the source. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Temp higher than 150°C Operation 49 3 Sample Cone Voltage A Cone setting between 25V and 70V will produce ions for most samples, although solvent ions prefer the lower end and proteins the higher end of this range. Whenever sample quantity and time permit, Cone should be optimized for maximum sensitivity, within the range 15V to 150V. Increasing Cone will increase ion fragmentation within the source. Extraction Cone Voltage Extractor optimizes at 0 – 5V. Higher values may induce ion fragmentation of low molecular weight samples. 3.2.3 Megaflow Hints With this high flow rate technique the setup procedure involves making the following adjustments: • Increase Desolvation Gas flow to 500 litres/hour. • Increase Desolvation Temp to 400°C. • Increase Source Block Temp to 150°C. • Move the probe further away from the sample cone. Note: When changing from electrospray to megaflow operation it is not necessary to adjust any source voltages. Cluster ions are rarely observed with Z-spray. However solvent droplets may form within the source enclosure if the source and desolvation temperatures are too low. Refer to the previous section on operating parameters for typical desolvation gas flow rates. Purge gas can be used during megaflow operation to stop the source enclosure from overheating. This is also beneficial when the analyte is susceptible to acetonitrile adducting. Purge gas is enabled by removing the blanking plug from the outlet situated within the source enclosure. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. 50 Electrospray 3 If the sample is contained within a ‘dirty matrix’ the probe may be moved away from the sample cone to extend time between source cleaning operations. This may incur a small loss in sensitivity. The source enclosure will run cooler if purge gas is used. 3.2.4 Removing the Probe To remove the probe from the source proceed as follows: 1. On the tune page deselect Operate to put the instrument into standby mode. 2. Switch off the liquid flow and disconnect from the probe. 3. Deselect API Gas and turn off Nitrogen. 4. Disconnect the probe cable from the instrument. 5. Disconnect the nebulizing gas supply from the instrument. 3.3 Sample Analysis and Calibration 3.3.5 General Information Care should be taken to ensure that samples are fully dissolved in a suitable solvent. Any particulates must be filtered to avoid blockage of the transfer line or the probe’s capillary. A centrifuge can often be used to separate solid particles from the sample liquid. Caution: It is normal for the source enclosure, the glass tube and parts of the probe mounting flange, to get hot during prolonged megaflow operation. Care should be taken when handling source components during and immediately after operation. Attention: For health and safety reasons always ensure the exhaust line is vented outside the building or to a fume hood. Attention: Ensure that a plastic bottle is connected in the exhaust line to collect any condensed solvents. Sample Analysis and Calibration 51 3 There is usually no benefit in using concentrations greater than 20 pmol/µl for biopolymers or 10 ng/µl for low molecular weight compounds. Higher concentrations will not usually improve analytical performance. Conversely, for biopolymers, lower concentrations often yield better electrospray results. Higher levels require more frequent source cleaning and risk blocking the transfer capillary. Optimization for low molecular weight compounds may usually be achieved using a concentration of 1ng/µl. Samples with phosphate buffers and high levels of salts should be avoided. Alternatively, at the expense of a small drop in sensitivity, the probe can be pulled away from the sample cone to minimize the deposit of involatile material on the cone. To gain experience in sample analysis, it is advisable to start with the qualitative analysis of known standards. A good example of a high molecular weight sample is horse heart myoglobin (molecular weight 16951.48) which produces a series of multiply charged ions that can be used to calibrate the m scale from 800-1600 in either positive ion or negative ion mode. Polyethylene glycol mixtures, for example 300 / 600 / 1000, are low molecular weight samples suitable for calibrating the m scale from approximately 100 to 1200 in positive ion mode. A mixture of sugars covers the same range in negative ion mode. Alternatively, sodium iodide or caesium iodide can be used for calibration. 52 Electrospray 3 Typical ES Positive Ion Samples • Peptides and proteins. • Small polar compounds. • Drugs and their metabolites. • Environmental contaminants (e.g. pesticides, pollutants). • Dye compounds. • Some organometallics. • Small saccharides. Typical ES Negative Ion Samples • Some proteins. • Some drug metabolites (e.g. glucuronide conjugates). • Oligonucleotides. • Some saccharides and polysaccharides. 3.4 Chromatographic Interfacing Electrospray ionization can be routinely interfaced to reversed phase and normal phase chromatographic separations. Depending on the LC pumping system, chromatography column and setup, there are some basic options: • Microbore and capillary chromatography separations employing 1mm diameter (and smaller) columns can be interfaced directly to the electrospray probe. Typical flow rates for such columns may be in the region of 3-50 µl/min. It is suggested that a syringe pump is used to deliver these constant low flow rates through a capillary column. Alternatively, accurate pre-column splitting of higher flow rates from reciprocating pumps can be investigated. In all cases, efficient solvent mixing is necessary for gradient elution separations. This is of paramount importance with regard to low flow rates encountered with capillary columns. HPLC pump manufacturers’ recommendations should be heeded. • 2.1mm diameter reversed phase columns are gaining popularity for many separations previously addressed by 4.6mm columns. Typically flow rates of 200 µl/min are Chromatographic Interfacing 53 3 used, allowing direct coupling to the electrospray source. The increased sample flow rate requires increased source temperature and drying gas flow rate. A UV detector may be placed in-line to the probe, provided that the volume of the detector does not significantly reduce the chromatographic resolution. Whenever a UV detector is used, the analog output may be input to MassLynx NT for chromatographic processing. • The interfacing of 4.6mm columns to the electrospray source can be achieved either by flow splitting or by direct coupling. In both cases an elevated source temperature and drying gas flow rate are required. In general, the best results are obtained by splitting after the column using a zero dead volume tee piece so that 200-300 µl/min is transferred to the source. Conventional reverse phase and normal phase solvent systems are appropriate for LC-electrospray. Involatile buffers may be used but prolonged periods of operation are not recommended. When using involatile buffers the probe should be moved as far away from the sample cone as possible. This may reduce sensitivity slightly, but will reduce the rate at which involatile material will be deposited on the sample cone. Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) and triethylamine (TEA) may be used up to a level of 0.05%. If solvents of high aqueous content are to be used then tuning conditions should be appropriate for the solvent composition entering the source. Higher source temperatures (150°C) are also recommended for high aqueous content solvents. Tetrahydrofuran (THF) should not be used with peek tubing. 3.4.1 LC-MS Sensitivity Enhancement The sensitivity of a LC-MS analysis can be increased or optimized in a number of ways, by alterations to both the LC operation and the MS operation. In the LC area some examples include the use of high resolution columns and columns with fully end capped pickings. For target compound analysis, techniques such as trace enrichment, coupled column chromatography, or phase system switching can have enormous benefits. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. 54 Electrospray Careful choice of the solvent, and solvent additives or modifiers, may also prove important. 55 4 Chapter 4 Nanoflow Electrospray Figure 4-1 The Nanoflow Interface The optional nanoflow interface allows electrospray ionization to be performed in the flow rate range 5 to 1000 nl/min. There are two options for the spraying capillary, which can be alternately fitted to the interface: • Borosilicate metal coated glass capillary. Metal coated glass capillaries allow the lowest flow rates to be obtained although they are used for one sample only and must then be discarded. • Nano-LC. Regulator and Injector (Nano-LC option) Protective Cover Handle Stop Glass Capillary Option Nano-LC Option Stage Three-axis Manipulator 56 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 This option is suitable for flow injection analyses or for coupling to nano-HPLC, and uses a pump to regulate the flow rate down to 100 nl/min. If a syringe pump is to be used, a gas-tight syringe is necessary to obtain correct flow rates without leakage. A volume of 25µl is recommended. Figure 4-2 Nanoflow Electrospray Scheme For a given sample concentration, the ion currents observed in nanoflow are comparable to those seen in normal flow rate electrospray. Great sensitivity gains are therefore observed when similar scan parameters are used, due to the great reductions in sample consumption. The nanoflow end flange consists of a three-axis manipulator, a stage, a protective cover and a stop / handle arrangement for rotation of the manipulator and stage. The manipulator and stage are rotated by 90 degrees to change option or, in the glass capillary option, to load a new nanovial. Attention: Failure to use the stop and handle to rotate the stage can result in permanent damage to the three-axis manipulator. Exhaust Exhaust Liner Turbomolecular Pumps Rotary Pump Cone Gas Purge Gas Analyser Sample Cone Extraction Cone Isolation Valve Source Enclosure RF Lens Cleanable Baffle Sample Capillary Installing the Interface 57 4 4.1 Installing the Interface To change from the normal electrospray interface and install the nanoflow interface: 1. If fitted, remove the probe. 2. Remove the moulded cover from around the source. 3. Undo the three thumb screws and withdraw the probe adjustment flange assembly and glass tube. 4. Place the glass tube, end on, on a flat surface and place the probe support flange assembly on top of the glass tube. 5. Remove the PTFE encapsulated source O ring. Figure 4-3 Electrospray Source Being Removed 6. Unscrew the three probe flange mounting pillars, using the holes to obtain the necessary leverage. Caution: When the source enclosure has been removed the ion block heater is exposed. Ensure that the source block heater has been switched off and has cooled before proceeding. Observe the Source Block Temp readback on the Tune Page Source Thumb Nuts Probe Thum b Nuts Probe Adjustment Flange Source Enclosure Probe Flange Mounting Pillar 58 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 7. If the cone gas nozzle is not in place, close the sample cone isolation valve. Remove the two screws that secure the sample cone and fit the cone gas nozzle. 8. Replace the two screws. 9. Connect the cone gas outlet to the cone gas nozzle using the PTFE tubing provided (Figure 4-4). Open the sample cone isolation valve. Figure 4-4 Nanoflow Source Without Cover The cone gas flow rate is set at 30% of the total desolvation gas flow. 10. Ensure that the purge gas is plugged (disabled). 11. Ensure that the cleanable baffle, the exhaust liner and the corona discharge pin blanking plug are fitted. 12. Fit a viton O ring and the three shorter nanoflow pillars. 13. Install the perspex cover and the nanoflow end flange, securing this with socket head screws. Cone Gas Nozzle PTFE Tubing PTFE Encapsulated O Ring Purge Gas Plug Installing the Interface 59 4 Figure 4-5 Nanoflow Source with Cover and End Flange Do not attempt to refit the moulded cover. 14. If not already in place, attach the microscope or camera brackets using the screw hole and dowels at the top of the bracket. 15. Insert the flexible light guide into the grommet at the base of the perspex cover. 16. Set the light source to its brightest. 17. Block the Desolvation Gas outlet on the instrument’s front panel. 18. Close the nebuliser needle valve. The cone gas is split from the desolvation gas internally. 19. Attach the two cables to the sockets marked Capillary / Corona and Probes on the front panel of the instrument. 20. Set Source Block Temp to approximately 80°C. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. Viton O Ring Socket Head Screws Nanoflow End Flange Perspex Cover 60 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 4.1.1 Operation of the Camera System Figure 4-6 Nanoflow Camera and Microscope System Magnification is controlled by the zoom lens. A fine focus can be achieved by rotating the objective lens. Using the Microscope Focusing is adjusted by rotating the top of the microscope. Microscope Camera Zoom Lens Objective Lens Grommet Installing the Interface 61 4 4.1.2 Glass Capillary Option Installation 1. With the stage rotated outwards, unscrew the union from the end of the assembly. 2. Carefully remove the capillary from its case by lifting vertically while pressing down on the foam with two fingers. 3. Over the blunt end of the capillary, pass the knurled nut, approximately 5mm of conductive elastomer and finally the union. 4. Tighten the nut (finger tight is sufficient) so that 5mm of glass capillary is protruding from the end of it. This distance is measured from the end of the nut to the shoulder of the glass capillary. 5. Load sample into the capillary using either a fused silica syringe needle or a GELoader tip. 6. Screw the holder back into the assembly – finger tight is sufficient. 7. Ensure that Capillary is set to 0V on the tune page. 8. Rotate the stage back into the interface using the stop and handle. When using a GELoader tip, break the nanovial in half, by scoring with a fused silica cutter. This enables the GELoader to reach the tip of the nanovial Nanovial Tip Position The position of the nanovial is adjusted as shown (Figure 4-7). The tip is in line with the centre of the sample cone, at a distance between two and three times the diameter of the cone orifice, as observed through the microscope. Caution: Do not touch the sharp end of the capillary. As well as the risk of injury by a sliver of glass, the capillary may contain toxic sample.s Caution: The capillaries are extremely fragile and must be handled with great care. Always handle using the square end of the capillary. The needle may become inoperable if the sharp end is touched. 62 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 Figure 4-7 Nanovial Tip Position Operation Manoeuvre the stage so that the microscope or camera can view the capillary tip. Using the nanoflow regulator, apply pressure to the back of the tip until a drop of liquid is seen. On the tune page, select APIGas to turn on Nitrogen. Select Operate. Set Capillary between 600 and 1.0kV. Adjust Desolvation Gas flow to 100 litres/hour using the knob on the front panel of the instrument. An ion beam should now be visible on the tune page. Tune the source voltages, adjust the gas flow and adjust the three-axis manipulator for maximum ion current. The ion current may change dramatically with very slight changes of position but the high resolution of the threads in the manipulator allows very fine tuning. Restarting the Spray Should the spray stop, it is possible to restart it by adjusting the three-axis manipulator so that, viewed under magnification, the capillary tip touches the sample cone and a small piece of the glass hair shears off. Set the capillary to zero when doing this. Nano-LC Option 63 4 It may also be necessary to apply some back pressure to the holder to force a drop of liquid from the capillary. Up to 1.4 bar (20 psi) can be applied and, with this pressure, a drop should be visible unless the capillary is blocked. 4.2 Nano-LC Option 4.2.1 Installation With the sprayer assembly removed from the stage and with refrence to Figure 4-8: 1. Cut approximately 25mm of the red stripe peek tubing and, using the plug cap and a Valco nut, set a ferrule to the correct position on the tubing. At this stage the ferrule is required only to grip the tubing lightly, and should not be too tight. 2. Cut the peek such that 10mm of the peek protrudes from the back of the ferrule. 3. Thread approximately 70mm of the 90 micron o.d. fused silica through the new fitting. 4. Ensure that the fused silica is flush with the peek sleeve. 5. Again using the plug cap, tighten the nut further to ensure that the fused silica is gripped. Some force may be required to do this. 6. Remove the sleeved fused silica from the plug cap and remove the Valco nut. 7. Place an O ring onto the peek tube, using tweezers if necessary. The O ring is required to seal the region between the ferrule and the end of the thread on the nano-LC chamber. 8. Thread the sleeved fused silica through the nano-LC chamber. 9. Rotate the microvolume union in the body such that the ferrule seat is aligned correctly. 10. Insert the chamber into the nano-LC body and tighten using a pair of spanners. The capillary can now be checked for flow by connecting the output from a Harvard syringe pump to the other side of the union and setting the flow to 1 µL/min, using a micropipette to measure the flow. It is recommended that a syringe with a volume of no more than 50 millilitres is used. 64 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 Figure 4-8 Nano-LC Assembly 11. Thread the fused silica through the nebulizing tip and screw in the nano-LC chamber such that it is screwed in approximately half way. 12. Cut the fused silica using a tile cutter and adjust the nebulizing tip further, such that 1mm of fused silica protrudes from the tip. 13. Attach the nebulizing gas tubing to the sprayer using an O ring and the special screw. 14. Attach the sprayer assembly to the stage. 1mm From Injector (or Column Attached Directly) Make-up Flow Only (3-way Insert Required) Nebuliser Gas Nano-LC Body Chamber Nebulising Tip Red Stripe Peek Tubing O Ring 90µm Fused Silica Valco Ferrule Microvolume Insert Nano-LC Option 65 4 It may be necessary to alter the position of the thumbscrew underneath the baseplate to attach the sprayer correctly. 15. Swing the stage into the interface using the stop and handle. 4.2.2 Operation For tuning purposes it may be useful to infuse a known sample in 95% water using a Harvard syringe pump. 1. Set the liquid flow to about 200 nl/min. 2. Switch on Gas at the MassLynx tune page. 3. Set the pressure of the gas on the regulator to approximately 0.5 bar (7 psi). 4. Ensure there are no leaks of gas at the sprayer, particularly where the PTFE tubing is connected to it. Note: By viewing under magnification, the spray emanating from the capillary may be examined and tuned by altering the nebulizing tip such that a fine spray is observed. Altering the gas slightly may also help in this tuning process. 5. Swing the stage back out of the source and place the cover over the sprayer ensuring that the tubing coming from the sprayer is threaded correctly through it. 6. Lock the cover in place with two screws. 7. Swing the stage back into the source and alter the translation stage (in / out direction) such that the capillary is approximately 5mm from the cone. 8. Select Operate and set Capillary to approximately 2.5kV. An ion beam should now be present. 9. Optimize the ion beam by altering the position of the spray using the controls of the translation stage. 10. The sprayer can now be connected to the HPLC system. The injection valve is plumbed as follows: • P from the pump. • C to the column (or to the union). • S is the sample port, attach a VISF sleeve here. • W is a waste port. Note: A short tail of fused silica, attached to the entrance port of the union, and the use of low pressure PTFE connectors will remove the need to move the stage. This will prevent 66 Nanoflow Electrospray 4 accidental alteration of the sprayer’s position when changing between tuning and HPLC operation. 4.3 Changing Options To change between the glass capillary and the nano-LC options: Rotate the stage outwards.: Remove the protective cover and release the captive screw located underneath the stage. Lift off the holder and replace it with the alternative holder, securing it with the captive screw. Replace the protective cover, ensuring that either the PTFE back pressure tubing (glass capillary option) or the fused silica transfer line is fed through the slot in the back of the protective cover along with the HV cabling. Attention: Failure to use the stop and handle to rotate the stage can result in permanent damage to the three-axis manipulator. 67 5 Chapter 5 APcI Atmospheric Pressure Chemical Ionization (APcI) is an easy to use LC-MS interface that produces singly-charged protonated or deprotonated molecules for a broad range of involatile analytes. Figure 5-1 Schematic Representation of APcI The ability to operate with 100% organic or 100% aqueous mobile phases at flow rates up to 2 ml/min makes APcI an ideal technique for standard analytical column (4.6 mm i.d.) normal phase and reverse phase LC-MS. The APcI interface consists of the standard Z-spray source fitted with a corona discharge pin and a heated nebuliser probe. Mobile phase from the LC column enters the probe where it is pneumatically converted into an aerosol and is rapidly heated and converted to a vapor / gas at the probe tip. Hot gas from the probe passes between the sample cone and the corona discharge pin, which is typically maintained at 2.5kV. Mobile phase molecules rapidly react with ions generated by the corona discharge to produce stable reagents ions. 68 APcI 5 Analyte molecules introduced into the mobile phase react with the reagent ions at atmospheric pressure and typically become protonated (in positive ion mode) or deprotonated (in the negative ion mode). The sample and reagent ions pass through the sample cone into the ion block prior to being extracted via the extraction cone into the RF lens. Changeover between electrospray and APcI operation is simply accomplished by changing the probe and installing the corona discharge pin within the source enclosure. For APcI operation, the desolvation gas is not heated in the desolvation nozzle. However, it is important that desolvation gas is used throughout. The background spectrum for 50:50 acetonitrile:water is dependent upon the settings of Cone and Extractor. The main reagent ions for typical sample cone and extraction cone voltages of 40V and 10V respectively are 42, 56, 83 and 101. The transmission of these ions will be dependent on the setting of RF Lens. A lower RF Lens voltage is required for optimum transmission at lower m. Acetonitrile adducting may be minimized by optimization of the probe position, as described in the chapter entitled Electrospray. 5.1 Preparation Ensure that the source is assembled as described in Maintenance and Fault Finding, and that the instrument is pumped down and prepared for APcI operation as described in Routine Procedures. APcI may be operated with or without the cleanable baffle fitted. Ensure that a supply of nitrogen has been connected to the gas inlet at the rear of the instrument and that the head pressure is between 6 and 7 bar (90-100 psi). 5.1.1 Checking the Probe 1. Ensure that the probe heater is off. 2. Unplug the probe from the instrument’s front panel and remove the probe from the source. 3. Connect the PTFE tube to the Nebuliser Gas outlet on the front panel. 4. Remove the probe tip assembly by carefully loosening the two grub screws. Obtaining an Ion Beam 69 5 5. Disconnect the heater from the probe body by pulling parallel to the axis of the probe. 6. Ensure that 0.5 to 1 mm of fused silica is protruding from the stainless steel nebuliser tube. 7. Connect the LC pump to the probe with a flow of 50:50 acetonitrile:water at 1 ml/min. 8. Check that the liquid jet flows freely from the end of the capillary and that the LC pump back pressure reads 250 to 400 psi. 9. Check that the nitrogen supply pressure is 6 to 7 bar (90 to 100 psi). 10. Select API Gas and turn on Nitrogen. 11. Check that the liquid jet converts to a fine uniform aerosol. 12. Switch off the liquid flow. 13. Deselect API Gas and turn off Nitrogen. 14. Reconnect the probe tip assembly. 15. Insert the APcI probe into the source and secure it by tightening the two thumb screws. 16. Connect the probe cable to Probes on the instrument’s front panel. 5.2 Obtaining an Ion Beam 1. Ensure that the corona discharge pin is fitted as described in Section 2.2.2 on page 26 and that the pin is connected using the APcI HV cable. 2. Ensure that the APcI probe is fitted as described above, that the desolvation gas tube is connected to the front panel, and that the cone gas and purge gas outlets are plugged. 3. If necessary, change the ionization mode using the Ion Mode command. 4. Set Source Block Temp to 150°C. 5. Set APcI Probe Temp to 20°C with no liquid flow and Nitrogen off. 6. Initially set Corona to 2.5kV and Cone to 30V. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C 70 APcI 5 When Source Block Temp reaches 150°C: 1. Select API Gas to switch on the nitrogen gas. 2. Using the valves on the front of the instrument, adjust Desolvation Gas to 150 litres/hour and set Nebuliser Gas to its maximum setting. 3. Set one of the peak display boxes to show masses down to at least 100 Da. 4. Select Operate. 5. Set APcI Probe Temp to 350°C. When APcI Probe Temp reaches 350°C: 1. Start the LC pump at a flow of 1 ml/min. 2. Optimize Corona so that the peaks reach maximum intensity. 3. Optimize the probe position for intensity and stability. The two screws can be adjusted singly or simultaneously to optimize the beam. Figure 5-2 Illustration of Probe Adjustment The position of the probe will affect sensitivity. However, if the sample is contained in a ‘biological matrix’ or is contained in an involatile solvent the probe should be moved away from the sample cone and towards the corona discharge pin Hints for Sample Analysis 71 5 . 5.3 Hints for Sample Analysis Tuning • Start by tuning on the solvent ions. • It is generally found that the most significant analyte tuning parameter to adjust following tuning on the solvent ions is Cone. • Fine tuning on the analyte of interest can be performed either by large loop injections (100µl) or by constant infusion in the mobile phase typically at analyte concentrations of a few ng/µl. • 10µl loop injections can be monitored using real time chromatogram updates. Mobile Phase • The choice of mobile phase is an important compound specific factor in APcI. For example, steroids prefer methanol:water mixtures as opposed to acetonitrile:water. • Analyte sensitivity is also dependent on mobile phase composition, which can be varied from 100% aqueous to 100% organic for any particular mixture. Probe Temperature This can be a critical factor for some analytes. Caution: It is normal for the source enclosure, the glass tube and parts of the probe adjustment flange to reach temperatures of up to 60°C during prolonged APcI operation. Care should be exercised when handling source components immediately after operation. Caution: Switch off the liquid flow and allow the probe to cool (<100°C) before removing it from the source. Attention: Failure to employ a desolvation gas flow during APcI operation may lead to heat damage to the source. 72 APcI 5 • Involatile samples (for example steroids) generally require high probe temperatures (>400°C). • Volatile samples (for example pesticides) can be analyzed with low probe temperatures (<400°C). • In some cases, too high a probe temperature can lead to thermal degradation of labile samples. Desolvation Gas Although a Desolvation Gas flow of approximately 150 litres/hour is typical for most samples, this flow rate should be tuned for maximum sensitivity while ensuring that the flow rate is not decreased below 100 litres/hour. 5.4 Removing the Probe Figure 5-3 APcI Probe showing twin Thumb Nuts used for Removal After a session of APcI operation: Turn off the LC flow. Set APcI Probe Temp to 20°C. Deselect Operate to put the instrument in standby mode. When the probe temperature falls below 100°C: Removing the Probe 73 5 Deselect API Gas and turn off Nitrogen. Undo the two thumb nuts and remove the probe from the source (Figure 5-3). If the instrument is not to be used for a long period of time the source temperature should be reduced to 60°C. Caution: Take care when removing the APcI probe. There is a risk of burns to the operator. Attention: Removal of the APcI probe when hot will shorten the life of the probe heater. 74 APcI Tuning 75 6 Chapter 6 Tuning Before sample data are acquired, the instrument should be tuned and, for highest mass accuracy, calibrated using a suitable reference compound (see Chapter 7). Consult the relevant sections of this manual for information concerning source tuning procedures in the chosen mode of operation. See: • Chapter 3, Electrospray • Chapter 4, Nanoflow Electrospray • Chapter 5, APcI For information on optimizing peak shape, intensity and resolution and adjusting the tuning parameters see the following sections: • Section 6.2.4, Source Tuning Page • Section 6.2.5, Quadrupole Tuning Page (Analyzer) • Section 6.2.6, Time Of Flight Page • Section 6.3, Obtaining an Ion Beam Note: Care should be taken to optimize the value of the collision energy. 6.1 Tuning The preceding sections have outlined the software controls and connections to establish the physical conditions required as a prerequisite to mass spectrometer operation. Within the source and analyzer enclosures, electric fields controlled via MassLynx are applied to the components to manage the ion beam generated, according to the sample to be analyzed, the ionization mode and the type of information required. The ion optical system elements are indicated in Figure 6-1 on page 76. Considering the variable nature of the beam with different samples, the instrument should be tuned for signal strength and calibrated for accurate m using suitable reference compounds, prior to the acquisition of sample data. 76 Tuning 6 Figure 6-1 The Ion Optical System of the Q-Tof micro Tuning parameters have been grouped in MassLynx into 3 pages as inSection 6.3 on page 89. Full details of source tuning procedures for electrospray, APcI and nanoflow electrospray are given in the relevant chapter of this manual. Tune Page 77 6 6.2 Tune Page Figure 6-2 The QTof micro Tune Page The Tune Page Consists of a peak display window and 3 pages of parameters viewable by selecting the relevant tab. These are: • The Source Page (see Section 6.2.4) • The Quadrupole Page (see Section 6.2.5) • The time of Flight Page (see Section 6.2.6) 6.2.1 Tune Page Basics To Display the Tune Page: Select MS Tune from the Masslynx Shortcut bar (Figure 6-2). 78 Tuning 6 Printing Tune Information To print a report, containing a copy of the tune peak information displayed on the screen along with a record of each parameter setting: Press , or select Print from the Tune Page File menu. This report is not configurable by the user. Experimental Record Tuning parameters are stored with every data file as part of the experimental record. The tuning parameters for a particular data file can be viewed or printed from the data browser, see the MassLynx User Guide, Selecting and Viewing Data, for more information. 6.2.2 Saving and Restoring Parameter Settings Whole sets of instrument tuning parameters can be saved to disk as a named file and then recalled at a future date. A tune parameter file contains the latest settings for the source controls for all supported ionization modes not just the ionization mode currently selected. Tune parameter files also contain settings for the analyzer, inlet set points and peak display. To save the current tune parameters with the existing file name: 1. Press , or choose Save from the tune page File menu. 2. Press Save. To save the current tune parameters with a new file name: 1. Select Save As from the tune page File menu. 2. Enter a new file name or select an existing file from the list displayed. 3. Press Save. If the selected file already exists on disk a warning is displayed. Press Yes to overwrite the existing information or No to enter a different file name. To restore a saved set of parameters: 1. Press , or choose Open from the tune page File menu. 2. Select the required tuning parameter file, either by typing its name or by selecting from the list displayed. 3. Press Open. Tune Page 79 6 6.2.3 Changing the Peak Display To change the display using the mouse: Figure 6-3 The Customize Display Menu Click in the peak display area with the right mouse button to display the pop up menu (Figure 6-3). The display area for each peak can be individually changed, e.g. the peak color for peak 1 can be red and for peak 2 green etc. Customize Plot Appearance To change the color of the background and traces and to change the number of traces displayed: Figure 6-4 The Customise Plot Appearance Dialog 80 Tuning 6 Select Customize, Plot Appearance. The Customize Plot Appearance dialog is displayed (Figure 6-4). To change the colours on the display: Press Newest Trace, Background or Trace Fill and select a new color from the dialog displayed. To change the number of traces: Use to change the number, or enter a new value in the Visible Traces box, within the range 2 to 20. If more than one trace is displayed then the older traces can be displayed in a different shade to the new ones: Drag the Color Interpolation slider toward the full position. The color of the old traces is shown in the Trace color sample (new->old) field. Trace From the pop-up menu do one of the following: • Select the Trace, Outline option to display the peak outline only. • Select the Trace, Fill option to fill the trace with the trace fill color. • Select the Trace, Min/Max option to show the minimum and maximum data points only. The option selected has a tick next to it. Intensity Select either Intensity, Relative Intensity or Intensity, Absolute Intensity as required. Select Intensity, Normalize Data to display normalized data. The options selected each have a tick next to them. Grid The options allow vertical and horizontal grid lines to be independently displayed or hidden. Selected Options have ticks next to them. Selecting and option a second time deselects the option. Tune Page 81 6 6.2.4 Source Tuning Page The main parameters that are changed during tuning can be found on this page. The two that have the most effect are the Capillary Voltage and Sample Cone Voltage. Figure 6-5 The Source Tuning Page The positive ion electrospray (ESP+) Source Tuning page is shown. Suggested tuning parameters are as follows: 82 Tuning 6 Capillary This sets the absolute voltage on the electrospray probe or APCI corona needle, and is typically adjusted to 3000V. The value shown in the display is for illustration only. Sample Cone This sets the voltage on the sampling cone relative to the extraction lens. It is dependent on compound and charge state. For multiply charged species this is set to 30 – 50eV, and higher for singly charged species. In general, higher cone voltages are needed for larger mass ions. Extraction Cone This sets the voltage on the extraction lens, and is normally set from 0 – 2V. Desolvation Temp This sets the temperature of the desolvation gas heater. It is usually set to 150ºC, and increased for higher solvent flow rates. Source Temp The source block temperature is usually set to 80ºC, but is increased for higher solvent flow rates. Gas Flows Gas Flow will normally be set at 20 l/h for cone and 380 – 400 l/h for Desolvation Syringe Pump Enter the desired flow rate for the Analyte. Lock Spray Choose from Reference or Analyte. Note: This box only appears if LockSpray is selected on the MassLynx Options dialog Tune Page 83 6 6.2.5 Quadrupole Tuning Page (Analyzer) Figure 6-6 The Quadrupole Tuning Page Note: The Parameters on this page do not routinely need changing. Ion Energy This sets the quadrupole offset DC with respect to the collision energy of the ions travelling between the quadrupoles. This should be set between 1 – 1.8V. 84 Tuning 6 Collision Energy This sets the collision energy of the ions when they reach the collision cell. The cell itself is grounded but the collision energy voltage is simultaneously applied to all the optical elements preceding it. i.e cone, extraction lens, source hexapole, differential pumping aperture, and quadrupole. In Q-Tof micro gas is always introduced into the cell, affording collisional cooling and consequently higher resolution. The collision energy is set to 10eV for MS mode to maximize ion transmission but produce little or no fragmentation. When in the MS/MS mode the collision energy is adjusted to give the best fragmentation pattern for the selected parent Low Mass Res and High Mass Res These set the resolving DC on the quadrupoles. The two sliders are set to give constant resolution across the mass range. When the quadrupoles have been set up, settings of 15 on both sliders should give unit resolution at 20% peak height. RF1 DC Offset Normal value is between 0 and 1V. The value shown in the display is for illustration only (item 3 in Figure 6-2). Pre/Post Filter Normal value is between 5 and 15V (items 4 and 5 in Figure 6-2). RF2 DC Offset Normal value is between 0 and 4V (item 7 in Figure 6-2). Pump Aperture Normal value is between 2 and 10V (item 6 in Figure 6-2). Plate 1 This is the voltage applied to the entrance plate of the gas cell. Normal value is 2V. The value shown in the display is for illustration only. Entrance This sets the voltage on the pusher entrance and exit, and defines the axial speed of the ions through the TOF. The theoretical value is 105 eV when the ion beam should be central to the detector. It should be optimized when looking at a TOF beam, not on the first detector. It should be possible to correctly tune the instrument using this value. The value shown in the display is for illustration only. Can This is the voltage applied to the hexapole gas cell surrounding shield. Normal value is 0. Plate 2 This is the voltage applied to the exit plate of the gas cell. Normal value is -3V. Auto MS Profiling If the box is checked then automatic MS/Hex profile will be used. If the box is not checked then Quad Mass and Gas Cell must be set manually. Tune Page 85 6 6.2.6 Time Of Flight Page Figure 6-7 The Time Of Flight Page Note: The Parameters on this page do not routinely need changing. Quad Mass This is the mass in Da at which the quad mass is set in RF only mode Gas Cell RF (V) This is the peak to peak amplitude of the applied RF voltage. 86 Tuning 6 Acceleration Lens Usually set to maximum voltage (200V) in all modes of operation.The factory setting should be noted, before attempting to improve resolution by changing this voltage. Focus This adds an equal voltage to both the top and bottom steering/focus lens halfplates. For maximum TOF resolution it is set to zero. Steering This adjusts the voltage difference between the top and bottom half plates of the steering/focus lens. It acts as a y-deflector, directing the beam into the pusher. A setting close to zero should produce an optimum beam. Better sensitivity can be achieved, however, with a voltage (positive or negative) close to zero, e.g. +1.0, -0.5 etc., and not more than ±2V. Tube Lens This is set to its optimum value in the factory and by the engineer at installation. It helps shape the ion beam on entry into the pusher and so has a large effect on resolution and peak shape. Grid 2 Offset This determines the voltage difference between the two plates of the first acceleration region of the Tof (Pusher and Grid3). It is used as a fine tuning control to optimize resolution. The optimum value for this element may change with pusher frequency. The pusher frequency is dependent on mass range when in automatic pusher mode and takes one of six discrete values. See pusher rates on Page 41. Flight Tube This sets the flight tube voltage. It is always set to 5630V. Adjusting this will change the peak position and resolution. Reflectron This is set expressed as a percentage of the flight tube voltage and its value is 1780V. Adjusting this will change the peak position and resolution. Pusher Offset This is the DC value applied to the puller plate to collimate the beam. Normal value is -1V. The value shown in the display is for illustration only. Pusher This sets the amplitude of the pusher pulse and is normally set to 830V. Puller This sets the amplitude of the puller pulse and is normally set to 645V. Tune Page 87 6 Manual Pusher Cycle Time may be set between 30 µsec and 255 µsec. Setting Cycle Time at less than 30 µsec defaults to 30 µsec. Entering 0 µsec switches the pusher off. Increasing the flight time reduces the duty cycle (sampling efficiency) of the TOF analyzer resulting in decreased sensitivity. For the best mass accuracy the instrument should be re-calibrated if the flight time is changed. If Manual Pusher is not selected then the repetition frequency of the pusher pulse is determined automatically according to the highest m requested in the acquisition range, as shown in the table below. MCP This sets the voltage on the TOF detector. MCP must be conditioned before applying high voltage (see Section 2.1.3 on page 23). The TOF analyzer is usually operated with this detector set at 2800V. The value shown in the display is for illustration only. It is recommended that a record of these values is kept for future reference. Manual Pusher If the Manual Pusher box is selected from the Other sub-menu then the repetition frequency of the pusher pulse is determined by the Cycle Time entered. See below. Width This is the width of the pusher pulse in µs, the default value is 9 µs but for low mass (< 80Da) acquisitions a lower value may be needed. Maximum Flight Time Highest 33 µsec 1000 47 µsec 1001 – 2000 66 µsec 2001 – 4000 94 µsec 4001 – 8000 132 µsec 8001 – 16000 188 µsec 16001 – 32000 88 Tuning 6 6.2.7 Other Tune Page Settings TDC Settings Figure 6-8 The TDC Settings Dialog To access the TDC (time to digital converter) settings select Options >TDC settings. Start This is the size of the trigger signal that is necessary to trigger the TDC (start the clock). The start signal is derived from the pusher voltage itself, and a typical value is 500mV. This voltage may be different in negative ion mode. Stop This is the size of pulse needed to register as being an ion, so stopping the clock. It is usually set at 150mV, a value high enough to prevent electronic noise being detected as ions. Threshold This parameter should normally be set to zero. Setting to 1 will cause all peaks in the spectrum with one count to be thresholded out. Centroid Threshold Any peak above this value in height (counts) will be classed as ions and a centroid will be produced Min Points Any peak above this value in width (bins) will be classed as ions and a centroid will be produced. NP Multiplier Used in deadtime correction calculations. A normal value is 0.7. Obtaining an Ion Beam 89 6 6.3 Obtaining an Ion Beam This section refers exclusively to the positive ion mode of operation using the ESI source. This is often the simplest mode of operation for getting and checking the ion beam. Note: This method should also be followed through when it is suspected there may be a problem with the instrument. It is likely that, should the user ever need to contact Micromass’ Technical Support specialists, they will ask that these steps have been performed. It is standard practice to use a sample with which the user is familiar. This sample should be of reasonable concentration and have at least one readily recognized component or pattern of masses. Commonly used compounds are listed below: A normal concentration is 2ng/µl. The general method outlined here can be used in either mode – positive or negative. Resolution Used in deadtime correction calculations. A normal value is 6000, but will vary according to instrument resolution. Lock Mass The mass to be entered in accurate /exact mass corrections to ensure data drift is minimized. Mass Window The window searched around the set lock mass in order to establish a suitable peak to be the lock mass Veff Effective flight tube voltage, used for setting up the non-calibrated mass scale. A normal value is 5630. Temp Correction Enables the DXC corrections to be applied, if installed. Lteff This is used to make the TOF mass measurement nominally correct without a calibration. The value is usually around 1080. See Chapter 7 for further details. Compound Mwt Leucine Enkephalin 556Da PEG 200/400/600 (mix) 100-1000Da Sodium Iodide 100-2500Da 90 Tuning 6 The sample should be infused at a rate of 5 µl/min via a syringe pump (on the instrument or otherwise) or using a dedicated LC system. This ensures a uniform, continuous spray that will last for a relatively long period. 6.3.1 Standard Tune Parameters 1. Enter the Standard Tuning Parameters (or load from a file) as described in Section 6.2 and Section 6.3. Ensure that the Peak Display window is open. 2. Switch the instrument into OPERATE. Press the button on the tune page marked ‘Press For Operate’ to get the following (the indicator goes to green and the button changes to ‘Press For Standby’) 3. Ensure that the API Gas , Col Gas , and Syringe , buttons are selected and operating. Note: It may take a while for the sample to appear in the peak display window as any dead volume will need to be cleared first. 4. Assuming that the probe is spraying the Peak Display window should be showing some response. Note: Adjustment of the Capillary and Sample Cone Voltage will vary the peak height and shape 6.3.2 Checking the Resolution While there may be a beam showing in the peak display, a single peak needs to be “Tuned” to give a resolution of at least 5000 (FWHM), for the QTof micro to perform to its specification. The resolution is calculated by the following equation: In the following example Leucine Enkephalin (2ng/ml) has been enthused at 5 µl/min. 1. Press the Tune Page Acquire button. This invokes the Tune page Acquisition dialog (Figure 6-9) Enter a Data File Name together with any necessary comments. Ensure TOF MS is selected for the Function and that the Data Format is set to Continuum. Resolution Mass = ( ) ÷ ( ) PeakWidthHalfHeight Obtaining an Ion Beam 91 6 Set the mass range from 100 Da to 1000 Da and a Duration of 1 minutes. The scan time can be any reasonable value, but a setting of 1s with an inter scan time of 0.1 s gives one second scans for each individual spectrum saved to disk. 2. Click Start. Figure 6-9 The Tune Page Acquisition Dialog 3. Open Chromatogram from the MassLynx Sample List menu and click on Real Time Update. 4. Combine data from at least 30 scans. On completion the Spectrum window will open Note: See the MassLynx User’s Guide for details on how to use Chromatogram, Spectrum and Combine. 5. In the Spectrum window Zoom in on the main peak at 556 Da. Note: Ensure that a Grid is shown on the Spectrum. Select Display > View to display the Spectrum Display dialog 92 Tuning 6 6. With the aid of the grid right click and drag the mouse across the width of the peak at half height. The width is show in the bottom left corner of the Spectrum window (Figure 6-10) Figure 6-10 Combined Spectrum of Leucine Enkephalin Showing Peak Width at Half Height 7. The resolution can now be calculated. In this case it is quite clearly adequate and above 5000. If the resolution is not above 5000 the process will have to be repeated with different tuning parameters. With experience it will possible estimate the resolution from the Peak Display on the Tune Page. Note: If a resolution of 5000 can not be achieved it is likely that there is a problem with the instrument and Micromass Technical Support should be contacted. Resolution = = 556.2214 0.0899 ÷ 6187 Introduction 93 7 Chapter 7 Calibration There are several steps to carrying out a Calibration for Accurate Mass on the Micromass Q-Tof Micro MS: 1. Calculation of Nominal Mass Accuracy (Section 7.2.1) 2. Acquire data for Calibration. (Section 7.2.20) 3. Check for Deadtime distortion (Section 7.2.3) 4. Calibration (Section 7.2.4) 5. Deadtime Correction (Section 7.2.6) You will need to refer to the following chapters of the MassLynx User’s Guide. • Chapter 6 – Chromatogram • Chapter 7 – Spectrum • Chapter 8 – Strip and Combine Note: To use the Calibration file for Accurate Mass refer to Chapter 15 “Accurate Mass Measure” of the MassLynx User’s Guide. 7.1 Introduction Extremely accurate mass measurements can be performed with the Q-Tof micro, due to the elevated resolution and inherent stability of the calibration law of orthogonal TOF instruments. The basic time of flight calibration from mass (m) to time (t) is of the form: where: The term P represents the resultant gain from the instrument geometry (pathlengths and voltages). = Q Pt + 94 Calibration 7 Q is an offset, arising from propagation delays through the electronics (detector rise time and delays of trigger signals through cables). If a data file is acquired from the instrument with no calibration applied, then it is assumed that the offset is zero and the gain P is calculated from the instrument geometry. 7.1.1 Nominal Mass Accuracy – Lteff Lteff is the effective length of the flight tube, it is important that this should be set up to give at least nominal mass accuracy. Nominal mass measurement is achieved on the Q-Tof micro by adjustment of the Lteff factor, a term which quantifies the difference between the indicated and actual mass. A TOF spectrum of a standard compound is acquired with Lteff set to its default value of 1078. A new value of Lteff can be calculated from the following relation: where: mind = indicated m/z mact = actual m/z The new value is entered on the Tune Page under Options > TDC Parameters (Figure 7-1). Lteff 1078 mind mact = ÷ Introduction 95 7 Figure 7-1 TDC Settings Dialog All Subsequent mass measurements will be nominally correct. This value should only ever need to be set once. 7.1.2 Calibration With no calibration applied, the spectral data in MassLynx is merely a set of mass intensity pairs {Mn, In} based upon instrument geometry. The inherent relationship between mass and time shown above makes it prudent to generate higher order calibration coefficients that are applied to the square root of the nominal masses {Mn}: where: The terms A, B, C, D…. are calculated by fitting a polynomial to the acquired mass spectral data. Mc is the calibrated displayed mass. • If a polynomial of order 1 is requested, the values for A & B are calculated, and the higher terms are set to zero. Mc A BMn CMn DM3 2⁄ = + + + n 96 Calibration 7 • For a polynomial of order 5 (the highest supported in MassLynx) there will be six terms generated. • When calibrating over a large mass range (>500 Da) it is advisable to use a higher order polynomial, as the deviations from the straight line fit become more appreciable. • Once a calibration has been generated from a reference compound such as PEG it should be used as an ‘instrument calibration’ to be applied to all subsequently acquired data. The procedure for this is described below. 7.1.3 Lock Mass Temperature variations in the environment and in the instrument power supplies can cause drifts in measurements of a few hundred parts per million (ppm) over the course of a day. For accurate mass work, the instrument should be kept in OPERATE at all times to enable stabilization of the power supplies. Users can compensate for instrument drift by applying a single point lock mass correction that recalculates the term B in the above equation. This can be done in two ways: 1. Using a Micromass LockSpray / NanoLockSpray Interface 2. Teeing in, post column, a Lock Mass reference compound. Note: There are inherent problems with the second approach which can lead to poor exact mass capability. Consequently we recommend that the first option is used when ever possible. 7.1.4 Deadtime Correction The data acquisition system for the instrument is a time to digital converter (TDC). This is an ion counting system which generates a mass spectrum by storing the arrival times of ions in a histogram memory. After the arrival and registration of an ion by the TDC there is a minimum time interval before a subsequent ion arrival can be registered. This is called the ‘dead time’ of the TDC and is of the order of 5 nanoseconds. At high ion currents some of the ions generated are not registered, leading to a shift to lower mass centroids, with consequently lower measured areas on reported peaks. Generation of an Instrument Calibration 97 7 However, the MassLynx software incorporates a correction facility which allows for accurate mass measurements to be achieved over a large range of ion currents, and the use of dead time correction is described below. 7.2 Generation of an Instrument Calibration Make up an analyte solution consisting of: PEG 300 (10 nanolitres/millilitre), PEG 600 (10 nanolitres/millilitre), in a stock solution of 2mM ammonium acetate in 50/50 acetonitrile/water. Dilute this by a factor of ten (with the stock solution) and introduce this to the instrument using a syringe pump operating at 5 microlitres per minute. Note: The Quad ramp is predetermined for every mass range and can not be set by the user. 7.2.1 Calculation of Lteff Figure 7-2 The Tune Page Acquisition Dialog 98 Calibration 7 To calculate Lteff it is recommended that a solution such as Leucine Enkephalin is used that will produce a single peak. 1. Make up a solution of Leucine Enkephalin at 2 ng/ml in 50:50 methanol:water. 2. Introduce this into the instrument with the syringe pump at 5 µl/min. 3. Click Aquire, this will invoke the Tune Page Acquisition dialog (Figure 7-2). 4. Acquire for about 2 minutes. 5. Combine the data and then Center the Spectrum. Note: For further information on Combining data see Chapter 8 of the MassLynx User’s Guide and for Centering Spectral data, Chapter 6. 6. Note the indicated mass. In this case 561.2170. Figure 7-3 Indicated Mass of Leucine Enkephalin prior to Lteff Correction Generation of an Instrument Calibration 99 7 7. Use this value and the actual mass of Leucine Enkephalin (556.2771) to calculate Lteff. In this case: Lteff = 1082.78. 8. Enter the new Lteff value on the TDC Settings dialog. 9. Repeat steps 3 – 5. The new Lteff setting will give a nominal mass accuracy for Leucine Enkephalin. Figure 7-4 Indicated Mass of Leucine Enkephalin after Lteff Correction. 7.2.2 Acquire Data for Calibration 1. Set the Cone Voltage (30 – 40 volts)so as to give a good distribution of PEG peaks. 2. Check the resolution as detailed in the previous chapter. 3. Acquire data for one minute over the range 100 – 1000 Da, with scan time of 1second (for details on Acquiring Data see Section 7.2.1 on page 97). 4. Combine at least 30 scans of data. 100 Calibration 7 Check that the signal is not too intense and that the data acquired does not have an ion count above 200 counts/sec. 7.2.3 Check for Deadtime Distortion With the data acquired in the previous section: 1. Select Process > Center from Spectrum, this invokes the TOF Spectrum Center dialog (Figure 7-6). Select the TOF button from this dialog to invoke the QTOF Accurate Mass dialog. Check that both the resolution and Np multiplier are set to 0 (Figure 7-5). Figure 7-5 The TOF Accurate Mass dialog 2. Center the Spectrum with the values shown in (Figure 7-6). For details on how to center spectra see the MassLynx User’s Guide. Generation of an Instrument Calibration 101 7 Figure 7-6 The TOF Spectrum Center Dialog 3. Re-center the data using a Resolution of 5000 and Np Multiplier of 0.7. Check that any differences in the centroided masses of the two centered spectra are less than 1 mDa Figure 7-7 Comparison of Centered Spectra With (top) and Without (bottom) Deadtime Correction If the difference between the two peaks is more than 1 mDa then repeat the acquisition with less intense peaks, either by dilution or by reducing the capillary voltage. Once a satisfactory centered spectrum has been acquired, save it in the spectrum history. 102 Calibration 7 7.2.4 Calibration 1. Select Calibration > Calibrate Instrument from the Tune Page. This invokes the Calibration Window (Figure 7-8). 2. Select the Reference file to use from the drop down list of the Calibration Window. (pehnh4, ref will give the correct masses with the sample used here). 3. Select Calibrate > From File. This will invoke he Display Calibration Graphs dialog (Figure 7-9). 4. Use the Browse option to select the centered spectrum which has been previously saved. In this example it is from the data file CJ0710_02. 5. Once the spectrum has been selected Click OK. Figure 7-8 The Calibration Window. Generation of an Instrument Calibration 103 7 Figure 7-9 The Display Calibration Graphs Dialog 6. The Centered Spectrum will now be processed and compared against the Calibration File. When the processing is complete the results are displayed in a new calibration window. 104 Calibration 7 Figure 7-10 Calibration Window Showing Residual Errors Note: The residual errors should all be less than 3 mDa. 7. Outliers can be removed from the calibration curve by right clicking the outlying peak in the reference file spectrum and clicking the associated peak on the data file spectrum. 8. The calibration parameters can be altered by selecting Edit to invoke the Calibration Parameters dialog (Figure 7-11). Set the Intensity Threshold to 5%. This will mean that lower intensity peaks will not be included in the calibration and will generally give a better fit. Generation of an Instrument Calibration 105 7 Figure 7-11 The Calibration Parameters Dialog A firth order polynomial has been chosen here, as a large mass range is being covered by the calibration. It can be useful to do a first order calibration initially so that outliers are spotted more easily. When these have been removed reset the curve to a fifth order. 9. When the parameters have been set Exit the window and Accept the Calibration (below). Figure 7-12 The Accept Calibration Dialog 10. The calibration will be updated with the time of the update displayed in the Calibration Window (Figure 7-8). Note: Always Select File > Save As before exiting the calibration window and save the calibration with a unique filename. Exiting directly may result in the Uncal default file being overwritten. 106 Calibration 7 7.2.5 LockMass Correction The application of a single point lock mass correction will now correct for subsequent instrument drift and bring masses back to within 5 ppm RMS, on the condition that there is no isobaric chemical interference with either lock mass or analyte peaks. The lock mass is found under the TOF Spectrum Center menu when QTOF is clicked: Centering the spectrum with these parameters will force the peak at 520 to be 520.333 exactly and recalibrate the entire mass spectrum. 7.2.6 Deadtime Correction If you wish to Acquire Accurate Mass data at above 200 counts/sec then a deadtime correction needs to be applied to the calibration. 1. Acquire a spectrum of PEG at the higher concentration of 10 nl/ml and create a centered spectrum with no lock mass and no correction. (All parameters set to zero.)(Figure 7-5) . Figure 7-13 Calibration Window Deadtime Distortion Generation of an Instrument Calibration 107 7 2. Follow steps for calibration in Section 7.2.4 on page 102, to when the Calibration results window is open and the residual errors are revealed. There should now be a reduction in the mass deviation observed between adjacent peaks of high and low intensity. 3. Repeat this process at subsequently lower values of Np until the deviation is minimized. Figure 7-14 Same data as Figure 7-13 but with Np multiplier of 0.7 At this point the peaks should lie close to the axis – the line of best fit: 4. Typical values for Np Multiplier will be about 0.7, and the Resolution used should be as measured on the instrument at mass 500. 5. Now that the deadtime correction has been set up, the difference in reported areas and masses between corrected and uncorrected centered data can be seen. In the example below, the 371 peak has been shifted by 8.7 mDa. 108 Calibration 7 Figure 7-15 Two Spectra One (bottom) with no Deadtime Correction and the Other (top) with. Further Notes The model successfully corrects for deviations of up to about 15 mDa at mass 500, at which point the limits of the model are reached, with no correction applied at higher ion current. Users should familiarize themselves with the ion current range over which successful mass measurements can be made. Once the Resolution and Np Multiplier figures have been evaluated they can be left active in the menu without affecting centered data in any adverse way. The procedure involved using the Spectrum, Make Calibration commands is a post-processing calibration, producing a data file of a particular format and with the extension .scl. The file resulting from the commands Instrument Calibrate, Save Calibration has the same file extension .cal, but it should be noted that because it is an instrument calibration file, it is of an incompatible format to that described above. Folders and naming conventions should be appropriately assigned. Exact Mass Measurement: Additional Hints 109 7 7.3 Exact Mass Measurement: Additional Hints • Best results are obtained if the lock mass gives an intensity of approximately 100 to 200 counts per second as shown on the real time tune display. • The lock mass should be chosen to be at the upper end of the mass range used. • Do not change transfer lens voltages without re-calibrating the instrument. • Changing Cone will not change the calibration. • Always be aware of possible chemical interference problems, either on the sample or the lock mass peak. • When performing a base calibration (using PEG, for example) better results may be obtained by using a stronger solution and moving the probe off axis to limit the ion current, rather than using a lower concentration. • This has the effect of minimizing any possible chemical interference from background ions. • Always check the stability of the spray (see the instructions for the setting of the probe tip in Maintenance and Fault Finding). • Short term variations in the spray produce fluctuations in the number of ions per peak per pusher pulse, giving rise to errors in the deadtime correction calculations. The number of ions per peak per pusher pulse is calculated from the ion current integrated over a period of time thus only giving an average value. • To obtain the best deadtime correction, only combine scans of a similar intensity, either at the top of a chromatographic peak or in the tail of a chromatographic peak. • This ensures the number of ions per peak per push is calculated correctly. • The deadtime correction algorithm can only correct for ion intensities and m shifts up to a limit. If the ion current approaches approximately 10,000 counts per peak (without correction) in one second then the limits of the model are being reached. • If the limits of the model are exceeded no correction is applied – the same result will be obtained by centring the data with Resolution and Np Multiplier set to zero. • If the limits of the deadtime correction algorithm are exceeded it may be possible to use the C13 isotope instead. • For the best mass accuracy when mass measuring doubly charged ions, it is advisable to use a doubly charged lock mass peak. • To obtain the true number of ions per peak, areas must be selected on the peak centre menu. 110 Calibration 7 • The standard deviation in the determination of the mass (strictly ) centroid of a triangular-shaped peak (σppm) due to ion statistics alone is given by the equation below. A triangle is assumed to be a close enough approximation to the shape of the mass spectrometer peak for the equation to be valid. σppm = 106 ∆M / M(24Np)0.5 ppm where: ∆M is the width (m) of a triangular peak across the base. M is the m value of the peak. Np is the number of ions per peak. Using the above equation we can calculate the number of ions per peak required to give a standard deviation of 5 ppm when measuring a peak at 500 m. Assuming 5000 (FWHM) resolution, so ∆M = 0.2 (width at base = twice width at half height), then: Thus standard deviations of less than 5 ppm cannot be expected unless the number of ions per peak is greater than 267. Np 0.22 1012 ( ) × 24 500 × 2 5 2 = ( ) ⁄ ( ) × = 267 Starting an Acquisition 111 8 Chapter 8 Data Acquisition The following sections of this chapter will guide you through the basic acquisition methods used in MassLynx. • Section 8.1, Starting an Acquisition • Section 8.2, Monitoring an Acquisition • Section 8.3, The Experiment Setup Editor • Section 8.4, Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) Before starting an acquisition the instrument will need to be tuned and calibrated (refer to Chapter 6, Tuning and Chapter 7, Calibration). You will also need to refer to the following chapters of the MassLynx User’s Guide. • Chapter 4 – Sample Lists • Chapter 6 – Chromatogram • Chapter 7 – Spectrum 8.1 Starting an Acquisition There are two ways of starting an acquisition: • single sample acquisition from the tune page. • multiple sample acquisition from the MassLynx sample list. 8.1.1 Starting an Acquisition from the Tune Page The easiest way to acquire data is directly from the tune page. 112 Data Acquisition 8 • Acquisitions can be started and stopped. • Inlet programs cannot be used. • Analog data cannot be acquired. • Multiple sample sequences cannot be acquired. To start a single sample acquisition: 1. Press Acquire on the tune page, or choose Acquire. This will invoke the Tune Page Acquisition Dialog. 2. Make any required changes to the settings. 3. Press Start Figure 8-1 Tune Page Acquisition Dialog Parameters Data File Name The can be up to 128 characters. If the file already exists on disk, a prompt is given to rename the file or to overwrite the existing one. The file is written to the data directory of the current project. Set Mass Specifies the precursor mass that is used for the TOF MSMS acquisition This control is disabled if the function selected is TOF MS. Start Mass and End Mass These specify the masses at which the scan starts and stops. Start Mass must be lower than End Mass. Starting an Acquisition 113 8 Pressing Origin allows additional information about the sample to be analyzed to be entered into the following fields: • Submitter • Job • Task • Conditions To change the directory into which data are acquired: 1. Cancel the acquisition. 2. Create a new project by choosing MassLynx top level file menu, Project Wizard or open an existing one by choosing Open Project, from the MassLynx top level file menu. 3. The Text area is used to enter the sample description. The description can be displayed on any output of the acquired data and has a maximum length of 74 characters. To display text on more than one line press CTRL+Return at the end of a line. 4. The type of acquisition Function used to collect the data can be either of the following: • Tof MS • Tof MS/MS More information is given in Function List Editor later in this chapter. The Data Format that are collected and stored on disk can be any of the following: • Centroid • Continuum • MCA Run Duration The length of the acquisition, measured in minutes. Scan Time Specifies the duration of each scan in seconds. Inter Scan Time Specifies the time in seconds between a scan finishing and the next one starting. During this period no data are stored. Calibration Allows an appropriate, previously generated calibration file for either positive or negative ion to be selected – see chapter entitled Calibration and Exact Mass. 114 Data Acquisition 8 More information is given on data formats later on in this chapter. 8.1.2 Multiple Samples The MassLynx top level screen contains a sample list editor for defining multiple experiments. The list of samples is set up using a spreadsheet style editor, which can be tailored to suit different requirements. For more information see the MassLynx User’s Guide, Chapter 4. 8.2 Monitoring an Acquisition Acquisition status is shown on the MassLynx screen. The run time is shown on the MS panel and the scan status, sample number and scan number are shown on the Status bar at the bottom of the page. 8.2.1 The Acquisition Status Window Figure 8-2 The Scan Report Dialog The acquisition status window, or scan report (Figure 8-2), provides a scan by scan statistical report of the progress of an acquisition. To display the scan report dialog, from the tune page: The Experiment Setup Editor 115 8 Select Options > Scan Status. This shows details of the scan currently being acquired. 8.2.2 Chromatogram Real-Time Update To view in real time the chromatogram that is currently being acquired: 1. Open the data file using the MassLynx data browser. 2. Press , or select Real-Time Update from the Display menu. The chromatogram display is updated as the acquisition proceeds. For Further Details see the MassLynx User’s Guide 8.2.3 Spectrum Real-Time Update To view in real time the spectrum that is currently being acquired: 1. Open the data file using the MassLynx data browser. 2. Press , or select Real-Time Update from the Display menu. 3. Select Enable Real-Time update. For Further Details see the MassLynx User’s Guide 8.2.4 System Manager To check the communications between the MassLynx software and the embedded PC: Select Options > Communications Status from the Tune page menu bar. 8.2.5 Stopping an Acquisition To halt the acquisition: 1. From the Tune page, press . 2. From the MassLynx screen choose Stop from the Run menu, or press . Data acquired up to this point is saved. 8.3 The Experiment Setup Editor The experiment setup editor is used to set up the function(s) that the mass spectrometer uses during an acquisition. A function list can be a mixture of MS or MSMS experiments 116 Data Acquisition 8 that can be arranged to run either sequentially or concurrently during an acquisition. Survey or parent functions must be run in isolation. Typical uses for mixed function acquisitions are the acquisition of several MSMS product ion spectra over different retention windows. A function list is produced, saved on disk and then referenced by name when an acquisition is started. A simple function list is shown above, containing only one function: a centroided mode TOF MS scan, between 100 and 1500 amu using ES+ ionization. Immediately above the function bar display is a time scale that shows from when the function is active, and for how long it runs. In this case the acquisition runs from 0 to 60 minutes. To access this dialog: Select MS Method from the MassLynx Instrument Shortcut bar. Figure 8-3 The Experiment Setup Editor One example of a function list shown in Figure 8-3 shows 3 different MSMS functions in sequential time windows is shown above. The currently selected function is highlighted and enclosed in a rectangular frame. If the display shows more than one function a new function can be selected either by clicking with the mouse, or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. 8.3.1 The Experiment Setup Editor Toolbar The toolbar is displayed at the top of the tune window and allows some common operations to be performed with a single click. The Experiment Setup Editor 117 8 Create a new function of the Indicated type. 8.3.2 Adding a New Function To add a new function to the list: 1. Click one of the toolbar buttons, or select the required function from the Functions menu. The editor for the function type selected is displayed showing default values. 2. Make any changes required to the parameters and press OK to add the new function. The function editors for each scan type is discussed in detail later on in this chapter. 8.3.3 Modifying an Existing Function To modify an existing function: 1. Select the function in the function list. 2. Press , or double click on the function. This displays the appropriate editor for the function type and allows changes to be made. The function list display is updated to show any changes. Entering a new value in Total Run Time and pressing sets the maximum retention time for the experiment. The ratio of the functions defined is maintained. For example, if two functions are defined one from 0 to 5 minutes and the other 5 to 10 minutes then a Total Run Time of 10 minutes is displayed. If this value is changed to 20 then the first function now runs from 0 to 10 minutes and the second from 10 to 20 minutes. Create a new function list. Edit the selected function. Open an existing function list. Delete the selected function. Save the current function list to disk. Move the selected function up the list of functions. Print the current window in portrait format. Move the selected function down the list of functions. 118 Data Acquisition 8 8.3.4 Copying an Existing Function To copy an existing function: 1. Select the function in the function list. 2. Select Copy and then Paste from the Edit menu. 3. Modify the parameters as described above. 8.3.5 Removing a Function To remove a function: 1. Select the function in the function list. 2. Press , choose Delete from the Edit menu, or press Del on the keyboard. 3. When asked to confirm the deletion, select Yes. 8.3.6 Changing the Order of Functions Functions are displayed in ascending Start Time and End Time order and this order cannot be changed. For functions that have the same start and end time the order in which they are performed can be changed as follows: Highlight the required function. Press or repeatedly until the function is in the required position. The Experiment Setup Editor 119 8 8.3.7 Setting a Solvent Delay Figure 8-4 The Solvent Delay Dialog No data is stored during the solvent delay period, which means that solvent peaks that would normally be seen eluting on the TIC chromatogram are no longer seen. For APcI functions the APcI probe temperature is set to the value specified in the APcI Probe Temp control for the period of the solvent delay. To set a solvent delay for a function list: Select Options > Solvent Delay from the menu bar. 120 Data Acquisition 8 8.3.8 Analog Channels Figure 8-5 The Analog Data Dialog If an analog channel’s hardware option is fitted, up to 4 channels of analog data can be acquired, which are stored with the data acquired from the mass spectrometer. Analog channels are typically used to collect data from external units such as UV detectors or FID detectors. A reading is made from the external channel at the end of each scan and stored with the data for that scan. The resolution of the chromatography for an analog channel is therefore dependent on the scan speed used to acquire the mass spectrometry data. To access this dialog: Select Options > Analog Data from the Method Editor dialog. To store data for an analog channel: 1. Check the box(es) for the channel required. 2. Enter a textual description for each of the selected analog channels. This description is used on the analog chromatogram dialog as the channel description. See “Chromatogram” in the MassLynx User’s Guide. 3. Enter an Offset to align the external unit with the mass spectrometer. 4. Press OK. 8.3.9 Saving and Restoring a Function List To save a function list: 1. Choose Save As from the function list File menu. 2. Enter a new file name, or select an existing file from the list displayed. The Experiment Setup Editor 121 8 3. Press Save. If the file already exists on disk, confirmation is requested to overwrite the existing information. Press Yes to overwrite the file, or No to select a different name. When the editor is closed a prompt is issued to save any changed function lists. To restore a saved function list: 1. Choose Open from the function list File menu. 2. Select the name of the function list to open, either by typing its name or by selecting it from the displayed list. 3. Press Open. 8.3.10 Setting up an MS Scan Function The full scan function editor, activated by pressing or by selecting TOFMS Scan from the Functions menu, is used to set up centroid, continuum and MCA functions. The full scan function editor, activated by pressing or by selecting TOFMS Scan from the Functions menu, is used to set up centroid, continuum and MCA functions. 122 Data Acquisition 8 Figure 8-6 The TOFMS Scan Dialog Mass (m/z) Low Mass and High Mass specify the masses at which the scan starts and stops. Time (mins) Start Time and End Time specify the retention time in minutes during which this function becomes active, and data are acquired. Cone Voltage When Use Tune Page is checked, the cone voltage set on the tune page at the start of the acquisition is used. The cone voltage value cannot be altered during acquisition by typing new values into the tune page, since the new values are not downloaded during acquisition. This can only be done by acquiring from the tune page. The Experiment Setup Editor 123 8 Method Ionization Mode, specifies the ionization mode and polarity to be used during acquisition. Data, specifies the type of data to be collected and stored on disk. There are three options: • Centroid stores data as centroided, intensity and mass assigned peaks. Data are stored for every scan. • Continuum. The signal received by the interface electronics is stored regularly to give an analog intensity picture of the data being acquired. Data are not centroided into peaks, but are stored for every scan. Due to the fact that data are acquired to disk at all times, even when no peaks are being acquired, continuum data acquisition places some extra burden on the acquisition system as compared to centroided acquisition. Data files tend to be significantly larger than centroided ones and the absolute scanning speed (amu/sec) is slower. It is possible, however, to set a threshold below which the data are not stored. Depending on the nature of the data acquired, this can greatly reduce these effects. The threshold can be set so that data considered to be ‘noise’ can be discarded, thus improving data acquisition speed and reducing data file sizes. • Multi Channel Analysis (MCA). MCA data can be thought of as ‘summed continuum’, with only one intensity accumulated scan being stored for a given experiment. As each scan is acquired, its intensity data is added to the accumulated summed data of previous scans. An advantage of MCA is that random noise does not accumulate as rapidly as real data and therefore effectively averages out over a number of scans. This emphasizes the real data and improves the signal to noise ratio. The disadvantage of MCA is that, as there is only one scan, it cannot be used for time resolved data. For MCA, Scans to Sum defines the number of scans to sum to create a spectrum. Scan Duration (secs) Scan Time specifies the duration of each scan in seconds while Inter-Scan Delay specifies the time in seconds between a scan finishing and the next one starting. During this period no data are stored. 124 Data Acquisition 8 APcI Probe Probe Temp, in degrees centigrade, is enabled when Ionization Mode is set to APcI. When Use Tune Page Settings is selected the APcI probe temperature set on the tune page at the start of the acquisition is used. This control is enabled when the ionization mode is set to APcI. The APcI probe temperature value cannot be altered by typing new values into tune page during the acquisition since the new values are not downloaded during the acquisition. This can be done by acquiring from the tune page. Setting up MS-MS Scanning Functions Figure 8-7 The MSMS Scan Dialog Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 125 8 The MSMS scan function editor is activated by pressing the MSMS button or by selecting TOF MSMS from the Functions menu. Many of the fields in the MSMS scan editor are similar to those described in Section 8.3.10 on page 121. Only fields that differ significantly are described below. Masses Set Mass specifies the precursor mass to be selected by the quadrupole for fragmentation in the gas cell. When multiply charged species are being analyzed care should be taken when selecting the High Mass to ensure that the mass range is sufficient to include product ions with a lower charge but a higher value than the precursor. Time The product ion spectra are acquired in the time window defined by the Start Time and End Time. Several MSMS scanning functions can be set up to either run sequentially or concurrently in overlapping time windows. Collision Energy When Use Tune Page Settings is checked, the collision energy set on the tune page at the start of the acquisition is used. 8.4 Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) For the automated MS/MS analysis of unknown compounds, the Micromass Q-Tof micro has a powerful software control system to enable the instrument to perform data dependent acquisition (DDA), switching from the MS to MS/MS mode and then returning to the MS mode using data dependent criteria. The advantage of this method is that it removes the requirement to analyze the sample in MS mode to identify the target precursor ions and then re-run the sample in MS/MS mode to acquire the MS/MS data from each of these precursors. This is particularly valuable in the analysis of unknown samples using on-line chromatography where the target precursor ions and their retention times may well be quite different for each sample. During acquisition the instrument is controlled by the MS FILE in the MassLynx Sample List. DDA can only be acquired using the Sample List and may not be started by acquiring from the Tune Page. 126 Data Acquisition 8 The MS FILE file is created using the method editor and then selected in the sample list in the usual way. 8.4.1 Creating a Data Dependent MS to MS/MS Switching Experiment Accessing the Method Editor In the MassLynx sample list, using the cursor to select the MS file, perform a right mouse button click and in the drop down menu select the Open command to access the Method editor for that MS file. Creating a New Experiment In the top banner of the Method editor window select File and in the drop down menu select New to create a new template with no predefined functions. Select the Survey button to create a data dependant acquisition. Clicking the Survey button will launch Survey Scan Dialog (Figure 8-8). There are 8 tabbed pages available. These are used to access all the relevant parameters for the data dependent function switching experiment. It is advisable to work through each page sequentially and fill in the appropriate values. Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 127 8 8.4.2 Survey Figure 8-8 Survey Scan Dialog: Qtof MicroSurvey Page The mass range is used to define the start and end mass range for the MS data. Time (Mins), defines the start and end times for the complete experiment. The spectrum integration period (Scan Duration) and Inter-Scan Delay period for the MS data are selected. In the MS mode the minimum time required to transfer data from the embedded PC to the data file on the host PC is about 100 mSec. Scan times of less than 1 sec may be employed if required, but because the Inter-Scan Delay is fixed (by the data transfer rate) the duty cycle will decline at very fast acquisition rates. 128 Data Acquisition 8 The Cone Voltage must either be set to Use Tune Page or set in this window to a suitable value. 8.4.3 MS to MSMS Figure 8-9 Survey Scan Dialog: MS to MSMS Page This tab has all the appropriate values that dictate when to switch into the MS/MS mode from the MS mode. They are as follows: – Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 129 8 MS to MSMS Switch Criteria The decision can be made using TIC or individual ion Intensity. Since multiple precursors may be selected for concurrent MS/MS experiments it is usual to set this to Intensity. It is useful to acquire some MS data to be able to measure the typical background level and the peak intensities from the sample peaks so that the detection Threshold can be set appropriately. Within the mass range of the MS survey scan any peaks that rise above the Threshold (in ion counts/sec) will be identified as candidate precursor ions for selection. To prevent the selection of the P+1 (13C) or P+2 (13C2) isotope peaks as additional candidate precursors a Detection Window is set. The window is an absolute mass value, i.e:- a setting of 1Da will extract a 1Da range of the m scale and identify only the most intense peak contained within that specific m range. A suitable value for 1+ and 2+ ions would be 2Da. Number of Components defines the number of precursor masses that can be selected for concurrent MS/MS data acquisition from one MS survey scan. Once the candidate precursor are identified the N most intense will be used for MS/MS. The maximum that can be specified is eight, but often a more suitable number for LC peaks about 10-20 sec wide at half height is 3 – 4. The detection criteria set here may be subsequently modified by charge state considerations (see later) Retention Time Window (seconds) This parameter is only active when an include or exclude file has been generated and is selected (see later). If an include or exclude file is utilized where a retention time is included (e.g. 18 mins), then this window is a time value in seconds which is added to the retention time during which the peak must elute to be selected for fragmentation. For example, a value of 30secs would mean the peak expected to elute at 18 mins must elute between 18.00 and 18.50 mins). Charge State These settings define the parameters used for the charge state recognition algorithm. Tolerance Window. The window used when measuring between adjacent peaks (isotopes). This should be a tight tolerance, and as a default set to 0.1Da. Mass Extraction Window. This value in Da is the mass range around the peak identified that is extracted to perform the CS recognition on. For peptide work a value of 2Da is recommended as a default. 130 Data Acquisition 8 (%) Intensity of Main Peak. This threshold value is utilized to remove low intensity noise peaks from being identified by the CS algorithm. A default value of 2% is recommended. Precursor Selection Everything. No user-predefined masses are used and all peaks will be selected automatically according to the criteria defined in the Automatic Function Switching parameters. Included Masses Only will perform MS/MS solely on those masses appearing in the Include Masses list, or file, (see later section page 7) provided that their intensities rise above the predefined threshold set in the MS to MS/MS switch criteria. Included Masses and Everything Else allows masses in the Include Masses list to take precedence. These will be selected even if there are more intense peaks that would have been selected automatically. Detected Precursor Inclusion Auto Exclude will exclude a m value and its associated detection window (which is now defined under the exclude tab) from subsequent selection. Always Include allows the immediate selection of a previously selected m value. Include After Time excludes a previously selected m value and its associated detection window, (which is now defined under the exclude tab) from subsequent selection for the period specified. This prevents multiple selection of the same precursor in the event of tailing from strong LC peaks, but allows the fragmentation of near isobaric components eluting at other retention times. The maximum value is 200 secs. Data Discard uninteresting survey scans stores only those survey scans which triggered an MS/MS experiment to disk. Depending on the exact nature of the experiment, discarding these scans may significantly reduce the data file size. Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 131 8 8.4.4 MSMS to MS Figure 8-10 Survey Scan Dialog: MSMS to MS Page If the MSMS to MS switch method is set to Default then the mode change will be triggered by one of the mutually exclusive options selected in the MSMS to MS Switch Criteria. The Intensity falling below threshold option is measured on the base peak in the MS/MS spectrum. A value of 2-3 counts/sec is recommended for peptide work on Q-Tof micro. If the MSMS to MS switch method is set to After time then the mode change will be as for the default setting, except that if these criteria are not met then a maximum time can be set. (For example in the above case the switch would occur after 7 seconds assuming the intensity of the base peak in the MS/MS spectrum had not fallen below 2 counts/sec). These rules apply on a per precursor basis. For example if MS/MS were concurrently running on 3 precursors and one MS/MS spectrum fell below 2 counts/sec then MS/MS would be terminated on that precursor. The remaining 2 precursors would continue in MS/MS mode until either they fell below the 2 counts/sec threshold or each MS/MS precursor ion had been acquired for 7 seconds. If the intensity Threshold were set to 0 counts/sec then MS/MS acquisition would continue on all three functions until a total of 21 seconds had elapsed. It is useful to set this to be equal to an integral number of cycles of MS/MS spectrum acquisition. For example if the MS/MS Scan Time is 1 sec with an Inter Scan Delay of 132 Data Acquisition 8 0.1 sec and CE profiling is in operation then to get 3 scans at each of three different collision energies would require the After time parameter to be set to 9.9 sec. 8.4.5 MSMS Template Figure 8-11 Survey Scan Dialog: MSMS Template Page This page is used to set-up the parameters for the acquisition of the MS/MS data from each of the precursors. It is important that the correct Q-Tof tune file (.ipr file) is selected in the instrument parameter window, Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 133 8 The mass range for the acquisition of the MS/MS data is independent of the mass range selected for the MS survey data as in the example shown here. The spectrum integration (Scan Duration) and Inter-Scan Delay period can also be different to those values chosen in the MS survey mode. The Collision Energy parameter will define a default collision energy that will be used if, for any reason, a value cannot be selected from the parameters defined later under the collision energy settings. 8.4.6 Include Masses Figure 8-12 Survey Scan Dialog: Include Masses Page 134 Data Acquisition 8 The Include Mass option allows a number of predefined m values to be included in the decision making process for switching from MS to MS/MS mode. There are two distinct modes of operation, which are defined in the MS to MSMS criteria (Section 8.4.4). Included Masses Only will restrict MS/MS data acquisition only to peaks having the same m as those defined in the Include Masses List, provided that these peaks rise above the threshold. Included Masses & Everything else will preferentially perform MS/MS on masses in the Included Masses List, even though more intense masses may have been automatically detected, provided that the included masses are above the detection threshold. The Listed option allows a list of m values separated by commas to be entered directly into the window. MS/MS experiments on these masses will be carried out using the parameters defined elsewhere. In contrast, the File option allows included masses to be read from a file and specific parameters (Retention Time, Collision Energy, Cone Voltage, Charge State) may be associated with these m values to override those parameter set elsewhere. The files may be created or modified using the New, Add, Delete, Save As and Save buttons as necessary. Charge State The Use Include By Charge State option allows the selection of only those charge states specified to be selected for MS/MS analysis. This may be useful for example where singly charged ions are usually from the background and it is desirable, therefore, to preclude them from analysis. The required charge states are specified and separated by commas as shown. It is possible to enter values greater than 4, but at present CE control is available only up to and including charge state 4. The Number of Include Components option allows for the maximum number of components above the detection threshold from which the candidate precursors will be selected. For low level studies where singly charged ions are not to be selected for MS/MS it is clear that there may be many candidates above the threshold, among which the multiply charged ions may be the minor components. The range for this parameter is 1 – 100 and a value of 60 or 80 would be a reasonable default value. However it should be noted that higher values slow down data processing and hence acquisition times. Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 135 8 8.4.7 Collision Energy Figure 8-13 Survey Scan Dialog: Collision Energy Page Use Default Collision Energy When selected, all MS/MS data are acquired using the default collision energy specified in the MSMS template window (see Section 8.4.5). Use Collision Energy Profile This option allows a range of different collision energies to be used depending on the m value of the selected precursor. In addition, from 1 up to 5 collision energies may be used 136 Data Acquisition 8 for each precursor m to attempt to produce optimal fragmentation. Using the Browse button, files may be selected which have previously created collision energy profiles. Using the Modify button new profiles can be created using the Modify CE Profile window and its associated Add, Delete, New, Save and Save As options. The example shown is a typical set of collision energy profiles for peptides or protein digest applications. During the MS/MS experiment data are collected with the collision energy cycling through CE1, CE2….CEN on a per spectrum basis. Figure 8-14 The CE Profile Dialog Use Charge State Recognition This mode will allow the collision energy to be set according the charge state (z) and m of the precursor as determined from the charge state recognition algorithm. Collision energy files for charge states from 1, 2, 3 and 4 may be created and selected using the Browse button. In this mode collision energy profiling by cycling around a number of different energies is less likely to be required for peptide analysis. Automated Data Dependent Acquisition (DDA) 137 8 Using the Modify button new profiles can be created using the Modify Charge State window and its associated Add, Delete, New, Save and Save As options. The examples shown are a set of suggested collision energy profiles for peptides or protein digest applications when selecting 2+ ions for MS/MS analysis. Figure 8-15 The Modify Charge State Dialog 8.4.8 Exclude Masses The Exclude Mass option (Figure 8-16)allows predefined masses to be excluded from selection for MS/MS analysis. The Exclude Mass window is now defined on this page and a default value of at least 1000mDa should be selected for peptide work, otherwise C13 isotopes will still be selected for fragmentation. The Range option allows a list of m values separated by commas, or a mass range to be entered into the location in the Exclude Masses window. This is suitable for a small number of components. For a larger number of components and particularly for components or impurities not permanently present the File option can be used to specify m values and an associated retention time. The window around the retention time is specified in the MS to MSMS section above). 138 Data Acquisition Figure 8-16 Survey Scan Dialog: Exclude Masses Page Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 139 9 Chapter 9 Parent Ion Discovery Before starting a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment refer to Chapter 8, Data Acquisition. You will also need to refer to the following chapters of the MassLynx User’s Guide. • Chapter 4 – Sample Lists • Chapter 6 – Chromatogram • Chapter 7 – Spectrum 9.1 Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment In the MassLynx sample list use the cursor to select the MS file. 1. Select MS Method from the Instrument Shortcut bar 2. Select File > New. to create a new template with no predefined functions. 3. In the drop down menu select New 4. Select to create a parent ion discovery experiment. This invokes the Parent Scan Dialog (Figure 9-1). This consists of 10 tabbed pages. 140 Parent Ion Discovery 9 9.1.1 Parent Survey Window Figure 9-1 Parent Scan Dialog: Parent Survey Page Masses (m/z) Specifies the start and end range of the low and high-energy survey spectra Time (Mins) Specifies the start and end times in minutes for the experiment. Cone Voltage Allows the user to select either the cone voltage currently in use on the active tune page or to specify a user defined value by entering a suitable value into the text box Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 141 9 Method Specifies the ionization mode and the mode of data collection. It is essential that centroid acquisition is selected as this technique relies on mass difference in the neutral loss experiment and absolute mass for the product ion experiment. Scan Duration Specifies the integration time for the low and high-energy survey scans. Typical values are 1 second for the scan and 0.1 second for the inter-scan delay. Collision Energy These are the collision energies used during the low and high energy survey spectra. Typically the low energy is performed at 10eV or lower, whilst the high-energy data acquisition is performed at the appropriate value to produce the desired fragmentation. If a LockSpray interface is configured the Reference Scan options become available. Scans to Average The parameter determines the number of reference scans to be averaged to provide a correction factor for exact mass measurements. Values between 5 and 10 are generally suitable. Frequency determines how often the reference will be selected and a value of 10 seconds is typical. Cone Voltage allows the use to select a suitable cone voltage for the reference compound being used. 142 Parent Ion Discovery 9 9.1.2 Product Ions Figure 9-2 Example of a Screen Capture If the parent ion discovery is to be triggered by the presence of product ions, the masses of these ions should be entered in the above list. Once created the list should be saved under a suitable name. Switch Criteria Any ion observed in the high-energy survey spectrum at the m specified above, +/- the detection window must exceed the Threshold (Counts/s) to be considered as the chosen product ion. Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 143 9 Detection Window +/- (mDa) is the mass window for detection placed around the product ion. Keeping this detection window low can increase the specificity of the experiment. Recommended value is 25 mDa. This value can be lowered to 10mDa in the case of an instrument operating with DXC or where a LockSpray interface is being used to apply a lock mass correction. If more than one product ion is entered in the list then the user must specify the Match as either requiring the presence of one/or more product ions. 9.1.3 Neutral Loss Figure 9-3 Parent Scan Dialog: Neutral Loss Page 144 Parent Ion Discovery 9 If the parent ion discovery is to be triggered by the detection of a neutral loss then the mass of the loss should be entered into the above list. The value of 97.9769, as in the above example, is the loss of H3P04, which is commonly observed from phosphopeptides. If multiply charged parent ions are to be considered the software will automatically adjust the mass of the neutral loss accordingly. 9.1.4 MSMS Template Figure 9-4 Parent Scan Dialog: MSMS Template This window is used to set-up the parameters for the MSMS data acquisition. It is important that the correct Q-Tof tune file (.ipr file) is selected in the instrument parameter window Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 145 9 9.1.5 MS to MSMS MS to MSMS Switch Criteria The decision can be made using TIC or individual ion Intensity. Since multiple precursors may be selected for concurrent MS/MS experiments it is usual to set this to Intensity. It is useful to acquire some MS data to be able to measure the typical background level and the peak intensities from the sample peaks so that the detection Threshold can be set appropriately. Within the mass range of the MS survey scan any peaks that rise above the Threshold (in ion counts/sec) will be identified as candidate precursor ions for selection. To prevent the selection of the P+1 (13C) or P+2 (13C2) isotope peaks as additional candidate precursors a Detection Window is set. The window is an absolute mass value, i.e:- a setting of 1Da will extract a 1Da range of the m scale and identify only the most intense peak contained within that specific m range. A suitable value for 1+ and 2+ ions would be 2Da. Number of Components defines the number of precursor masses that can be selected for concurrent MS/MS data acquisition from one MS survey scan. Once the candidate precursor are identified the N most intense will be used for MS/MS. The maximum that can be specified is eight, but often a more suitable number for LC peaks about 10-20 sec wide at half height is 3 – 4. The detection criteria set here may be subsequently modified by charge state considerations (see later) Mass (m) Specifies the m range over which MS/MS data will be acquired. Currently it is vital that both the parent survey and MS/MS template interrogate data over the same m range during the experiment. Cone Voltage Allows the user to select the cone voltage currently in use on the active tune page or to specify a value by entering it into the text box. Collision Energy Will define a default collision energy that will be used in the MS/MS experiment if, for any reason, a value cannot be selected from the parameters defined later under the collision energy settings 146 Parent Ion Discovery 9 Retention Time Window (seconds) This parameter is only active when an include or exclude file has been generated and is selected (see later). If an include or exclude file is utilized where a retention time is included (e.g. 18 mins), then this window is a time value in seconds which is added to the retention time during which the peak must elute to be selected for fragmentation. For example, a value of 30secs would mean the peak expected to elute at 18 mins must elute between 18.00 and 18.50 mins). Charge State These settings define the parameters used for the charge state recognition algorithm. Tolerance Window. The window used when measuring between adjacent peaks (isotopes). This should be a tight tolerance, and as a default set to 0.1Da. Mass Extraction Window. This value in Da is the mass range around the peak identified that is extracted to perform the CS recognition on. For peptide work a value of 2Da is recommended as a default. (%) Intensity of Main Peak. This threshold value is utilized to remove low intensity noise peaks from being identified by the CS algorithm. A default value of 2% is recommended. Precursor Selection Everything. No user-predefined masses are used and all peaks will be selected automatically according to the criteria defined in the Automatic Function Switching parameters. Included Masses Only will perform MS/MS solely on those masses appearing in the Include Masses list, or file, (see later section page 7) provided that their intensities rise above the predefined threshold set in the MS to MS/MS switch criteria. Included Masses and Everything Else allows masses in the Include Masses list to take precedence. These will be selected even if there are more intense peaks that would have been selected automatically. Detected Precursor Inclusion Auto Exclude will exclude a m value and its associated detection window (which is now defined under the exclude tab) from subsequent selection. Always Include allows the immediate selection of a previously selected m value. Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 147 9 Include After Time excludes a previously selected m value and its associated detection window, (which is now defined under the exclude tab) from subsequent selection for the period specified. This prevents multiple selection of the same precursor in the event of tailing from strong LC peaks, but allows the fragmentation of near isobaric components eluting at other retention times. The maximum value is 200 secs. Data Discard uninteresting survey scans stores only those survey scans which triggered an MS/MS experiment to disk. Depending on the exact nature of the experiment, discarding these scans may significantly reduce the data file size. Note: It is not recommended to use this function with the neutral loss or product ion experiment. 148 Parent Ion Discovery 9 9.1.6 MSMS to MS Figure 9-5 Parent Scan Dialog: MSMS to MS Page If the MSMS to MS Switch Method is set to Default then the mode change will be triggered by one of the mutually exclusive options selected in the MSMS to MS Switch Criteria. The Intensity falling below threshold option is measured on the base peak in the MS/MS spectrum. A value of 2-3 counts/sec is recommended. If the MS to MS Switch Method is set to After time then the mode change will be as for the default setting, except that if these criteria are not met then a maximum time can be set. (For example in the above case the switch would occur after 15 seconds assuming the intensity of the base peak in the MS/MS spectrum had not fallen below 3 counts/sec). Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 149 9 If Absence of Neutral Loss is selected the instrument will switch back to the MS mode if the presence of the tentatively assigned neutral loss cannot be identified in the MS/MS mode. This is highly recommended for phosphopeptide neutral loss experiments. 9.1.7 Include Figure 9-6 Parent Scan Dialog: Include Page The Include option allows a number of predefined values to be included as targeted precursor ions, for switching from MS to MS/MS mode. There are two distinct modes of operation, when operating with an include list and these are defined in the MS to MSMS criteria (see above). 150 Parent Ion Discovery 9 Included masses only will restrict MS/MS data acquisition only to peaks having the same as those defined in the Include Masses List, +/- include window in mDa, provided that these peaks rise above the threshold. Included masses and Everything else mode will preferentially perform MS/MS on masses in the Include Masses List, even though more intense masses may have been automatically detected, provided that the included masses are above the detection threshold. The Listed option allows a list of values separated by commas to be entered directly into the window or an range e.g. 500_1000. MS/MS experiments on these masses will be carried out using the parameters defined elsewhere. In contrast, the File option allows included masses to be read from a file and specific parameters (Retention Time, Collision Energy, Cone Voltage, Charge State) may be associated with these values to override those parameter set elsewhere. The files may be created or modified using the New, Add, Delete, Save As and Save buttons as necessary. Charge State The Include By Charge State option allows the selection of only those charge states specified to be selected for MS/MS analysis. This may be useful, for example, where singly charged ions are usually from the background and it is desirable to preclude them from analysis. The required charge states are specified and separated by commas as shown. It is possible to enter values greater than 4, but at present CE control is available only up to and including charge state 4. The Number of Include Components option window defines the maximum number of components above the detection threshold from which the candidate precursors will be selected. For low level studies where singly charged ions are not to be selected for MS/MS it is clear that there may be many candidates above the threshold, among which the multiply charged ions may be the minor components. The range for this parameter is 1 – 100 and a value of 60 to 80 would be a reasonable default value. It should be noted that raising this value will slow the acquisition process. Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 151 9 9.1.8 Exclude Figure 9-7 Parent Scan Dialog: Exclude Dialog The Exclude Mass window allows predefined masses to be excluded from selection for MS/MS analyses. The Exclude Mass window is now defined on this page and a default value of at least 1000mDa should be selected for peptide work, otherwise C12 and C13 isotopes will still be selected for fragmentation as separate peaks. An exclude Range e.g. 50_250 can be entered to prevent switching on solvent or background ions which are known not to be of interest. 152 Parent Ion Discovery 9 Alternatively, the Range option allows a list of values separated by commas to be entered into the location in the Exclude Mass window. This is suitable for a small number of components. For a larger number of components and particularly for components or impurities not permanently present the File option can be used to specify values and an associated retention time. The window around the retention time is specified in the MS to MSMS section above. 9.1.9 Collision Energy Figure 9-8 Parent Scan Dialog: Collision Energy Page Creating a Parent Ion Discovery Experiment 153 Use Default Collision Energy When selected all MS/MS data are acquired using the default collision energy specified in the MSMS template window. Use Collision Energy Profile Figure 9-9 The CE Profile Dialog The collision energy profile option allows a range of different collision energies to be used depending on the value of the selected precursor. In addition, from 1 up to 5 collision energies may be used for each precursor to attempt to produce optimal fragmentation. Using the Browse button, previously created files with collision energy profiles may be selected. Using the Modify button new profiles can be created using the Modify CE Profile window and its associated Add, Delete, New, Save and Save As options. During the MS/MS experiment data are collected with the collision energy cycling through CE1, CE2….CEN on a per spectrum basis. 154 Parent Ion Discovery The system will not interpolate values. MS/MS on any value of not included in this table will be performed using the default value set in the MS/MS template. Below is a typical collision energy profile covering the range 400 to 1000 . Use Charge State Recognition Figure 9-10 The Modify Charge State Dialog This mode will allow the collision energy to be set according to the charge state and of the precursor as determined from the charge state recognition algorithm. Collision energy profiles for charge states from 1, 2, 3 and 4 may be created and the text files selected using the Browse button. In this mode collision energy profiling by cycling around a number of different energies is not required. The system will linearly interpolate between values in the table. Using the Modify button new profiles can be created using the Modify Charge State window and its associated Add, Delete, New, Save and Save As options. The examples shown are a set of suggested collision energy profiles for peptides or protein digest applications when selecting 2+ ions for MS/MS analysis. 155 10 Chapter 10 Maintenance and Fault Finding Cleanliness and care are of the utmost importance whenever internal assemblies are removed from the instrument. • Always prepare a clear clean area in which to work. • Make sure that any tools or spare parts that may be required are close at hand. • Obtain some small containers in which screws, washers, spacers etc. can be stored. • Use tweezers and pliers whenever possible. • If nylon or cotton gloves are used take care not to leave fibres in sensitive areas. • Avoid touching sensitive parts with fingers. • Do not use rubber gloves. • Before reassembling and replacing dismantled components, inspect O rings and other vacuum seals for damage. Replace with new if in doubt. Should a fault occur soon after a particular part of the system has been repaired or otherwise disturbed, it is advisable first of all to ensure that this part has been correctly refitted and / or adjusted and that adjacent components have not been inadvertently disturbed. : This Chapter describes maintenance for the following integral parts of the Q-Tof micro: • Section 10.2, The Source • Section 10.3, The Electrospray Probe • Section 10.4, The APcI Probe • Section 10.5, The Analyzer Caution: Many of the procedures described in this chapter involve the removal of possibly toxic contaminating deposits using flammable or caustic agents. Personnel performing these operations should be aware of the inherent risks, and should take the necessary precautions. 156 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 In addition further advice and tips are given in the following sections: • Section 10.6, Fault Finding • Section 10.7, Cleaning Materials • Section 10.8, Preventive Maintenance Check List 10.1 Electronics Maintenance 10.1.1 Cooling Fans and Air Filters Always ensure that none of the cooling fans is obstructed. It is essential that the fan filter is checked and cleaned at regular intervals, and replaced if there is any doubt about its effectiveness. 10.1.2 The Vacuum System The performance of the mass spectrometer will be severely impaired by the lack of a good vacuum in the ion transfer (hexapole) region or the analyzer. • An excessive analyzer pressure results in a general loss in performance indicated by a loss of resolution and an increase in the background noise. • As the vacuum deteriorates, the vacuum becomes insufficient to maintain the instrument in the operate mode. Before suspecting a leak, the following points should be noted: • The turbomolecular pumps will not operate if the rotary pump has failed. • If the rotary pump is not maintained, the oil may become so contaminated that optimum pumping speed is no longer possible. Initially, gas ballasting may clean the oil. If the oil in the rotary pump has become discolored, then it should be changed according to the pump manufacturer’s maintenance manual. • The turbomolecular pumps switch off if an over temperature is detected. This could be due to poor backing vacuum, failure of the water supply or a leak in the source or analyzer. Vacuum Leaks If a leak is suspected, the following basic points may help to locate it: Electronics Maintenance 157 10 • Leaks very rarely develop on an instrument that has been fully operational. Suspect components that have recently been disturbed. Leaks on flanges can usually be cured by further tightening of the flange bolts or by replacing the seal. • All seals are made using O rings. When refitting flanges pay attention to the condition of O rings. Any that are cut or marked may cause a leak. The O rings should be clean and free from foreign matter. A hair across an O ring is sufficient to prevent the instrument pumping down. • Source components that operate at, or slightly above, atmospheric pressure are not susceptible to vacuum leaks. In the unlikely event of a leak on a feedthrough, then the unit should be replaced or returned to Micromass for repair. Pirani Gauge The Pirani gauge head does not require routine maintenance. Active Inverted Magnetron Gauge In particular, the quadrupole analyzer gauge requires regular maintenance. For information on cleaning the active inverted magnetron (Penning) gauge, refer to the Edwards literature supplied with the instrument. 158 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 Gas Ballasting Figure 10-1 Rotary Pump Gas ballasting serves two important purposes: • When rotary pumps are used to pump away solvent vapors, the solvent vapor can become dissolved in the pump oil causing an increase in backing line pressure. Gas ballasting is a method of purging the oil to remove dissolved contaminants. • Oil mist expelled from the rotary pump exhaust is trapped in the oil mist filter. This oil is returned to the rotary pump during gas ballasting. Gas ballasting should be performed routinely on a weekly basis for 30 minutes. If the source is used in the APcI or megaflow electrospray modes, more frequent gas ballasting is recommended. Gas ballasting is performed on the E2M28 pump by rotating the gas ballast valve 5 to 6 turns in a counterclockwise direction. It is normal for the rotary pump to make more noise when the gas ballast valve is open. Caution: Failure to gas ballast the rotary pump frequently leads to shortened oil lifetime which in turn may shorten rotary pump lifetime. The Source 159 10 Oil Mist Filter The E2M28 rotary pump is fitted with an Edwards EMF20 oil mist filter which traps oil vapor from the rotary pump exhaust. The trapped oil is then returned to the rotary pump during routine gas ballasting. The oil mist filter contains two elements; the odor element need not be changed, but the mist element must be changed every time the rotary pump oil is changed. • To change the element follow the instructions in the Edwards manual. Rotary Pump Oil The oil in the rotary pump should be maintained at the correct level at all times. Check the oil level at weekly intervals, topping up if necessary. It is important to monitor the condition of the oil regularly. Replace the oil when it has changed to a noticeable reddish brown color, or routinely at 4 month intervals (3000 hours operation). At the same time, replace the oil mist filter’s mist element (see above). Change the oil in the rotary pump as follows: 1. Gas ballast lightly for 30 to 60 minutes. 2. Vent and shut down the instrument as described in Routine Procedures. 3. It will be found easier to drain the oil while the pump is still warm. 4. Drain the oil through the drain hole situated near the oil level sight glass. 5. Flush the pump, then replace the drain plug and refill the pump with the correct grade oil to the correct level. 6. Gas ballast lightly for 30 to 60 minutes. For further servicing information refer to the manufacturer’s manual. Foreline Trap This is used to protect against the chance of pump oil backstreaming into the collision gas solenoid and/or the turbo pumps. The activated alumina should be changed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 10.2 The Source The Z-spray source is a robust assembly requiring little maintenance. The source consists of three basic parts: 160 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 • The probe adjustment flange. • The glass tube. • The source flange assembly. The probe adjustment flange and the glass tube can be readily removed, without venting the instrument, to gain access to the source block and sample cone. This allows the following operations to be performed: • Wiping the sample cone. • Removing the sample cone. • Fitting or removing the APcI corona discharge pin. • Fitting or removing the exhaust liner and cleanable baffle. • Fitting or removing the nanoflow electrospray interface. • Enabling or disabling the purge gas. The sample cone may be cleaned in situ, by gentle wiping with a cotton swab or lint tissue soaked with 50:50 acetonitrile:water. More thorough cleaning of the sample cone may be achieved by removing it from the source. This may also be done without venting the instrument, by closing the isolation valve located on the ion block. Less frequently it may be necessary to clean the ion block, the extraction cone and the hexapole lens, in which case the instrument must be vented. This should only be done when the problem is not rectified by cleaning the sample cone or when charging effects are apparent. Charging is evidenced by a noticeable progressive drop in signal intensity, often resulting in a complete loss of signal. Switching the instrument out of and back into operate causes the beam momentarily to return. The hexapole transfer lens should not require frequent cleaning. If it is suspected that the lens does need cleaning it may be withdrawn from the front of the instrument after removing the ion block support. 10.2.1 Cleaning the Sample Cone in Situ This may be necessary due to lack of sensitivity or fluctuating peak intensity, or if deposited material is visible on the outside of the sample cone. Proceed as follows: 1. On the MassLynx Shortcut bar launch the tune page. Caution: Cleaning the various parts of the source requires the use of solvents and chemicals which may be flammable and hazardous to health. The user should take all necessary precautions. The Source 161 10 2. Deselect Operate to put the instrument in standby mode 3. Switch off the LC pumps. 4. Disconnect the liquid flow at the rear of the probe. 5. Set Source Block Temp and either APcI Probe Temp or Desolvation Temp to 20°C to switch off the heaters. The cooling time will be significantly shortened if the API gases are left flowing. Figure 10-2 Removing The Source Enclosure When APcI Probe Temp or Desolvation Temp has cooled below 100°C: 6. Deselect API Gas to switch off the nitrogen supply. 7. Disconnect both gas lines from the front panel by undoing the knurled nuts. 8. Disconnect both electrical connections by pulling back on the plug sleeves to release the plugs from the sockets on the front panel. 9. Undo the two knurled thumb nuts that retain the probe and withdraw it from the source. Place it carefully to one side. Caution: Removal of the APcI probe or desolvation nozzle when hot may cause burns. Attention: Removal of the APcI probe when hot will shorten the probe heater’s life. 162 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 10. Undo the three thumb screws and withdraw the probe adjustment flange and glass tube. Place the glass tube, end on, on a flat surface and place the probe adjustment flange on top of the glass tube. 11. If fitted, remove the APcI corona discharge pin. The sample cone is now accessible. 12. Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver rotate the isolation valve by 90° into its fully anticlockwise position. A small improvement in the analyzer vacuum may be observed as a result of this operation. The isolation valve (Figure 10-3) is closed when the slot is perpendicular to the direction of flow. 13. Carefully wipe the sample cone with a cotton swab or lint free tissue soaked in 50:50 acetonitrile:water or 50:50 methanol:water. Figure 10-3 The Source, With Housing Removed . 14. Dry the cone using nitrogen. Caution: When the source enclosure has been removed the source block is exposed. Ensure that the source block heater has cooled before proceeding. Attention: Do not attempt to remove any obstruction by poking. This may result in damage The Source 163 10 If the sample cone is still not clean, or if the aperture is partially blocked, proceed to the following section. Otherwise, when the cone is clean and dry: 15. Open the isolation valve. 16. Replace all removed components, following in reverse order the removal procedures. 10.2.2 Removing and Cleaning the Sample Cone It is not necessary to vent the instrument to remove the sample cone. The source block incorporates an isolation valve for this purpose. To remove the sample cone proceed as follows: 1. Follow the procedure in the previous section, to gain access to the sample cone. 2. Using a suitable flat blade screwdriver rotate the valve by 90° into its fully anticlockwise position. A small improvement in the analyzer vacuum may be observed as a result of this operation. The isolation valve is in the closed position when the slot is perpendicular to the direction of flow. Attention: The sample cone is a delicate and expensive component and should be handled with extreme care. 164 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 Figure 10-4 Removing the Cone 3. Disconnect the cone gas inlet line (if fitted). 4. Take the sample cone extraction tool supplied in the source spares kit and screw it to the flange of the sample cone. 5. Remove the two sample cone retaining screws using a 1.5mm Allen key and withdraw the sample cone and cone gas nozzle (if fitted) from the ion block. 6. Remove the extraction tool, and separate the sample cone from the cone gas nozzle. Place both components in an ultrasonic bath containing 40:40:10 acetonitrile:water:formic acid or 40:40:10 methanol:water:formic acid. Rinse and sonicate with 50:50 acetonitrile:water or methanol:water. 7. Dry the cone and nozzle using nitrogen. To minimize down time fit a spare sample cone, obtainable from Micromass, at this stage. If material has built up on the exhaust liner and cleanable baffle: 1. Remove the cleanable baffle and the exhaust liner. Attention: Do not attempt to remove the baffle without first removing the sample cone, The Source 165 10 2. Clean these components, or obtain replacements. 3. Fit the cleaned (or the replacement) exhaust liner and cleanable baffle to the ion block. Note: Refitting the sample cone is a reversal of the removal procedure. 10.2.3 Removing and Cleaning the Source Block and Extraction Cone 1. From Tune Page menu bar select Vacuum > Vent. The rotary pump and the turbomolecular pumps switch off. The turbomolecular pumps are allowed to run down to 50% speed after which a vent valve automatically admits dry nitrogen. Figure 10-5 Source Block and Extraction Cone Removed 2. Remove the source enclosure and the sample cone as described in the previous section. When the Instrument has Vented: 3. Remove the two screws which secure the ion block and remove the ion block heater and the ion block. 166 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 4. Separate the extraction cone and the PTFE insulating ring from the ion block. 5. Remove the plug and the PTFE sealing washer. 6. Remove the sample cone as described above. 7. Leaving the valve stem in place, immerse the ion block in an ultrasonic bath containing 50:50 acetonitrile:water or 50:50 methanol:water, followed by 100% methanol. 8. Clean the sample cone and the extraction cone using in turn: • concentrated formic acid. • 50:50 acetonitrile:water or 50:50 methanol:water. • 100% methanol. 9. Dry all components using a flow of nitrogen, or place them in a warm oven. Caution: Strong acid causes burns. Carry out this procedure in a fume cupboard using protective equipment. The Source 167 10 10.2.4 Removing and Cleaning the RF Lens Assembly Figure 10-6 Removing The RF Lens Assembly To remove the RF hexapole transfer lens assembly, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the ion block, as described above. 2. Remove the three screws retaining the ion block support and carefully withdraw it, together with the support liner and O rings, from the pumping block. 3. Using a lint free tissue to gently grasp the hexapole, carefully withdraw it. To clean the hexapole transfer lens proceed as follows: 4. Immerse the complete assembly in a suitable solvent (100% methanol) and sonicate in an ultrasonic bath. Attention: Take care not to scratch the internal bore of the pumping block as the hexapole lens assembly is withdrawn. 168 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 Figure 10-7 The RF Lens Assembly 5. Thoroughly dry the assembly using a flow of nitrogen. In severe cases: 1. Remove, clean, dry and replace each rod separately (one at a time). 2. Reassemble the assembly with extreme care, checking the assembly against the diagram. 10.2.5 Reassembling and Checking the Source 1. Feed the hexapole transfer lens into the instrument, allowing the recesses in the differential aperture plate to locate onto the two support rails within the analyzer assembly. Ensure that the assembly is pushed fully in. 2. Check the condition of the O rings on the ion block support. Replace them if necessary. 3. Replace the ion block support, pushing it in against the springs of the hexapole assembly. 4. Replace the three retaining screws. 5. Fit the plug and sealing ring to the ion block. 6. Fit the insulating ring and extraction cone. 7. Offer the ion block up to the peek ion block support, locate the two dowels and push firmly. The Source 169 10 8. Replace the ion block heater. 9. Replace and firmly tighten the two retaining screws taking care not to over-tighten the screws. 10. On the tune page select Vacuum > Pump. 11. Replace the PTFE exhaust liner and cleanable baffle, if removed. 12. Replace the sample cone and, if the nanoflow option is to be used, the cone gas nozzle on the ion block. 13. Reconnect the cone gas supply (nanoflow operation only). 14. Plug the purge and cone gas outlets and fit the APcI corona discharge pin. 15. Fit the source enclosure and the probe adjustment flange. 16. Insert the APcI probe and connect the Nebuliser Gas line. 17. Select Inlet > Gas and turn on Nitrogen. Fully open the Nebuliser Gas valve. 18. Set Desolvation Gas to read back 400 l/h (monitored on the tune page). 19. Check for gas leaks using soap solution. 20. Reduce Desolvation Gas to 150 l/h. 21. Set Source Block Temp to 150°C, and APcI Probe Temp to 20°C 22. Select Operate on the tune page. 23. With Corona set to zero, check that the Cone readback is reading the correct set value. 24. Set Corona to 4.0kV. 25. Check that the Corona readback is 4.0 kV and that the Cone readback is still reading the same set value. 26. Check that all other readbacks on the tune page agree with the set values. 10.2.6 The Corona Discharge Pin If the corona discharge pin becomes dirty or blunt: 1. Remove it from the source. 2. Clean and sharpen it using 600 grade emery paper. Attention: The maximum operating temperature for the source heater is 150°C. Do not set Source Block Temp higher than 150°C. 170 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 If the needle becomes bent or otherwise damaged it should be replaced. 10.3 The Electrospray Probe Indications that maintenance is required to the electrospray probe include: • An unstable ion beam. Nebulizing gas may be escaping from the sides of the probe tip. Ensure that the probe tip O ring is sealing correctly. The probe tip setting may be incorrect. Adjust the probe tip setting as described in Electrospray. The probe tip may be damaged. Replace the probe tip. There may be a partial blockage of the sample capillary or the tubing in the solvent flow system. Clear the blockage or replace the tubing. • Excessive broadening of chromatogram peaks. This may be due either to inappropriate chromatography conditions, or to large dead volumes in the transfer capillaries between the LC column or probe connection. Ensure that all connections at the injector, the column, the splitting device (if used) and the probe are made correctly. • High LC pump back pressure. With no column in line and the liquid flow set to 300 µl/min the back pressure should not exceed 7 bar (100 psi). Pressures in excess of this indicate a blockage in the solvent flow system. Samples containing particulate matter, or those of high concentrations, are most likely to cause blockages. Check for blockages at the tube connections and couplings to the injector, the column and, if used, the flow splitter. Attention: The probe tip is sharp, and may be contaminated with harmful and toxic substances. Always take great care when handling the electrospray probe. The Electrospray Probe 171 10 Concentrated formic acid can be injected to clear blockages. Rinse thoroughly afterwards. Blockage of the stainless steel sample capillary may occur if the desolvation heater is left on without liquid flow. This is particularly relevant for samples contained in involatile solvents or high analyte concentrations. To avoid this problem it is good practice to switch off the heater before stopping the liquid flow, and flush the capillary with solvent. A blocked stainless steel sample capillary can often be cleared by removing it and reconnecting it in the reverse direction, thus flushing out the blockage. • Gas flow problems Check all gas connections for leaks using soap solution, or a suitable leak searching agent such as Snoop. 10.3.1 Replacement of the Stainless Steel Sample Capillary Figure 10-8 Removing the Stainless Steel Capillary form the Source If the stainless steel sample capillary cannot be cleared, or if it is contaminated or damaged, replace it as follows: 1. Remove the probe form the source. 2. Disconnect the LC line from the probe and remove the finger-tight nut. 172 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 3. Loosen the grub screw retaining the LC union. 4. Remove the two probe end cover retaining screws, and remove the probe end cover. 5. Unscrew and remove the probe tip. 6. Remove the LC union and adapter nut. Withdraw and discard the stainless steel sample capillary. 7. Remake the LC connection to the LC union. 8. Sleeve one end of new sample capillary with the PTFE liner tube. 9. Using a GVF/16 ferrule and the adapter nut, connect the sample capillary to the LC union, ensuring that both the liner tube and sample capillary are fully butted into the LC union. 10. Disconnect the LC connection and feed the sample capillary through the probe, ensuring that a 0.3mm graphitized vespel ferrule (GVF/003) is fitted. 11. Using a Rheodyne spanner, gently tighten the adapter nut onto the probe. 12. Replace the probe tip and adjust so that 0.5mm of sample capillary protrudes from the probe tip. 13. Replace the probe end cover and tighten the grub screw to clamp the LC union. 10.4 The APcI Probe Indications that maintenance to the APcI probe is required include: • The probe tip assembly becomes contaminated, for example by involatile samples if the probe temperature is too low during operation (300°C). • The appearance of chromatogram peak broadening or tailing. Samples that give rise to a good chromatogram peak shape in APcI (for example reserpine and common pesticides) should display peak half widths of the order 0.1 minutes for 10µl loop injections at a flow rate of 1 ml/min. The appearance of significant peak broadening or tailing with these compounds is most likely to be due to a broken fused silica capillary or probe tip heater assembly. • Low LC pump back pressure. For 50:50 acetonitrile:water at a flow rate of 1 ml/min, a LC pump back pressure less than 14 bar (200 psi) is indicative of a broken fused silica capillary or a leaking connector. • High LC pump back pressure. The APcI Probe 173 10 For 50:50 acetonitrile:water at a flow rate of 1 ml/min, a LC pump back pressure above 35 bar (500 psi) is indicative of a blockage or partial blockage in the fused silica capillary, in a LC connector or in the filter. It is advisable to change the inner filter pad on a regular basis (see “Replacing the Fused Silica Capillary” in the following pages). • Gas flow problems. Check all gas connections for leaks using soap solution, or a suitable leak searching agent such as Snoop. 10.4.1 Cleaning the Probe Tip Remove any visible deposits on the inner wall of the probe heater with a micro-interdental brush (supplied in the spares kit) soaked in methanol:water. Before starting an analysis: 1. With the probe out of the instrument, connect the nebulizing gas supply line. 2. Select API Gas and turn on Nitrogen. 3. Allow the gas to flow for several seconds to clear any debris from the heater. 4. Turn off Nitrogen. 5. Insert the probe into the source. 6. Select API Gas and turn on Nitrogen. 7. Raise APcI Heater gradually, starting at 100°C and increasing in 50°C intervals to 650°C over a period of 10 minutes. This procedure should remove any chemical contamination from the probe tip. Attention: Do not set APcI Heater to 650°C immediately as this may damage the probe heater. 174 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 10.4.2 Replacing the Probe Tip Heater Figure 10-9 The APcI Probe Tip Heater 1. Remove the probe tip assembly by carefully loosening the two grub screws. 2. Disconnect the heater from the probe body by pulling parallel to the axis of the probe. 3. Fit a new heater assembly. 4. Reconnect the probe tip assembly. The APcI Probe 175 10 10.4.3 Replacing the Fused Silica Capillary Figure 10-10 Replacing the Fused Silica Capillary on the APcI probe With the probe removed from the source proceed as follows: 1. Remove the probe tip assembly and the heater, as described in the preceding section. 2. Remove the probe end cover by removing the two screws and the grub screws that retain the LC filter. 3. Loosen the filter from the adapter nut. 4. Unscrew the adapter nut from the probe. 5. Remove and discard the fused silica capillary. 6. Using a ceramic capillary cutter, cut a new length of 300µm o.d. × 100µm i.d. fused silica capillary, about 1 centimetre excess in length. 7. Using a GVF/004 ferrule and the adapter nut, connect the capillary to the filter ensuring that the capillary passes through the ferrule but stops short of the filter. 8. Feed the sample capillary through the probe, ensuring that a 0.4mm graphitized vespel ferrule (GVF/004) is fitted. 9. Using a ceramic capillary cutter, cut the capillary at the nebuliser so that between 0.5 and 1.0mm of capillary is protruding from the nebuliser. 176 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 It is important to cut the capillary square. This should be examined using a suitable magnifying glass. 10. Undo the adapter nut from the probe and withdraw the capillary from the probe. 11. Remove 20mm of polyamide coating from the end of the capillary using a flame and clean with a tissue saturated with methanol. 12. Carefully re-feed the sample capillary through the probe ensuring that the graphitized vespel ferrule is still fitted. 13. Using a Rheodyne spanner, gently tighten the adapter nut to the probe. 14. Replace the probe end cover and retaining screws. 15. Using a 1.5mm Allen key, tighten the grub screw in the probe end cover to clamp the filter. 16. Replace the heater and probe tip assembly. 10.5 The Analyzer The analyzer element of any high performance quadrupole mass spectrometer is, of necessity, a precisely machined and aligned assembly. Q-Tof micro is fitted with a prefilter assembly designed to protect the main analyzer by absorbing the majority of any contamination. The prefilter is not as mechanically critical as the main rods, as it has only RF applied and is, therefore, not resolving. It does, however, act as a high pass filter, and will reject ions of low mass before they enter the main rods. Figure 10-11 The Prefilter and Main Analyzer of the Q-Tof micro The Analyzer 177 10 It is unlikely that there will be any means on site for measuring the assembly to the micron level required. If analyzer charging effects cannot be resolved by the techniques below, it is almost certain that the analyzer will have to be returned to Micromass for refurbishment. 10.5.1 Removing the MS1 and Collision Cell Optical Bench Assembly 1. Vent the system as described at the beginning of this chapter. 2. Remove the analyzer housing top plate. Working inside the MS1 analyzer housing proceed as follows: 3. Disconnect the two push-on connectors which take the analyzer RF through to the RF lens at the source end of the analyzer. 4. Disconnect the three push-on connections bringing RF and DC voltages to the gas cell (analyzer housing right hand side). 5. Disconnect the three push-on connections bringing RF and DC voltages to the hexapole transfer lens following the gas cell (analyzer housing right hand side). 6. Remove the gas line connection to the gas cell where it enters the gas cell. 7. Disconnect the push-on DC (pole bias) connection to the main filter. 8. Disconnect the heavy gauge copper RF/DC main filter supply from the feedthroughs on the left side of the naysayer housing. All connections to the ion optical bench (main filter assembly/gas cell/RF lens assembly) should now have been removed. 9. At the front and rear of the optical bench, remove the two 4mm Allen socket screws that secure the bench to the mounting flanges. Attention: Cleaning the analyzer on site is not a task to be undertaken lightly. It should be done only when there is clear evidence that the analyzer is the source of lack of performance. The main rods of the analyzer are precision ground, as are the ceramics in which they are mounted. Under no circumstances should any of the analyzer rods be removed from the ceramic mountings. Attention: Before removing the optics from the housing prepare a clean area where it may be placed in preparation for removing and cleaning the prefilter rods. 178 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 10. Holding the optical bench assembly, using two of the clamps that secure the optical elements to the aluminium base plate, lift the rear end upwards to clear the vacuum housing and then withdraw the optical bench from the housing. 11. Once removed replace the vacuum housing lid to prevent the ingress of dust into the housing. 10.5.2 Dismantling and Cleaning the Entrance Prefilter Dismantling and cleaning of the entrance prefilter is a skilled procedure which should be entrusted only to a Micromass engineer. 10.5.3 Cleaning the MS1 Analyzer Assembly 1. Having removed the optical bench assembly as described above, remove the two top clamps that secure the main filter (including pre and post-filter assemblies) to the optical bench. 2. Roll up a narrow strip of absorbent lint-free paper. Pass one end through the gap between two adjacent main filter rods and back through the next gap so that the paper is wrapped one half turn around a rod. 3. Wet the paper with a solvent such as methanol, and move the strip up and down along the analyzer rod. 4. Remove the strip and use dry nitrogen gas from a cylinder (not compressed air) to blow out any dust or particles. It is not anticipated that the gas cell or hexapole transfer lens will require cleaning. 10.5.4 Replacing the MS1 and Gas Cell Optical Bench Assembly Reassembly is the reverse of the appropriate dismantling procedure. Take extra care to ensure that all electrical connections are correctly and securely made, and that the various mechanical assemblies are accurately aligned within the housing on their locating dowels. Attention: Under no circumstances should any of the analyzer rods be removed from the ceramic mountings. Attention: Tools, carborundum paper or micromesh must not be used to remove contamination from the main filter rods. Fault Finding 179 10 10.5.5 The MS2 Analyzer and Detector Assembly The orthogonal acceleration cell, reflectron and microchannel plate assemblies are separated from the MS1 and gas cell region by a differential pumping orifice. It is anticipated that this region of the instrument will not require routine maintenance under normal operating conditions. The microchannel plate system is at risk from failure properly to condition the detector following venting of the system to atmosphere or vacuum failure. 10.6 Fault Finding The majority of faults that occur can be traced to a malfunction of the ion source or inlet system. On systems equipped with more than one source, this can often be confirmed by changing sources to see if the fault “moves” with the source. Should a fault occur soon after a part of the system has been repaired or otherwise disturbed, it is advisable first of all to ensure that this part has been correctly refitted and adjusted, and that adjacent components have not been inadvertently disturbed. 10.6.1 No Beam Refer to the relevant chapters of this manual and check the following: Attention: It is strongly recommended that assistance is sought from Micromass if maintenance to any of the components within the TOF analyzer housing are thought to be necessary (e.g. excessive noise, spikes, loss of detector gain or abnormal TOF peak shapes). 180 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10 • The tune page real time display is activated by pressing the appropriate button on the tool bar of the tune page. • Normal tuning parameters are set and, where appropriate, readback values are acceptable. • All necessary cables have been correctly attached to the source and probe. • Solvent is reaching the probe tip and the solvent flow rate is as required. For solvent flow rates below 100 µl/min it may be necessary temporarily to turn off the nebulizing gas and remove the probe from the source to allow the solvent to be seen at the probe tip. • The flows of desolvation gas and nebuliser gas are on and are set to the correct flow rates. • The source has been assembled correctly and is clean. • The source isolation valve is open. If, after performing the above checks, the beam is still absent: 1. Acquire TOF data with a mass range extending down to m 20. 2. Check that there is an interference ‘peak’ at approximately m 55 due to the pusher pulse being switched off. If this interference peak is not present, either the pusher is not pulsing or the output from the detector is not reaching the TDC (time to digital converter). The most likely cause of an absent pusher interference pulse is a faulty attenuator. If the pusher interference peak is not present no data will be acquired. 10.6.2 Unsteady Beam Refer to the relevant chapters of this manual and check that: • Capillary (electrospray) and Sample Cone are tuned correctly. • The capillary is not protruding too far from the end of the probe. • The probe is not too far into the source. • The flow of solvent from the HPLC pump is correct and steady. To do this, remove the probe, degas the solvent, increase the flow rate for several minutes to purge any trapped air then reset and re-measure the flow rate. Fault Finding 181 • Solvents have been adequately degassed. • The nitrogen flow of desolvation gas and nebuliser gas is steady. The nitrogen supply pressure should be 7 bar (100 psi) ±10%. • Desolvation Temp is not set too high for the liquid flow rate used. High temperatures can vaporize solvent within the electrospray probe. Should the preceding checks fail to reveal the cause of the problem, proceed to the following section. 10.6.3 High Back Pressure For electrospray, a higher than normal back pressure readout on the HPLC pump, together with a slowing of the actual solvent flow at the probe tip, can imply that there is a blockage in the capillary transfer line or injection loop due to particulate matter from the sample. To clear the blockage: Remove the probe from the source and increase the solvent flow to 50 µl/min to remove the blockage. Often, injections of neat formic acid help to redissolve any solute which has precipitated out of solution. If the blockage cannot be cleared in this fashion: Remove the finger-tight nut and tubing from the back of the probe. If the back pressure remains high: Replace the tubing with new tube (or first try removing both ends of the tube). If the back pressure falls: Replace the stainless steel sample tube inside the probe (or try reversing the tube to blow out any blockage). Reconnect the tubing to the probe. The solvent flow can now be readjusted and the probe replaced into the source. To check the flow rate from the solvent delivery system, fill a syringe barrel or a graduated glass capillary with the liquid emerging from the probe tip, and time a known volume, say 10µl. 182 Maintenance and Fault Finding Once the rate has been measured and set, a note should be made of the back pressure readout on the pump, as fluctuation of this reading can indicate problems with the solvent flow. For APcI a higher than normal back pressure readout on the HPLC pump can imply that, after a long period of use, the filter pad requires replacement. 10.6.4 Loss of Sensitivity As the ion source becomes dirty after prolonged use, the performance will degrade. Unstable or reduced ion currents are indicators that the source needs cleaning. The usual remedy is to clean the source as described earlier in this chapter. An increase in the analyzer pressure above 4e-6 mbar can also cause loss of sensitivity, although the pressure at which this occurs will be sample dependent. 10.6.5 Incorrect Isotope Distributions Incorrect isotope distributions can be caused by: • The TDC Stop (mV) threshold being set too high. Refer to the tune page settings section of Routine Procedures for information regarding the setting of this parameter. • A faulty attenuator. Attenuators can fail so that they are open circuit (no beam or pusher interference ‘peak’ present), or they can fail such that they stop attenuating.The latter failure mode gives rise to incorrect isotope distributions. When the attenuator fails in this way the TDC Stop (mV) threshold can be increased to a significantly higher value than that used previously without reducing the beam intensity. In normal operation setting the TDC threshold above 200 or 250mV will start to reduce the beam intensity. If the attenuator has failed the TDC threshold can be increased to 500mV or higher before the beam intensity is reduced. 10.6.6 High Noise Levels High noise levels can either be chemical or electronic in nature. Chemical Noise Chemical noise usually originates from contaminated samples, solvents or source gases. Fault Finding 183 Chemical noise can be distinguished from electronic noise simply by stopping source ionization. If no liquid or gases are entering the source and all the source voltages are set to zero then the remaining noise will be electronic in nature. Electronic Noise Electronic noise can be caused by setting the TDC Stop (mV) threshold too low. Refer to the Tuning Chapter for information regarding the setting of this parameter. The microchannel plate detector can be damaged by failure to properly condition the detector following venting of the system to atmosphere. If the detector is producing microdischarges, excessive noise will be apparent on the baseline of mass spectra in the absence of any ion beam. Reducing the detector voltage will reduce the number of discharges and reduce the noise. 10.6.7 Poor Analyzer Vacuum Before suspecting a pump fault or vacuum leak (see Vacuum System earlier in this chapter) it is worth checking the inverted magnetron (Penning) gauge. If this gauge has become dirty it will indicate a poor vacuum, or even fail to register at all. For information on cleaning the gauge, refer to the Edwards literature supplied with the instrument. Note: If the instrument has been vented to atmosphere (instead of dry nitrogen) it may take one to two days before reaching the vacuum levels obtained prior to venting. Attention: It is strongly recommended that assistance is sought from Micromass if maintenance to the detector system is thought necessary. Attention: Assistance from Micromass should be sought if, due to symptoms such as excessive noise, spikes, loss of detector gain or abnormal peak shapes, maintenance to any of the components within the TOF analyzer housing is thought to be necessary. Caution: The instrument must be vented and electrically isolated at the supply outlet before removing the instrument’s covers to gain access to the active inverted magnetron gauge. 184 Maintenance and Fault Finding 10.7 Cleaning Materials It is important when cleaning internal components to maintain the quality of the surface finish. Deep scratches or pits can cause loss of performance. Where no specific cleaning procedure is given, fine abrasives should be used to remove dirt from metal components. Recommended abrasives are: • 600 and 1200 grade emery paper. • Lapping paper (produced by 3M). After cleaning with abrasives it is necessary to wash all metal components in suitable solvents to remove all traces of grease and oil. The recommended procedure is to sonicate the components in a clean beaker of solvent and subsequently to blot them dry with lint-free tissue. Recommended solvents are: • Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) • Methanol • Acetone Following re-assembly, components should be blown with oil-free nitrogen to remove dust particles. 10.8 Preventive Maintenance Check List • Avoid venting the instrument when the rotary pump is gas ballasting. • Do not gas ballast the rotary pump for more than 2 hours under any circumstances. For full details of the following procedures, consult the relevant sections of this chapter and / or refer to the manufacturer’s literature. Attention: Many of the procedures described in this chapter involve the removal of possibly toxic contaminating deposits using flammable or caustic agents. Personnel performing these operations should be aware of the inherent risks, and should take the necessary precautions. Preventive Maintenance Check List 185 10.8.1 Daily • Gas ballast the rotary pump for 30 minutes at the end of a day’s megaflow or APcI operation. It is normal for the rotary pump noise level to increase during gas ballasting. 10.8.2 Weekly • Gas ballast for at least 30 minutes by rotating the gas ballast knob anticlockwise by 5 to 6 turns. When gas ballast is complete, check the rotary pump oil level and color. Oil that has become noticeably red in color should be replaced. • Check the water chiller level and temperature (if fitted). 10.8.3 Monthly Check all cooling fans and filters. 10.8.4 Four-Monthly • Change the mist element in the oil mist filter. • Change the oil in the rotary pump. Gas ballast lightly for 30 to 60 minutes both before and after changing oil. 186 Maintenance and Fault Finding 187 A Appendix A Reference Information The reference files listed in this chapter have all ion intensities set to 100%. Actual ion intensities are not, of course, all 100%, but the calibration software does not take account of the ion intensities and this is a convenient way to store the reference files in the required format. Most samples can be purchased from the Sigma chemical company. To order, contact Sigma via the internet, or by toll-free (or collect) telephone or fax: Internet: http://www.sigma.sial.com This site contains a list of worldwide Sigma offices, many with local toll-free numbers. Toll-free telephone: USA & Canada800-325-3010 Outside USA & Canada++1 314-771-5750 (call collect) Toll-free fax: USA & Canada 800-325-5052 Outside USA & Canada ++44 314-771-5750 call collect and ask for the fax machine) Direct fax: Outside USA & Canada ++1 314-771-5757 (this is a toll call) 188 A A.1 Positive Ion Ref. File Name Chemical Name [Sigma Code #] Molecular Mass / Uses UBQ Bovine Ubiquitin [U6253] 8564.85 650-1500 General HBA Human α globin [H753] 15126.36 700-1500 Hb analysis SOD Superoxide dismutase [S2515] 15591.35 900-1500 Hb (internal cal.) HBB Human β globin [H7379] 15867.22 800-1500 Hb analysis MYO Horse heart myoglobin [M1882] 16951.48 700-1600 General PEGH1000 Polyethylene glycol + ammonium acetate mixture PEG 200+400+600+1000 80-1000 ES+ and APcI+ calibration PEGH2000 Polyethylene glycol + ammonium acetate mixture PEG 200+400+600+1000 +1450 80-2000 ES+ calibration NAICS Sodium Iodide / Caesium Iodide mixture 20-4000 General, ES+ calibration NAIRB Sodium iodide / Rubidium Iodide mixture 20-4000 ES+ calibration 189 A A.1.1 Horse Heart Myoglobin Reference File: MYO.REF – Molecular Weight: 16951.48 A.1.2 Polyethylene Glycol PEG + NH4+ Reference Files: PEGH1000.REF, PEGH2000.REF Charge State Calculated  Value Charge State Calculated  Value Charge State Calculated  Value 28+ 606.419 21+ 808.222 13+ 1304.969 616.177 20+ 848.583 12+ 1413.633 27+ 628.841 19+ 893.192 11+ 1542.053 26+ 652.989 18+ 942.758 10+ 1696.158 25+ 679.068 17+ 998.155 9+ 1884.508 24+ 707.320 16+ 1060.477 8+ 2119.945 23+ 738.030 15+ 1131.108 7+ 2422.651 22+ 771.531 14+ 1211.829 Calculated  Value 63.04 459.28 855.52 1251.75 1647.99 107.07 503.31 899.54 1295.78 1692.01 151.10 547.33 943.57 1339.80 1736.04 195.12 591.36 987.60 1383.83 1780.07 239.15 635.39 1031.62 1427.86 1824.09 283.18 679.41 1075.65 1471.88 1868.12 327.20 723.44 1119.67 1515.91 1912.15 371.23 767.46 1163.70 1559.94 1956.17 415.25 811.49 1207.73 1603.96 2000.20 190 A A.1.3 Sodium Iodide and Caesium Iodide Mixture Reference File: NAICS.REF A.1.4 Sodium Iodide and Rubidium Iodide Reference File: NAIRB.REF A.2 Negative Ion Calculated  Value 22.9898 772.4610 1671.8264 2571.1918 3470.5572 132.9054 922.3552 1821.7206 2721.0861 3620.4515 172.8840 1072.2494 1971.6149 2870.9803 3770.3457 322.7782 1222.1437 2121.5091 3020.8745 3920.2400 472.6725 1372.0379 2271.4033 3170.7688 622.5667 1521.9321 2421.2976 3320.6630 Calculated  Value 22.9898 772.4610 1671.8264 2571.1918 3470.5572 84.9118 922.3552 1821.7206 2721.0861 3620.4515 172.8840 1072.2494 1971.6149 2870.9803 3770.3457 322.7782 1222.1437 2121.5091 3020.8745 3920.2400 472.6725 1372.0379 2271.4033 3170.7688 622.5667 1521.9321 2421.2976 3320.6630 Ref. File Name Chemical Name [Sigma Code #] Molecular Mass / Uses MYONEG Horse heart myoglobin [M1882] 16951.48 700-2400 General 191 A A.2.1 Horse Heart Myoglobin Reference File: MYONEG.REF A.2.2 Mixture of Sugars mixture Reference File: SUGNEG.REF A.2.3 Sodium Iodide and Caesium Iodide (or Rubidium Iodide Mixture Reference File: NAINEG.REF SUGNEG Sugar mixture of: maltose [M5885] raffinose [R0250] maltotetraose [M8253] corn syrup [M3639] 100-1500 Low mass range NAINEG Sodium Iodide / Caesium Iodide (or Rubidium Iodide) mixture 200-3900 ES- calibration Calculated  Value 891.175 1209.812 1882.490 940.741 1302.952 2117.927 996.138 1411.615 2420.632 1058.460 1540.036 1129.091 1694.140 Calculated  Value 179.06 665.21 1151.37 341.11 827.27 1313.42 503.16 989.32 1475.48 Calculated  Value 126.9045 1026.2699 1925.6353 2825.0008 3724.3662 192 A A.3 Preparation of Calibration Solutions A.3.1 PEG + Ammonium Acetate for Positive Ion Electrospray and APcI Prepare a solution of polyethylene glycols at the following concentrations: Use 50% acetonitrile and 50% water containing 2 mmol ammonium acetate. Use reference file PEGH1000.REF. A.3.2 PEG + Ammonium Acetate for Positive Ion Electrospray (Extended Mass Range) Prepare a solution of polyethylene glycols at the following concentrations: Use 50% acetonitrile and 50% water containing 2 mmol ammonium acetate. Use reference file PEGH2000.REF. 276.7987 1176.1641 2075.5296 2974.8950 3874.2604 426.6929 1326.0584 2225.4238 3124.7892 576.5872 1475.9526 2375.3180 3274.6835 726.4814 1625.8469 2525.2123 3424.5777 876.3757 1775.7411 2675.1065 3574.4719 PEG 200 25 ng/ml PEG 400 50 ng/ml PEG 600 75 ng/ml PEG 1000 250 ng/ml PEG 200 25 ng/µl PEG 400 50 ng/ml PEG 600 75 ng/ml PEG 1000 250 ng/ml PEG 1450 250 ng/ml 193 A A.3.3 Sodium Iodide Solution for Positive Ion Electrospray Method 1 Prepare a solution of Sodium Iodide at a concentration of 2 µg/µl in 50:50 propan-2-ol (IPA):water with no additional acid or buffer. Add Caesium iodide to a concentration of 0.05 µg/µl. The purpose of the caesium iodide is to obtain a peak at  133 (Cs+ ) to fill the gap in the calibration file between  23 (Na+ ) and the first cluster at  173, which would lead to poor mass calibration in this mass range. Do not add more CsI than suggested as this may result in a more complex spectrum due to the formation of NaCsI clusters. Use reference file NAICS.REF. Method 2 Prepare a solution of Sodium Iodide at a concentration of 2 µg/µl in 50:50 propan-2-ol (IPA):water with no additional acid or buffer. Add Rubidium iodide to a concentration of 0.05 µg/µl. The purpose of the rubidium iodide is to obtain a peak at  85 (85Rb+ ) with an intensity of about 10% of the base peak at  173. Rubidium iodide has the advantage that no rubidium clusters are formed which may complicate the spectrum. Note that rubidium has two isotopes (85Rb and 87Rb) in the ratio 2.59:1, giving peaks at  85 and 87. Use reference file NAIRB.REF. A.3.4 Sodium Iodide Solution for Negative Ion Electrospray Either of the above solutions is suitable for calibration in negative ion mode. In both cases the first negative reference peak appears at 127 (I–) and the remaining peaks are due to NaI clusters. Use reference file NAINEG.REF. 194 A Instrument Specifications 195 B Appendix B Instrument Specifications To enable the instrument to give its best performance the recommended environmental conditions and power and water supplies are outlined below. Preparation of the laboratory in advance will assist us in efficiently installing the instrumentt. B.1 Room Location Dimensions The Micromass Q-Tof micro MS is 180 mm wide by 635 mm deep by 1163 mm long and weighs 200 kg. It is mounted on 6 supporting feet. An external Edwards EM28 requires an additional 650 mm by 200 mm of floor space. In the event that the unit needs to be lifted, the side panels should be removed and suitable lifting bands passed beneath the bottom of the frame. These should be attached to a suitable device (hoist etc.) to raise the analyser unit in a safe and controlled way. Only trained personnel with the correct equipment should carry this out. A separate table 1200 mm by 730 mm is supplied for the computer terminal. Doorways through which the instrument is to be transported should be a minimum of 820 mm wide. In the laboratory a minimum clearance of 500 mm should be allowed all round the bench for service access, apart from at the rear of the instrument where 900 mm is required. Note: The instrument should not be placed close to heavy machinery (compressors, generators etc.) which give excessive floor vibration. B.2 Environment It is recommended that the instrument be sited in an air conditioned laboratory, in a draught free position and away from excessive amounts of dust. 196 Instrument Specifications B B.2.1 General Altitude: upto 2000m Pollution degree 1 in accordabce with IEC 664 Rotary Pump 150 to 400 C Instrument The maximum ambient laboratory temperature should not exceed 300 C, optimum temperature lies in the range 190 – 220 C. Short term (1.5 hour) variations should be no more than 2 0 C. The relative humidity should not exceed 70%. Heat dissipated into the laboratory from the instrument is about 1.2 kW. The instrument conforms to IEC 1010 – 1, Pollution Degree 1, and Installation Category II. B.2.2 Magnetic Fields OA-Tof instruments are relatively tolerant to stray magnetic fields. We would advise an upper limit of 10 Gauss for both AC and DC components of magnetic field measured at the mass spectrometer. B.2.3 Radio Emissions The instrument should not be placed within a RF field greater than 0.2 V/metre. This approximates to a 1W hand held unity gain transmitter at a distance of 10 m. Possible sources of RF emission include RF linked alarm systems or LANs, portable telephones and hand held transmitters. B.3 Water Supplies The heat dissipated into the cooling water is about 400 Watts. The water flow required to dissipate the heat generated by the turbo pumps is 35 L/hour for an inlet temperature of about 200 C or 23 L/hour at an inlet temperature of about 150 C assuming an outlet temperature of about 300 C. Instrument Specifications 197 B The water may be supplied by a recirculating chiller with the following characteristics:- • Heat dissipation into system: 400 W • Temperature stability: +/- 20 C • Minimum reservoir volume: 5 L • Minimum supply pressure:10 psi (outlet at atmospheric pressure). • Maximum supply pressure: 60 psi • Minimum flow rate at 150 C: 0.4 L/min The above assume that the outlet water temperature will be no more than 300 C. Inlet water temperatures below 150 C are not recommended since excessive condensation may form on exposed pipework. Alternatively, when there is a cooled water supply available it may be used either directly through the instrument or indirectly via a water-to-water heat exchanger. In this latter case the chilled water supply to the heat exchanger must be at least 100 C below the required inlet temperature for the instrument. One inlet and one outlet are required for the instrument. Reinforced 10mm (3/8 inch) flexible hose is preferred. To prevent blockage of the water pipes suitable in-line filters will be required to remove particulate matter from town water supplies when these are used. Operation above 2000 metres altitude may adversely affect the cooling of the system. B.4 Power Requirements The instrument requires a single phase 50 – 60 Hz, 230 V nominal power supply rated at 13 A (UK) or 15 A (Europe). An additional single phase 50 – 60 Hz, 230 V or 115 V nominal power supply rated at 5A (UK) is required to run the embedded PC. In the USA and Canada a single-phase 50 – 60 Hz supply at 230 V phase to neutral fused and rated at 15 A is required. Alternatively two phases of a 50 – 60 Hz 208 V phase to phase, 3 phase supply, rated and fused at 15 A may be used. It is mandatory that no other apparatus is connected to this supply. 198 Instrument Specifications B Circuit breakers are an acceptable alternative to fuses. The supply should be terminated in the laboratory no more than 2 m from the instrument with either a wall mounted isolator or socket and plug to be fitted to the instrument. Other supply voltages can be accommodated using a transformer to change the primary supply voltage to 230 V. Advance notice is required and Micromass should be contacted. On single-phase supplies the power supply should ensure that the line and neutral wires cannot be transposed. On pump start-up currents of up to 30 A may be drawn for several seconds. Time delay fuses and breakers are recommended to prevent nuisance tripping. A safety earth (ground) correctly rated must be provided in all cases. Data system components, chromatographs, syringe pumps etc. should be connected directly to laboratory power outlets (no ancillary outlets are provided on the instrument). A residual current device (RCD) is recommended for additional protection. In the case of instruments fitted with a transformer the RCD should be fitted in the supply side of the transformer. Supply brownout should not fall to less than half main voltage for greater than 20 msec duration. B.5 Gases and Regulators Nitrogen The instrument requires oil free dry nitrogen regulated at 7 bar (100 psi) minimum outlet pressure to provide nebulising and drying gas to the instrument. During API operation typical usage of nitrogen is about 400 L/hour, but under high flow rate conditions (Megaflow/APcI) this may increase to 650 L/hour. This equates, approximately, to the consumption of a large cylinder of compressed nitrogen each day and it may be preferred to use a liquid nitrogen dewar which may last several weeks. Collision Gases Typically Argon is used as the collision gas for CID experiments. This should be 99.9% pure, regulated at no more than 50 psi. Connection is via 1/8 inch OD stainless steel or copper tubing (NOT SUPPLIED). Instrument Specifications 199 B B.6 Exhaust Outlets Rotary Pump Outlet The rotary pump exhaust outlet must be vented to the atmosphere external to the laboratory clear from any air intakes for air conditioning systems. A 12 mm (1/2 inch) hose connection is required. If the length of exhaust exceeds 4 m then the internal diameter of the pipe should be increased to 48 mm (2 inch) for the excess distance. Nitrogen Outlet Severe damage to the instrument will result if the electrospray/APcI exhaust is connected to the rotary pump exhaust line. This will occur when the nitrogen supply is off and rotary pump oil vapour will migrate via the source exhaust to the ion source and then through the sampling orifice into the quadrupole and gas cell assembly. A separate exhaust for the ion source gas (nitrogen) must be provided to the atmosphere external to the laboratory clear from any air intakes for air conditioning systems. A (6mm OD) hose connection is required. If the length of exhaust exceeds 3 m then the internal diameter of the pipe should be increased to 12 mm (1/2 inch) for the excess distance. B.7 Performance Specifications Time of Flight Mass Resolution, Positive Ion 5000 (FWHM) on (M+H)+ ion from Leucine Enkephalin. Time of Flight Mass Resolution, Negative Ion 5000 (FWHM) on (M-H)- ion from Raffinose. Full Scan MS Sensitivity, Positive Ion The signal height obtained from a sample consumption of 200 fmol of horse heart Myoglobin (16952 Da) will be greater than 166 ion counts on the most intense peak in the charge state envelope. A solution of 200 fmol/µL horse heart Myoglobin (in 50/50 acetonitrile/water + 0.2% formic acid) will be introduced at a flow rate of 5 µL/min. 200 Instrument Specifications B Full Scan MS Sensitivity, Negative Ion The signal height obtained from the sample consumption of 1 ng of raffinose will be greater than 200 counts on the (M-H)- peak at m/z 503. This will correspond to a signal to noise ratio of greater than 200:1 (after a 1×3 smooth). The instrument will be tuned at 5000 resolution (as demonstrated in specification 2a) and a solution of 5 ng/L in 50/50 acetonitrile/water (no additives) will be introduced at 10 µL/min. Full Scan MS/MS Sensitivity, Positive Ion The signal height obtained from a consumption of 20 fmol of [Glu1 ] -Fibrinopeptide B (1569 Da) will be greater than 6 counts on the most intense yî sequence ion from the MS/MS spectrum of the doubly charged precursor ion. This will correspond to a signal to noise ratio of greater than 30:1 (after a 3×9 smooth) on the most intense yî sequence ion. A solution of 100 fmol/µL will be introduced at a flow rate of 5 µl/min. Mass Measurement Accuracy (with internal reference) The RMS error between the measured and the accepted masses of peaks which have sufficient intensity and are free from interference from other masses, over the range from 150-900 Daltons, will be less than 5 ppm. One suitable peak of known mass will be used as an internal reference. The instrument will be tuned at 5000 resolution as demonstrated in specification 1a. B.7.1 Electrospray Option – Nanoflow Full Scan MS/MS Sensitivity, Positive Ion The signal to noise from a consumption of 2 fmol of [Glu1 ]-Fibrinopeptide B (1569 Da) will be greater than 30:1 (after a 3×9 smooth) on the most intense yî sequence ion from the MS/MS spectrum of the doubly charged precursor ion. A solution of 500 fmol/L concentration in MeOH/H2O + 0.2% formic acid solution and with glass micropipettes with 1 or 2 µm tips will be used. The integration period per spectrum will be about 5 sec and data will be summed over a period appropriate for the required consumption of sample. Instrument Specifications 201 B B.7.2 Electrospray Option – Transform Software (Software for the determination of molecular weight from a spectrum containing a series of multiply charged ions on a m/z scale by a transform of the data to a true mass scale.) Mass Measurement Accuracy (no internal reference) The mean measured mass of transformed data shall be 15867.2 +0.5 Da and the standard deviation (σ) of the mean <0.5 Da. The transform data will be created from five repeat analyses of the globin from normal human haemoglobin. Mass calibration to be performed using the multiply charged α globin peaks from a separate analysis. The raw data should be transformed over the range 15,000 – 16,000 Da and smoothed appropriately. The instrument will be tuned at 5000 resolution. It is recommended that a solution containing 10 pmol/µL of each globin in 50/50 acetonitrile/water + 0.2% formic acid is used. 202 Instrument Specifications Index 203 I N D E X A Accept Calibration 105 Accurate Mass 93 Acquisition Status Window 114 Add Task 34 Ammonium Acetate 192 Analog Channels 120 Analyzer Maintenance 176 APcI 67 Obtaining an Ion Beam 69 APcI Probe Maintenance 172 Argon 198 Atmospheric Pressure Chemical Ionization see APcI 67 Automatic Startup / Shutdown 28 B Borosilicate Capillary 55 C Caesium Iodide 190, 191 Calibration 93, 102, 113 Calibration Parameters 104 Calibration Solutions 192 Calibration Window 102 Camera System Nanoflow 60 Capillary 82 Capillary Voltage ElectroSpray 48 Centroid 123 Charge State 129, 146 Charge State Recognition 154 Checking the ESI Probe 44 Checking the Probe APcI 68 Checking the Resolution 90 Chromatogram Real-Time Update 115 Chromatographic Interfacing 52 Cleaning Materials 184 Cleaning Sample Cone 160 Collision Energy Parent 152 Survey 135 Collision Energy Profile 153 Collision Gases 198 Combine 91 Components 10 Electrical 10 Mechanical 10 Cone Gas ElectroSpray 48 Configure Contact Closures 31 Configure Shutdown on Error 30 Continuum 123 Conventions, documentation 3 Copy Function 118 D Daily Maintenance 185 Data Acquisition 111 Data File Name 112 Data System 18 Deadtime Correction 106 Delete Task 34 Index 204 Index I N D E X Desolvation Gas APcI 72 ElectroSpray 47 Detected Precursor Inclusion 146 Dialogs Accept Calibration 105 Analog Data 120 Calibration Parameters 105 Display Calibration Graphs 103 Gas Threshold 33 MCP Conditioning 23 Scan Report 114 Shutdown on Error Configuration 31 Solvent Delay 119 TDC Settings 88 TOFMS Scan 122 Tune Page Acquisition 91, 112 Dimensions 195 Documentation conventions 3 related 1 E Electrical Components 10 Electronics 17 Electronics Maintenance 156 Electrospray 39 ElectroSpray Operation 43 Electrospray Probe Maintenance 170 Electrospray Tip 45 Environment 195 Error Shutdown 30 ESI interface 39 ESI Source 43 Event Out 17 Exclude Masses Parent 151 Survey 137 Exhaust Outlets 199 Experiment Setup Editor 115, 116 Toolbar 116 Experimental Record 78 Extraction Cone Voltage 49 F Fault Finding 155, 179 Four-Monthly Maintenance 185 Front Panel Connections 14 Front Panel Controls 15 Function List 116 G Gas Ballasting 158 Gas Thresholds 32 Gases and Regulators 198 Glass Capillary Option 61 H Horse Heart Myoglobin 189, 191 I Include Masses Parent 149 Survey 133 Infusion Pump 40 Injection Valve 40 Insert Task 34 Installing Nanoflow 57 Instrument Specifications 195 Instrument Warm-up 24 Index 205 I INDEX Intensity Threshold 104 Internal Layout 9 Ion Optical System 76 Ion Optics 8 Ionisation Techniques APci 6 Ionization Techniques Electrospray 6 Nanoflow Electrospray 7 L LC column 39 LC-MS Sensitivity 53 Lock Mass 89 LockMass Correction 106 Log Parameters 37 Lteff 89, 94 M Maintenace Electrospray Probe 170 Source 159 Maintenance 155 Analyzer 176 APcI Probe 172 Manual Pusher 87 MCP 87 MCP Conditioning 23 Mechanical Components 10 Megaflow 43 Microscope Nanoflow 60 Mobile phase 39 Modify Function 117 Modify Task 34 Monthly Maintenance 185 MS to MSMS Parent 145 MS to MSMS Switch Criteria 129, 145 MSMS Template Parent 144 Survey 132 MSMS to MS 131 Parent 148 Survey 131 Multi Channel Analysis (MCA). 123 Multiple Sample Acquisition 114 Myoglobin 189, 191 N NanoFlow Electrospray 55 Nanoflow Interface 55 Nano-LC 55 Nano-LC Assembly 64 Nano-LC Option 63 Nanovial Tip Position 61 Nebuliser Gas ElectroSpray 47 Negative Ion 190 Neutral Loss Parent 143 New Function 117 Nitrogen 198 Nitrogen Gas In 16 Nitrogen Outlet 199 Nitrogen Supply 28 Nominal Mass Accuracy 94 NP Multiplier 88 O Obtaining an Ion Beam 89 APcI 69 ElectroSpray 45 206 Index I N D E X Oil Mist Filter 159 Operation ElectroSpray 43 Nanoflow 65 Origin 113 Outlets 199 P Parent Collision Energy 152 Exclude Masses 151 Include Masses 149 MS to MSMS 145 MSMS Template 144 MSMS to MS 148 Neutral Loss 143 Product Ions 142 Parent Ion Discovery 139 Parent Survey Window 140 Peak Display Tune Page 79 Performance Specifications 199 Pirani Gauge 157 Polyethylene Glycol 189 Polyethylene glycol 189 Positive Ion 188 Post-column Splitting 41 Power Failure 27 Power Requirements 197 Precursor Selection 146 Preparation APcI Operation 26 Electrospray Operation 25 For Startup 21 Preparation of Calibration Solutions 192 Preventive Maintenance 184 Probe Position ElectroSpray 46 Product Ions Parent 142 Purge Gas ElectroSpray 48 Q Quadrupole Tuning Page 83 R Rear Panel Connections 16 Reciprocating Pump 40 Reference compound 187 Related documentation 1 Remove Function 118 Resolution 90 Restore Function List 120 Room Location 195 Rotary Pump 13, 17 Rotary pump 13 rotary pump 13 Rotary Pump Oil 159 Rotary Pump Outlet 199 Routine Procedures 21 Rubidium Iodide 190 S Sample Cone 82 Sample Cone Voltage 49 Shutdown Editor 28 Toolbar 29 Shutdown Log 36 Shutdown Page 29 Sodium Iodide 190, 193 Sodium iodide 191 Solvent Delay 119 Source Index 207 I I N D E X Maintenance 159 Source Temp 82 Source temperature 48 Source Tuning Page 81 Spectrum Real-Time Update 115 Standard Tune Parameters 90 Start Up After Complete Shutdown 21 After Overnight Shutdown 24 Starting an Acquisition Multiple Samples 114 Tune Page 111 Status Display 15 Sugar mixture 191 Sugars 191 Supply Inlet 17 Survey Collision Energy 135 Exclude Masses 137 Include Masses 133 MS to MSMS 128 MSMS Template 132 MSMS to MS 131 Switch Criteria Parent 142 Syringe Pump 40 System Manager 115 T TDC Settings 88 The Auto Control Tasks Page 33 The Source 159 Time Of Flight Page 85 TOFMS Scan 122 Transient Pressure Trip 27 Tune Page 77 Tune Page Acquisition 111 Tuning 75 Tuning and Optimization ElectroSpray 46 Turbomolecular pumps 12 V Vacuum Leaks 156 Vacuum Protection 13 Vacuum System 12 Veff 89 W Water 16 Water Supplies 196 Weekly Maintenance 185 208 Index I N D E X

Posted on Leave a comment

AGILENT GC MASS

Agilent 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Notices © Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2019 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as governed by United States and international copyright laws. Manual Part Number G7077-90035 Edition First edition, January 2019 Printed in USA Agilent Technologies, Inc. 5301 Stevens Creek Boulevard Santa Clara, CA 95051 Warranty The material contained in this document is provided “as is,” and is subject to being changed, without notice, in future editions. Further, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, with regard to this manual and any information contained herein, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, use, or performance of this document or of any information contained herein. Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement shall control. Safety Notices CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. WARNING A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury or death. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met. 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 3 Contents 1 Introduction 5977B Series MSD Version 10 Abbreviations Used 11 The 5977B Series MSD 13 MSD Hardware Description 16 Electron ionization (EI) systems 17 Chemical ionization (CI) systems 17 Changing modes 18 Important Safety Warnings 19 Electrostatic discharge is a threat to MSD electronics 20 Hydrogen Safety 22 Precautions 25 Safety and Regulatory Certifications 27 Intended Use 31 Cleaning/Recycling the Product 31 Accidental Liquid Spillage 31 Moving or Storing the MSD 31 2 General Troubleshooting Instrument State 34 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 35 General Symptoms 36 Chromatographic Symptoms 38 Mass Spectral Symptoms 43 Pressure Symptoms 47 Temperature Symptoms 50 4 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Error Messages 52 Air Leaks 58 Contamination 59 3 CI Troubleshooting Common CI-Specific Problems 62 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 63 Air Leaks 64 Pressure-Related Symptoms 68 Signal-Related Symptoms 71 Tuning-Related Symptoms 78 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 83 Maintaining the Vacuum System 88 To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC 89 To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC 91 To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC 93 To Reconnect the MSD to the 9000 GC 94 To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to an 8890 or 7890 GC 96 To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to a 9000 GC 98 To Check the Foreline Pump Oil 100 To Drain the Foreline Pump 102 To Refill the Foreline Pump 103 To Change the Oil Mist Filter on the Foreline Pump 104 To Install the Exhaust Filter on the IDP3 Dry Pump 106 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5 To Change the Filter Cartridge on the IDP3 Dry Foreline Pump 108 To Check the DP Fluid 109 To Remove the DP 111 To Replace the DP Fluid 113 To Install the DP 115 To Remove the Foreline Gauge 117 To Install the Foreline Gauge 119 To Refill the EI Calibration Vial 120 To Purge the Calibration Valves 122 To Remove the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 123 To Install the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 124 To Replace the Fan for the High Vacuum Pump 125 To Remove the Ion Vacuum Gauge 127 To Install an Ion Vacuum Gauge 127 To Lubricate the Side Plate O-Ring 128 To Lubricate the Vent Valve O-Ring 130 Maintaining the Electronics 132 To Adjust the Quad Frequency 134 To Replace the Primary Fuses 136 5 CI Maintenance To Replace the Methane/Isobutane Gas Purifier 140 To Clean the Reagent Gas Supply Lines 141 To Refill the CI Calibration Vial 142 6 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 6 Vacuum System Overview 146 Vacuum System Components 147 Common Vacuum System Problems 148 Foreline Pump 149 High Vacuum Pump 152 Diffusion pump system 152 Turbo pump system 152 Analyzer Chamber 153 Diffusion pump version 153 Turbo pump version 153 Side Plate 154 Vacuum Seals 157 Foreline Gauge 159 Diffusion Pump and Fan 160 Turbo Pump and Fan 166 Calibration Valves and Vent Valve 167 Micro-Ion Vacuum Gauge 170 7 Analyzer Overview 172 EI Ion Source 175 HES EI Ion Source 182 CI Ion Source 185 Filaments 188 Other Source Elements 190 Quadrupole Mass Filter 192 Detector 195 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 7 Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 197 8 Electronics GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED 202 Side Board 204 Electronics Module 205 LAN/MS Control Card 209 Power Supplies 210 Back Panel and Connectors 211 Interfacing to External Devices 214 9 Parts To Order Parts 218 Electronics 219 Vacuum System 219 Analyzer 226 Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 236 8 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 9 1 Introduction 5977B Series MSD Version 10 Abbreviations Used 11 The 5977B Series MSD 13 Physical description 15 Front Panel LED 15 Vacuum gauge 15 MSD Hardware Description 16 Important Safety Warnings 19 Many internal parts of the MSD carry dangerous voltages 19 Electrostatic discharge is a threat to MSD electronics 20 Many parts are dangerously hot 20 The oil pan under the standard foreline pump can be a fire hazard 21 Hydrogen Safety 22 Dangers unique to GC/MSD operation 22 Hydrogen accumulation in an MSD 23 Precautions 25 Safety and Regulatory Certifications 27 Information 28 Symbols 28 Sound emission declaration 30 The best way to keep your MSD functioning properly is to keep it pumped down and hot, with carrier gas flow. If you plan to move or store your MSD, a few additional precautions are required. The MSD must remain upright at all times; this requires special caution when moving. The MSD should not be left vented to the atmosphere for long periods. 31 This manual describes the troubleshooting and maintenance of the Agilent Technologies 5977B Series Mass Selective Detector (MSD). It assumes familiarity with the procedures and information detailed in the 5977B Series MSD or 5975/77 Series for OpenLAB CDS Operation Manual, and with the accompanying software. 1 Introduction 5977B Series MSD Version 10 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Version The 5977B Series MSDs are equipped with a turbomolecular (turbo) pump and a choice of three foreline pumps (Pfeiffer Duo, Pfeiffer MVP-070-3x, Agilent IDP-3 24V) or a diffusion (diff) pump paired with a Pfeiffer Duo foreline pump. There are three types of electron ionization (EI) sources available on the 5977B Series MSD, a standard EI stainless steel (SS) source, an EI Extractor (XTR) source available on the Inert+ MSD model, and a high efficiency source (HES). A CI ion source includes a reagent flow control system, a CI calibration system, and other required hardware features. The serial number label displays a product number (Table 1) that indicates what type of MSD you have. Table 1 Available high vacuum pumps Model name Product number Description Ionization mode/Type 5977B MSD Diff Pump G7080B Diffusion pump Electron ionization (EI)/Stainless Steel 5977B MSD Turbo Pump G7081B Turbo pump Electron ionization (EI)/Stainless Steel 5977B Inert+ EI MSD Turbo G7077B Turbo pump MSD Electron ionization (EI)/Extractor 5977B Inert+ EI/CI MSD Turbo G7078B Turbo pump MSD Electron ionization (EI) /Extractor Chemical ionization /PCI, NCI 5977B HES MSD G7079B Turbo pump MSD Electron ionization (EI)/High Efficiency 1 Introduction Abbreviations Used 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 11 Abbreviations Used The abbreviations in Table 2 are used in discussing this product. They are collected here for convenience. Table 2 Abbreviations Abbreviation Definition AC Alternating current ALS Automatic liquid sampler BFB Bromofluorobenzene (calibrant) CI Chemical ionization DA Data analysis DC Direct current DFTPP Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (calibrant) Diff Diffusion (pump) DIP Direct insertion probe DP Diffusion pump DS Data system EI Electron impact ionization EM Electron multiplier (detector) EMV Electron multiplier voltage EPC Electronic pneumatic control eV Electron volt FW Firmware GC Gas chromatograph HED High-energy dynode (refers to detector and its power supply) HES High efficiency source id Inside diameter Inert+ Extractor source LAN Local Area Network 1 Introduction Abbreviations Used 12 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual LCP Local control panel (on the GC) LVDS Low voltage data signal m/z Mass-to-charge ratio MFC Mass flow controller MSD Mass selective detector NCI Negative CI OFN Octafluoronaphthalene (calibrant) PCI Positive CI PFDTD Perfluoro-5,8-dimethyl-3,6,9-trioxydodecane (calibrant) PFHT 2,4,6-tris(perfluoroheptyl)-1,3,5-triazine (calibrant) PFTBA Perfluorotributylamine (calibrant) Quad Quadrupole mass filter RF Radio frequency RFPA Radio frequency power amplifier SS Stainless steel Torr Unit of pressure, 1 mm Hg Turbo Turbomolecular (pump) WUI Web user interface XTR EI Extractor source Table 2 Abbreviations (continued) Abbreviation Definition 1 Introduction The 5977B Series MSD 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 13 The 5977B Series MSD The 5977B Series MSD is a stand-alone capillary GC detector. The MSD features (See Table 3 on page 14.): • GC compatibility includes Agilent 8890, 9000, and 7890 GCs • WEB User Interface (WUI) for locally monitoring and operating the MSD • A turbo vacuum pump with one of three different foreline pumps (Pfeiffer Duo, Pfeiffer MVP-070-3x, Agilent IDP-3 24V) or a diffusion vacuum pump with a Pfeiffer Duo foreline pump • A high efficiency ion source (HES) • Three different non-HES types of independently heated MSD electron ionization (EI) sources available: standard source in both stainless steel and inert material, and an extractor source. • Field upgradeable to chemical ionization (PCI/NCI) modes that add a chemical ionization (CI) source, reagent gas flow controller and plumbing, and CI tuning calibration • An optional JetClean system for cleaning the ion source in place under vacuum • Independently MSD-heated hyperbolic quadrupole mass filter • High-energy dynode (HED) electron multiplier detector • Independently GC-heated GC/MSD interface • Direct insertion probe (DIP) capability (3rd party) 1 Introduction The 5977B Series MSD 14 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Vacuum capability Table 3 5977B HES Series MSD features Feature High vacuum pump Diffusion Turbo Optimal He column flow mL/min 1 1 to 2 Maximum recommended gas flow mL/min* * Total gas flow into the MSD: column flow plus reagent gas flow (if applicable). Based on helium gas use. For other gases the maximum flow will vary. 1.5 4 Maximum gas flow, mL/min† † Expect degradation of spectral performance and sensitivity. 2 6.5 Max column id 0.25 mm (30 m) 0.53 mm (30 m) CI capability‡ ‡ Turbo pump models are field upgradeable to CI. No Yes Inert ion sources available Yes Yes GC compatibility 9000/8890/ 8860/7890 Series 9000/8890/ 8860/7890 Series Foreline pumps available Pfeiffer Duo Pfeiffer Duo, Pfeiffer MVP-070-3x, Agilent IDP-3 24V DIP** capability (3rd party) ** Direct insertion probe. Yes Yes 1 Introduction The 5977B Series MSD 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 15 Physical description The 5977B HES Series MSD housing is approximately 41 cm high, 30 cm wide, and 54 cm deep. The weight is 39 kg for the diffusion pump models, and 46 kg for the EI/CI turbo pump mainframe. The weight is 41 kg for the EI turbo pump mainframe. The standard foreline (roughing) pump weighs an additional 11 kg (standard pump), and the dry foreline pump weighs 16 kg. The foreline pump is usually located on the floor behind the MSD. The basic components of the instrument are the: • Frame/cover assemblies • Vacuum system • GC/MSD interface • Electronics • Analyzer Front Panel LED The front panel LED allows the operator to monitor the MSD. The LED displays the instrument status with color codes and patterns described in “GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED” on page 202. Vacuum gauge The MSD may be equipped with an ion vacuum gauge. The Data Acquisition software can be used to read the pressure (high vacuum) in the vacuum manifold. The gauge is required for chemical ionization (CI) operation. 1 Introduction MSD Hardware Description 16 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual MSD Hardware Description Figure 1 is an overview of a typical GC/MSD system. Figure 1. Agilent 5977B Series GC/MSD system shown with 8890 GC ALS Touchscreen 8890 GC 5977B Series MSD MSD power switch GC power switch System status LED 1 Introduction Electron ionization (EI) systems 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 17 Electron ionization (EI) systems EI systems ionize sample molecules by bombarding them with electrons. The ions, including fragments, are drawn into the quadrupole analyzer where they are separated by their mass-to-charge (m/z) ratios and detected. There are three types of electron ionization sources available: the standard EI ion source, which is available in stainless steel or inert material, the extractor EI ion source (XTR) and the high efficiency ion source (HES). Chemical ionization (CI) systems CI systems use a reagent gas as an intermediate between the electrons and the sample. CI is more gentle than direct electron bombardment. The CI hardware allows the 5977B Series MSD to produce high-quality, classical CI spectra, which include molecular adduct ions. A variety of reagent gases can be used. In this manual, the term CI MSD refers to the upgraded G7077B, the upgraded G7078B, or the upgraded G7079B MSD. It also applies, unless otherwise specified, to the flow modules for these instruments. The 5977B Series GC/MSD CI system adds the following to the 5977B Series MSD: • An EI/CI GC/MSD interface • A reagent gas flow control module • A bipolar HED power supply for PCI and NCI operation A required methane/isobutane gas purifier is provided. It removes oxygen, water, hydrocarbons, and sulfur compounds. A high vacuum gauge controller (G3397B) required for CI MSD is also recommended for EI. The MSD CI system has been optimized to achieve the relatively high source pressure required for CI, while still maintaining a high vacuum in the quadrupole and detector. Special seals along the flow path of the reagent gas and very small openings in the ion source keep the source gases in the ionization volume long enough for the appropriate reactions to occur. The CI interface has special plumbing for reagent gas. 1 Introduction Changing modes 18 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Changing modes Switching back and forth between CI and EI ion sources takes less than an hour, although a 1- to 2-hour wait is required to purge the reagent gas lines and bake out water and other contaminants. Switching from PCI to NCI requires about 2 hours for the ion source to cool. 1 Introduction Important Safety Warnings 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 19 Important Safety Warnings There are several important safety notices to keep in mind when using the MSD. Many internal parts of the MSD carry dangerous voltages If the MSD is connected to a power source, even if the power switch is off, potentially dangerous voltages exist on: • The wiring between the MSD power cord and the AC power supply, the AC power supply itself, and the wiring from the AC power supply to the power switch. With the power switch on, potentially dangerous voltages also exist on: • All electronics boards in the instrument • The internal wires and cables connected to these boards • The wires for any heater (oven, detector, inlet, or valve box) If one of the primary fuses has failed, the MSD will already be off, but for safety, switch off the MSD and unplug the power cord. It is not necessary to allow air into the analyzer chamber. WARNING All these parts are shielded by covers. With the covers in place, it should be difficult to accidentally make contact with dangerous voltages. Unless specifically instructed to, never remove a cover unless the detector, inlet, or oven are turned off. WARNING If the power cord insulation is frayed or worn, the cord must be replaced. Contact your Agilent service representative. WARNING Never replace the primary fuses while the MSD is connected to a power source. 1 Introduction Electrostatic discharge is a threat to MSD electronics 20 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Electrostatic discharge is a threat to MSD electronics The printed circuit boards in the MSD can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Do not touch any of the boards unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must handle them, wear a grounded wrist strap and take other antistatic precautions. Wear a grounded wrist strap any time you remove the MSD right side cover. Many parts are dangerously hot Many parts of the GC/MSD operate at temperatures high enough to cause serious burns. These parts include, but are not limited to the: • GC inlets • GC oven and its contents, including the column nuts attaching the column to a GC inlet, GC/MSD interface, or GC detector • GC detector • GC valve box • Foreline pump • Diffusion pump • Heated MSD ion source GC/MSD, interface, and quadrupole Always cool these areas of the system to room temperature before working on them. They will cool faster if you first set the temperature of the heated zone to room temperature. Turn the zone off after it has reached the setpoint. If you must perform maintenance on hot parts, use a wrench and wear gloves. Whenever possible, cool the part of the instrument that you will be maintaining before you begin working on it. WARNING Be careful when working behind the instrument. During cooldown cycles, the GC emits hot exhaust which can cause burns. WARNING The insulation around the inlets, detectors, valve box, and the insulation cups is made of refractory ceramic fibers. To avoid inhaling fiber particles, we recommend the following safety procedures: ventilate your work area; wear long sleeves, gloves, safety glasses, and a disposable dust/mist respirator; dispose of insulation in a sealed plastic bag; wash your hands with mild soap and cold water after handling the insulation. 1 Introduction Electrostatic discharge is a threat to MSD electronics 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 21 The oil pan under the standard foreline pump can be a fire hazard Oily rags, paper towels, and similar absorbents in the oil pan could ignite and damage the pump and other parts of the MSD. WARNING Combustible materials (or flammable/nonflammable wicking material) placed under, over, or around the foreline (roughing) pump constitutes a fire hazard. Keep the pan clean, but do not leave absorbent material such as paper towels in it. 1 Introduction Hydrogen Safety 22 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Hydrogen Safety Hydrogen is a commonly used GC carrier gas, detector fuel gas, and reactive cleaning gas for the optional JetClean system. Hydrogen is potentially explosive and has other dangerous characteristics. • Hydrogen is combustible over a wide range of concentrations. At atmospheric pressure, hydrogen is combustible at concentrations from 4% to 74.2% by volume. • Hydrogen has the highest burning velocity of any gas. • Hydrogen has a very low ignition energy. • Hydrogen that is allowed to expand rapidly from high pressure can self-ignite. • Hydrogen burns with a nonluminous flame which can be invisible under bright light. Additional information can be found in the Hydrogen Safety Guide which is included on this Agilent 5977B HES Series MSD User Information media. Dangers unique to GC/MSD operation Hydrogen presents a number of dangers. Some are general, others are unique to GC or GC/MSD operation. Dangers include, but are not limited to: • Combustion of leaking hydrogen WARNING The use of hydrogen as a GC carrier gas, detector fuel gas, or in the optional JetClean system, is potentially dangerous. WARNING When using hydrogen (H2) as the carrier gas or fuel gas, be aware that hydrogen can flow into the GC oven and create an explosion hazard. Therefore, ensure that the supply is turned off until all connections are made, and that the inlet and detector column fittings are either connected to a column or capped at all times when hydrogen is supplied to the instrument. Hydrogen is flammable. Leaks, when confined in an enclosed space, may create a fire or explosion hazard. In any application using hydrogen, leak test all connections, lines, and valves before operating the instrument. Always turn off the hydrogen supply at its source before working on the instrument. 1 Introduction Hydrogen Safety 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 23 • Combustion due to rapid expansion of hydrogen from a high-pressure cylinder • Accumulation of hydrogen in the GC oven and subsequent combustion (see your GC documentation and the label on the top edge of the GC oven door) • Accumulation of hydrogen in the MSD and subsequent combustion Hydrogen accumulation in an MSD All users should be aware of the mechanisms by which hydrogen can accumulate (Table 4) and know what precautions to take if they know or suspect that hydrogen has accumulated. Note that these mechanisms apply to all mass spectrometers, including the MSD. WARNING The MSD cannot detect leaks in inlet or detector gas streams. For this reason, it is vital that column fittings should always be either connected to a column, or have a cap or plug installed. WARNING The MS cannot detect leaks in the valves for the optional JetClean system. It is possible that hydrogen can leak into the MS from this cleaning system. Always turn off the JetClean system, close the manual hydrogen shutoff valve to the JetClean MFC, and ensure good vacuum before venting the MS. Table 4 Hydrogen accumulation mechanisms Mechanism Results Mass spectrometer turned off A mass spectrometer can be shut down deliberately. It can also be shut down accidentally by an internal or external failure. There is a safety feature that will shutdown the flow of carrier gas in the event of an MSD foreline pump shutdown. However, if this feature fails, hydrogen may slowly accumulate in the mass spectrometer. Mass Spectrometer automated shutoff valves closed The mass spectrometers are equipped with automated shutoff valves for the calibration vial, optional JetClean system, and the reagent gases. Deliberate operator action or various failures can cause the shutoff valves to close. Shutoff valve closure does not shut off the flow of carrier gas. As a result, hydrogen may slowly accumulate in the MS. 1 Introduction Hydrogen Safety 24 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Mass spectrometer automated shutoff valves closed Some mass spectrometers are equipped with automated diffusion pump shutoff valves. In these instruments, deliberate operator action or various failures can cause the shutoff valves to close. Closing the shutoff valves does not shut off the flow of carrier gas. As a result, hydrogen may slowly accumulate in the mass spectrometer. Mass spectrometer manual shutoff valves closed Some mass spectrometers are equipped with manual diffusion pump shutoff valves. In these instruments, the operator can close the shutoff valves. Closing the shutoff valves does not shut off the flow of carrier gas. As a result, hydrogen may slowly accumulate in the mass spectrometer. GC off A GC can be shut down deliberately. It can also be shut down accidentally by an internal or external failure. Different GCs react in different ways. If an 8890 or 7890 GC equipped with Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) is shut off, the EPC stops the flow of carrier gas. If the carrier flow is not under EPC control, the flow increases to its maximum. This flow may be more than some mass spectrometers can pump away, resulting in the accumulation of hydrogen in the mass spectrometer. If the mass spectrometer is shut off at the same time, the accumulation can be fairly rapid. Power failure If the power fails, both the GC and mass spectrometer shut down. The carrier gas, however, is not necessarily shut down. As described previously, in some GCs a power failure may cause the carrier gas flow to be set to maximum. As a result, hydrogen may accumulate in the mass spectrometer. Table 4 Hydrogen accumulation mechanisms (continued) Mechanism Results WARNING Once hydrogen has accumulated in a mass spectrometer, extreme caution must be used when removing it. Incorrect startup of a mass spectrometer filled with hydrogen can cause an explosion. WARNING After a power failure, the mass spectrometer may start up and begin the pumpdown process by itself. This does not guarantee that all hydrogen has been removed from the system, or that the explosion hazard has been removed. 1 Introduction Precautions 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 25 Precautions Take the following precautions when operating a GC/MSD system or GC/MS system with hydrogen carrier gas or when operating the MSD with the JetClean option that supplies hydrogen to the MSD from an MFC located on the MS. General laboratory precautions • Avoid leaks in the carrier gas lines. Use leak-checking equipment to periodically check for hydrogen leaks. • Eliminate from your laboratory as many ignition sources as possible (open flames, devices that can spark, sources of static electricity, etc.). • Do not allow hydrogen from a high pressure cylinder to vent directly to atmosphere (danger of self-ignition). • Use a hydrogen generator instead of bottled hydrogen. Operating precautions • Turn off the hydrogen at its source every time you shut down the GC or MSD. • Turn off the hydrogen at its source every time you vent the MSD (do not heat the capillary column without carrier gas flow). • Turn off the hydrogen at its source every time shutoff valves in an MSD are closed (do not heat the capillary column without carrier gas flow). • Turn off the hydrogen at its source if a power failure occurs. • If a power failure occurs while the GC/MSD system is unattended, even if the system has restarted by itself: 1 Immediately turn off the hydrogen at its source. 2 Turn off the GC. 3 Turn off the MSD, and allow it to cool for 1 hour. WARNING You MUST ensure the front side-plate thumbscrew is fastened finger-tight. Do not overtighten the thumbscrew; it can cause air leaks. WARNING You must remove the analyzer window cover on the front of a 5977B Series MSD. In the unlikely event of an explosion, this cover may dislodge. WARNING Failure to secure your MSD as described above greatly increases the chance of personal injury in the event of an explosion. 1 Introduction Precautions 26 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 4 Eliminate all potential sources of ignition in the room. 5 Open the vacuum manifold of the MSD to atmosphere. 6 Wait at least 10 minutes to allow any hydrogen to dissipate. 7 Start up the GC and MSD as normal. When using hydrogen, check the system for leaks to prevent possible fire and explosion hazards based on local Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) requirements. Always check for leaks after changing a tank or servicing the gas lines. Always make sure the vent line is vented into a fume hood. 1 Introduction Safety and Regulatory Certifications 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 27 Safety and Regulatory Certifications The 5977B HES Series MSD conforms to the following safety standards: • Canadian Standards Association (CSA): CAN/CSA-C222 No. 61010-1-04 • CSA/Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL): UL 61010–1 • International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 61010–1 • EuroNorm (EN): 61010–1 The 5977B HES Series MSD conforms to the following regulations on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI): • CISPR 11/EN 55011: Group 1, Class A • IEC/EN 61326 • AUS/NZ This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB—001 du Canada. EMC declaration for South Korea This equipment has been evaluated for its suitability for use in a commercial environment. When used in a domestic environment, there is a risk of radio interference. 사용자안내문 이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서 가정용 환 경에서 사용하는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다 . ※ 사용자 안내문은 ” 업무용 방송통신기자재 ” 에만 적용한다 . The 5977B Series MSD is designed and manufactured under a quality system registered to ISO 9001. The 5977B HES Series MSD is RoHS compliant. 1 Introduction Safety and Regulatory Certifications 28 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Information The 5977B Series MSD meets the following IEC (International Electro-technical Commission) classifications: Equipment Class I, Laboratory Equipment, Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2. This unit has been designed and tested in accordance with recognized safety standards, and is designed for use indoors. If the instrument is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired. Whenever the safety protection of the MSD has been compromised, disconnect the unit from all power sources, and secure the unit against unintended operation. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. Substituting parts or performing any unauthorized modification to the instrument may result in a safety hazard. Symbols Warnings in the manual or on the instrument must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions violates safety standards of design and the intended use of the instrument. Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements. See accompanying instructions for more information. Indicates a hot surface. Indicates hazardous voltages. Indicates earth (ground) terminal. Indicates potential explosion hazard. Indicates radioactivity hazard. or 1 Introduction Safety and Regulatory Certifications 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 29 Indicates electrostatic discharge hazard. Indicates that you must not discard this electrical/electronic product in domestic household waste. 1 Introduction Safety and Regulatory Certifications 30 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Electromagnetic compatibility This device complies with the requirements of CISPR 11. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try one or more of the following measures: • Relocate the radio or antenna. • Move the device away from the radio or television. • Plug the device into a different electrical outlet, so that the device and the radio or television are on separate electrical circuits. • Make sure that all peripheral devices are also certified. • Make sure that appropriate cables are used to connect the device to peripheral equipment. • Consult your equipment dealer, Agilent Technologies, or an experienced technician for assistance. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Agilent Technologies could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Sound emission declaration Sound pressure Sound pressure Lp <70 dB according to EN 27779:1991. Schalldruckpegel Schalldruckpegel Lp <70 dB am nach EN 27779:1991. 1 Introduction Intended Use 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 31 Intended Use Agilent products must be used only in the manner described in the Agilent product user guides. Any other use may result in damage to the product or personal injury. Agilent is not responsible for any damages caused, in whole or in part, by improper use of the products, unauthorized alterations, adjustments, or modifications to the products, failure to comply with procedures in Agilent product user guides, or use of the products in violation of applicable laws, rules, or regulations. Cleaning/Recycling the Product To clean the unit, disconnect the power and wipe down with a damp, lint-free cloth. For recycling, contact your local Agilent sales office. Accidental Liquid Spillage Do not spill liquids on the MSD. If liquid is accidentally spilled on the MSD, first, cut the power. Once the MSD is disconnected from all power sources, dry all affected parts. If the liquid spillage affects the electronics, wait at least 24 hours, depending upon the ambient humidity. While waiting for the parts to dry, please call your local Agilent service representative. Moving or Storing the MSD The best way to keep your MSD functioning properly is to keep it pumped down and hot, with carrier gas flow. If you plan to move or store your MSD, a few additional precautions are required. The MSD must remain upright at all times; this requires special caution when moving. The MSD should not be left vented to the atmosphere for long periods. 1 Introduction Moving or Storing the MSD 32 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 33 2 General Troubleshooting Instrument State 34 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 35 General Symptoms 36 Chromatographic Symptoms 38 Mass Spectral Symptoms 43 Pressure Symptoms 47 Temperature Symptoms 50 Error Messages 52 Air Leaks 58 Contamination 59 This chapter discusses how to identify the symptoms and causes of the most common problems experienced by users with your MSD. See “CI Troubleshooting” on page 61 for help with CI-specific problems. For each symptom, one or more possible causes are listed. In general, the causes listed first are the most likely causes or the easiest to check and correct. This chapter does not include corrective actions for the possible causes listed. Some of the corrective actions required may be dangerous if performed incorrectly. Do not attempt any corrective actions unless you are sure of the correct procedure and the dangers involved. See the Troubleshooting section in the online help and the other chapters in this manual for more information If the material in this chapter and in the online help does not to help you diagnose your problem, contact your Agilent Technologies service representative. 2 General Troubleshooting Instrument State 34 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Instrument State Through the front panel LED, the operator can see the current status of the instrument through color codes. See Table 5 for a description of the MSD state. Table 5 Front panel Instrument Status LED codes Instrument status LED code Ready Solid green Acquiring data Blinking green (<2 sec) Not ready Solid yellow JetClean Acquire & Clean operation Blinking magenta JetClean Clean Only operation Solid magenta Not connected to DS Blinking yellow (<2 sec) Ready and not connected to DS Solid yellow for 3 sec, quick double blink Start up (prior to FW load) Blinking red (<2 sec) Fault Solid red 2 General Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 35 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks Rule 1: Look for what has been changed. Many problems are introduced accidentally by human actions. Every time any system is disturbed, there is a chance of introducing a new problem. • If the MSD was just pumped down after maintenance, suspect air leaks or incorrect assembly. • If carrier gas or helium gas purifier were just changed, suspect leaks or contaminated or incorrect gas. • If the GC column was just replaced, suspect air leaks or contaminated or bleeding column. Rule 2: If complex is not working, go back to simple. A complex task is not only more difficult to perform but also more difficult to troubleshoot. If you are having trouble detecting your sample, verify that autotune is successful. Rule 3: Divide and conquer. This technique is known as half-split troubleshooting. If you can isolate the problem to only part of the system, it is much easier to locate. • To determine whether an air leak is in the GC or the MSD, you can vent the MSD, remove the column, and install the blank interface ferrule. If the leak goes away, it was in the GC. 2 General Troubleshooting General Symptoms 36 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual General Symptoms This section describes symptoms you might observe when first turning on the GC/MSD system, and their possible causes. Any of these symptoms would prevent operation of the system. GC does not turn on Nothing happens when the GC is switched on. The GC fans do not turn on, and the GC control panel or touchscreen does not light. • Disconnected GC power cord • No voltage or incorrect voltage at the electrical outlet • Failed fuse in the GC • GC power supply is not working correctly MSD does not turn on Nothing happens when the MSD is switched on. The foreline pump does not start. The cooling fan for the high vacuum pump does not turn on. • Disconnected MSD power cord • No voltage or incorrect voltage at the electrical outlet • Failed primary fuses • MSD electronics are not working correctly Foreline pump is not operating The MSD is receiving power (the fan is operating), but the foreline pump is not operating. • Large air leak (usually the analyzer door open) has caused pumpdown failure. See “Pumpdown failure shutdown” on page 148. You must power cycle the MSD to recover from this state. • Disconnected foreline pump power cord • Malfunctioning foreline pump • Check power switch on foreline pump 2 General Troubleshooting General Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 37 MSD turns on, but then the foreline pump shuts off MSDs will shut down both the foreline pump and the high vacuum pump if the system fails to pump down correctly. This is usually because of a large air leak: either the sideplate has not sealed correctly, or the vent valve is still open. This feature helps prevent the foreline pump from sucking air through the system, which can damage the analyzer and pump. See “Pumpdown failure shutdown” on page 148. You must power cycle the MSD to recover from this state. 2 General Troubleshooting Chromatographic Symptoms 38 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Chromatographic Symptoms These are symptoms you may observe in the chromatograms generated by data acquisition. In general, these symptoms do not prevent you from operating your GC/MSD system. They indicate, however, that the data you are acquiring may not be the best data obtainable. These symptoms can be caused by instrument malfunctions, but are more likely caused by incorrect chromatographic technique. The following symptoms also apply to mass spectral data: • If sensitivity is low • If repeatability is poor No peaks If an analysis shows no chromatographic peaks, only a flat baseline or minor noise, run one of the automated tune programs. If the MSD passes tune, the problem is most likely related to the GC. If the MSD does not pass tune, the problem is most likely in the MSD. Passes tune • Incorrect sample concentration • No analytes present • Syringe missing from the ALS, or not installed correctly • Injection accidentally made in split mode instead of splitless mode • Empty or almost empty sample vial • Dirty GC inlet • Leaking GC inlet† • Loose column nut at the GC inlet† † This could cause a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. Does not pass tune • Calibration vial is empty • Excessive foreline or analyzer chamber pressure 2 General Troubleshooting Chromatographic Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 39 • Very dirty ion source • Calibration valve is not working correctly • Bad signal cable connection • Filament has failed, or is not connected correctly • Bad ion source wiring connection • Bad detector wiring connection • Failed electron multiplier horn Peaks are tailing • Active sites in the sample path • Injection is too large • Incorrect GC inlet temperature • Insufficient column flow • GC/MSD interface temperature is too low • Ion source temperature is too low Peaks are fronting • Column film thickness mismatched with analyte concentration (column overload) • Initial oven temperature is too low • Active sites in the sample path • Injection is too large • GC inlet pressure too high • Insufficient column flow Peaks have flat tops • Insufficient solvent delay • Incorrect scale on the display • Injection is too large • Electron multiplier voltage is too high • Gain is too high 2 General Troubleshooting Chromatographic Symptoms 40 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Peaks have split tops • Bad injection technique • Injection is too large Baseline is rising • Column bleed • Other contamination Baseline is high • Column bleed • Other contamination • Electron multiplier voltage is too high Baseline is falling A falling baseline indicates contamination is being swept away. Wait until the baseline reaches an acceptable level. Common causes include: • Residual water air and water from a recent venting • Column bleed • Septum bleed • Splitless injection time too long (inlet is not properly swept, resulting in excess solvent on the column and slow solvent decay) Baseline wanders • Insufficient carrier gas supply pressure† • Malfunctioning flow or pressure regulator† • Intermittent leak in the GC inlet† † These could cause a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. 2 General Troubleshooting Chromatographic Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 41 Retention times for all peaks drift – shorter • Column has been shortened • Initial oven temperature was increased • Column is getting old Retention times for all peaks drift – longer • Column flow has been reduced • Initial oven temperature was decreased • Active sites in the sample path • Leaks in the GC inlet† † This could cause a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. 2 General Troubleshooting Chromatographic Symptoms 42 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Poor sensitivity • Incorrect tuning • Tune file that does not match the type of analysis • Repeller voltage is too low • Incorrect temperatures (oven, GC/MSD interface, ion source, or mass filter) • Incorrect sample concentration • Leaking GC inlet† • Dirty GC inlet • Incorrect split ratio • Purge off time in splitless mode is too short • Excessive pressure in the MSD • Dirty ion source • Air leak • Poor filament operation • Detector (HED electron multiplier) is not working correctly • Incorrect mass filter polarity † This could cause a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. Poor repeatability • Dirty syringe needle • Dirty GC inlet • Leaking GC inlet† • Injection is too large • Loose column connections • Variations in pressure, column flow, and temperature • Dirty ion source • Loose connections in the analyzer • Ground loops † This could cause a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. 2 General Troubleshooting Mass Spectral Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 43 Mass Spectral Symptoms This section describes symptoms you might observe in mass spectra. Some of these symptoms will appear in the mass spectra of samples. Others you will observe only in a tune report. Some of these symptoms have causes that can be corrected by the operator. Others, however, require service by an Agilent Technologies service representative. The following symptoms listed under Chromatic symptoms also apply to mass spectra: • If sensitivity is low • If repeatability is poor No peaks • Ion source cables not connected • Bad connections to or from the detector • HED power supply output cable has failed • Other electronics failure • Incorrect tune file (inappropriate parameters) Isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect • Peaks are too wide or too narrow • Scan speed is too high (scan mode) • Dwell time is too short (SIM mode) • Electron multiplier voltage is too high • Repeller voltage is too high • High background • Dirty ion source 2 General Troubleshooting Mass Spectral Symptoms 44 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual High background • Pressure in the analyzer chamber is too high • Air leak • Contamination High abundances at m/z H2O [18], N2 [28], O2 [32], and CO2 [44] or at m/z 14 and 16 • System was recently vented (residual air and water) • Air leak, large peaks at m/z 14 and 16 are symptomatic of especially large leaks. Mass assignments are incorrect Small shape changes at the top of the mass peaks can cause 0.1 m/z shifts in mass assignments. Shifts greater than 0.2 m/z indicate a possible malfunction. • MSD has not had enough time to reach thermal equilibrium • Scan speed is too fast • Large variations in the temperature of the laboratory • MSD has not been tuned recently, or at the temperature at which it is operating • Incorrect tune file (inappropriate parameters) • No voltage to extractor lens (if using an extractor ion source) Peaks have precursors The tune report lists the size of the precursors for the tune masses. Small precursors are not unusual. If the precursors are unacceptably large for your application, one of the following may be responsible: • Repeller voltage is too high • Peaks are too wide • Incorrect DC polarity on the quadrupole mass filter • Dirty quadrupole mass filter 2 General Troubleshooting Mass Spectral Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 45 Peak widths are inconsistent • MSD has not had enough time to reach thermal equilibrium • Large variations in the temperature of the laboratory • Incorrect tuning • Calibration vial(s) empty or almost empty • Calibration valve(s) not working correctly • Dirty ion source • Electron multiplier is nearing the end of its useful lifetime • Ground loop problems Relative abundance of m/z 502 is less than 3% Autotune should give an m/z 502 relative abundance greater than 3%. The relative abundance of m/z 502 can, however, vary a great deal depending on column flow, ion source temperature, and other variables. As long as relative abundance is above 3%, the stability of the relative abundance is more important than the absolute value. If you observe significant changes in the relative abundance of m/z 502 for a fixed set of operating parameters, there may be a problem. The charts in the MSD Data Acquisition software are useful for identifying changes. Low relative abundance of m/z 502 should not be confused with low absolute abundances at high masses. Sensitivity at high masses can be excellent even if the relative abundance of m/z 502 is near 3%. If your MSD produces low absolute abundances at high masses, refer to the symptom “High mass sensitivity is poor” on page 46. Tune programs other than autotune have different relative abundance targets. The DFTPP and BFB target tune programs tune the MSD to achieve about a 0.8% ratio of m/z 502/69. • Tune program/tune file has a different relative abundance target (3% only applies to Autotune) • Not enough time for the MSD to warm up and pump down • Analyzer chamber pressure is too high • Ion source temperature is too high • Column (carrier gas) flow is too high • Poor filament operation 2 General Troubleshooting Mass Spectral Symptoms 46 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual • Dirty ion source • Air leak • Incorrect DC polarity on the quadrupole mass filter Spectra look different from those acquired with other MSDs Ion ratios are different from those in older models MSDs. This is due to the HED detector, and is normal. High mass sensitivity is poor This refers to a condition where the absolute abundance at the upper end of the mass range is poor. Absolute abundance should not be confused with the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 to m/z 69. Sensitivity at high masses can be excellent even if the relative abundance of m/z 502 is low. • Wrong tune program • Wrong tune file • Repeller voltage is too low • Not enough time for the MSD to warm up and pump down • Analyzer chamber pressure is too high • Column (carrier gas) flow is too high • Poor filament operation • Dirty ion source • Air leak • Incorrect DC polarity on the quadrupole mass filter • No voltage to the extractor lens (is using an extractor EI ion source) 2 General Troubleshooting Pressure Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 47 Pressure Symptoms This section describes unusual pressure readings and their possible causes. The symptoms in this section are based on typical pressures. At typical column flow rates (0.1 to 2.0 mL/minute), the foreline pressure will be approximately 20 to 100 mTorr. The analyzer chamber pressure will be approximately 1 × 10-6 to 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. These pressures can vary widely from instrument to instrument so it is very important that you are familiar with the pressures that are typical for your instrument at given carrier gas flows. The analyzer chamber pressures can only be measured if your system is equipped with the optional gauge controller. Foreline pressure is too high If the pressure you observe for a given column flow has increased over time, check the following: • Column (carrier gas) flow is too high • Air leak (usually the sideplate is not pushed in or vent valve is open) • Foreline pump oil level is low or oil is contaminated (standard foreline pump) • Foreline hose is constricted • Foreline pump is not working correctly Analyzer chamber pressure is too high (EI operation) If the pressure you observe is above 1.0 × 10-4 Torr, or if the pressure you observe for a given column flow has increased over time, check the following: • Column (carrier gas) flow is too high • Air leak • Foreline pump is not working correctly (see “Foreline pressure is too high” on page 47) • Turbo pump is not working correctly 2 General Troubleshooting Pressure Symptoms 48 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Foreline pressure is too low If the pressures you observe are below 20 mTorr, check for the following: • Column (carrier gas) flow is too low • Column plugged or crushed by an overtightened nut • Empty or insufficient carrier gas supply† • Bent or pinched carrier gas tubing† • Foreline gauge is not working correctly † These could create a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. Analyzer chamber pressure is too low If the pressures you observe are below 1 × 10-6 Torr, check for the following: • Column (carrier gas) flow is too low • Column plugged or crushed by overtightened nut • Empty or insufficient carrier gas supply† • Bent or pinched carrier gas tubing† † These could create a fault condition in the GC that would prevent the GC from operating. Gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank This indicates the pressure in the analyzer chamber is above 8 × 10-3 Torr. • Solvent peak from an on-column injection • MSD has not had enough time to pump down • Excessive foreline pressure • Vacuum gauge has failed • Line voltage too low • Turbo pump is not working correctly 2 General Troubleshooting Pressure Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 49 Power indicator on the gauge controller does not light • Unplugged gauge controller power cord • Incorrect or inadequate line voltage (24 V supply) • Failed gauge controller fuse 2 General Troubleshooting Temperature Symptoms 50 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Temperature Symptoms • The MSD has three heated zones: • Ion source • Mass filter • GC/MSD interface Each heated zone has a heater and temperature sensor. The ion source and mass filter are powered and controlled by the MSD. The GC/MSD interface is powered and controlled by the GC. For the 7820A Series GC’s, the heater is either connected to the rear inlet thermal zone for the single inlet models or connected to the manual valve thermal zone for dual inlet models. Ion source will not heat up • High vacuum pump is off or has not reached normal operating conditions† • Incorrect temperature setpoint • Ion source has not had enough time to reach temperature setpoint • Ion source heater cartridge is not connected† • Ion source temperature sensor is not connected† • Ion source heater failed (burned out or shorted to ground)† • Ion source temperature sensor failed† • Source power cable is not connected to the side board† • MSD electronics are not working correctly † These will cause an error message. Mass filter (quad) heater will not heat up • High vacuum pump is off or has not reached normal operating conditions† • Incorrect temperature setpoint • Mass filter has not had enough time to reach temperature setpoint • Mass filter heater cartridge is not connected† • Mass filter temperature sensor is not connected† • Mass filter heater failed (burned out or shorted to ground)† 2 General Troubleshooting Temperature Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 51 • Mass filter temperature sensor failed† • Source power cable is not connected to the sideboard† • MSD electronics are not working correctly † These will cause an error message. GC/MSD interface will not heat up • Incorrect setpoint(s) • Setpoint entered in wrong heated zone • GC/MSD interface has not had enough time to reach temperature setpoint • GC is off • GC experienced a fault and needs to be reset† • GC/MSD interface heater/sensor cable is not connected† • GC/MSD interface heater failed (burned out)† • GC/MSD interface sensor failed† • GC electronics are not working correctly† † These will cause a GC error message. GC error messages are described in the documentation supplied with your GC. 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 52 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Error Messages Sometimes, a problem in your MSD will cause an error message to appear in the MSD Data Acquisition software. Some error messages appear only during tuning. Other messages may appear during tuning or data acquisition. Some error messages are latched. Latched messages remain active in your data system even if the condition that caused the message has corrected itself. If the cause is removed, these messages can be removed by checking instrument status through the data system. Difficulty in mass filter electronics • Pressure in the analyzer chamber is too high • RFPA is not adjusted correctly • Mass filter (quad) contacts are shorted or otherwise not working correctly • Mass filter is not working correctly • MSD electronics are not working correctly Difficulty with the electron multiplier supply • Large peak, such as the solvent peak, eluted while the analyzer was on • Pressure in the analyzer chamber is too high • MSD electronics are not working correctly Difficulty with the fan If a cooling fan fault occurs, the vacuum control electronics automatically shut off the high vacuum pump, the ion source, and the mass filter heaters. The message: The system is in vent state may also appear. It is important to note that even though the high vacuum pump is off, the analyzer chamber may not actually be vented. See “The system is in vent state” on page 56 for precautions to take. • One of the fans is disconnected • One of the fans has failed • MSD electronics are not working correctly 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 53 Difficulty with the HED supply The only time this error occurs is if the output of the supply cannot get to its destination (the HED). • Large peak, such as the solvent peak, eluted while the analyzer was on • Pressure in the analyzer chamber is too high • Detector is not working correctly • MSD electronics are not working correctly Difficulty with the high vacuum pump In an MSD with a turbo pump, this indicates the pump failed to reach 50% of full speed within 7 minutes, or experienced a fault. You must switch the MSD off and back on to remove this error message. The message will reappear if the underlying problem has not been corrected. • Large vacuum leak is preventing the turbo pump from reaching 80% of full speed • Laboratory temperature is too high (generally above 35 °C) • Foreline pump is not working correctly • Turbo pump is not working correctly • Turbo pump controller is not working correctly • MSD electronics are not working correctly High foreline pressure • Excessive carrier gas flow (typically > 5 mL/min) • Excessive solvent volume injected • Large vacuum leak • Severely degraded foreline pump oil (standard foreline pump) • Collapsed or kinked foreline hose • Foreline pump is not working correctly 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 54 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Internal MS communication fault • MSD electronics are not working correctly Lens supply fault • Electrical short in the analyzer • MSD electronics are not working correctly Log amplifier ADC error • MSD electronics are not working correctly Data acquisition communication error The gas chromatographs and mass spectrometers supported by Data Acquisition GC/MS Acquisition Software require IPv4 Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. IPv6 IP addresses are not supported. Therefore, any data system computer (PC), router, switch, or hub that handles data packets to and from the instruments must use the IPv4 IP protocol and IPv4 IP addresses for the network interface used for the connections to the gas chromatographs and mass spectrometers. If required for other applications, the PC may also have the IPv6 Protocol configured as an optional configuration for the same network interface card, or a second network interface card. • LAN cable disconnected • Incorrect IP configuration • Incorrect IP address entered for the GC or MSD No peaks found • Emission current was set to 0 • Electron multiplier voltage is too low • Amu gain or offset is too high • Poor mass axis calibration • Calibration vial(s) empty or almost empty • Excessive pressure in the analyzer chamber 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 55 • Air leak • Signal cable is not connected • Electrical leads to the detector are not connected correctly • HED power supply output cable failed • Electrical leads to the ion source are not connected correctly • Filament shorted to the source body Temperature control disabled • One of the heater fuses has failed • MSD electronics are not working correctly Temperature control fault This indicates that something has gone wrong with the temperature control of either the ion source or mass filter (quad) heater. The cause can be further isolated by selecting mp Status/MS TeCtlr Status in the Tune and Vacuum Control view. One of the following should be displayed as the cause: • Source temperature sensor is open • Source temperature sensor is shorted • Mass filter (quad) temperature sensor is open • Mass filter (quad) temperature sensor is shorted • No heater voltage (heater fuse has probably failed) • Heater voltage is too low • Temperature zone has timed out (heater failed, bad heater wiring, or loose temperature sensor) • Problem with the temperature control electronics • Source heater is open • Source heater is shorted • Mass filter heater is open • Mass filter heater is shorted 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 56 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual The high vacuum pump is not ready • Turbo pump is on but has not had enough time (5 minutes) to reach 80% of its normal operating speed • Turbo pump is not working correctly • MSD electronics are not working correctly The system is in standby This message is triggered by a shutdown signal on the remote start cable. It is usually caused by a GC fault, an ALS fault, or a bad cable connection. Once the cause of the fault is corrected, selecting MS ON or checking MSD status should remove the message. The system is in vent state Wait at least 30 minutes after seeing this message before you actually vent the MSD. • System was vented on purpose (no problem) • Fan fault has turned off the high vacuum pump (power cycle the MSD to clear the fault) • Fuse for the high vacuum pump has failed • MSD electronics are not working correctly There is no emission current • Filament is not connected properly; try the other filament • Filament has failed; try the other filament • MSD electronics are not working correctly There is not enough signal to begin tune • Corrupted tune file CAUTION Venting the MSD too soon after this message appears can damage the turbo pump. 2 General Troubleshooting Error Messages 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 57 • Poor mass axis calibration • Amu gain or offset is too high • Calibration vial(s) empty or almost empty • Excessive pressure in the analyzer chamber • Air leak • Electron multiplier voltage is too low • Signal cable is not connected • Electrical leads to the detector are not connected correctly • Electrical leads to the ion source are not connected correctly • Filament shorted to the source body • Column inserted too far into source 2 General Troubleshooting Air Leaks 58 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Air Leaks Air leaks are a problem for any instrument that requires a vacuum to operate. Leaks are generally caused by vacuum seals that are damaged or not fastened correctly. Symptoms of leaks include: • Higher than normal analyzer chamber pressure or foreline pressure • Higher than normal background • Peaks characteristic of air (m/z 18, 28, 32, and 44 or m/z 14 and 16) • Poor sensitivity • Low relative abundance of m/z 502 (this varies with the tune program used) Leaks can occur in either the GC or the MSD. The most likely point for an air leak is a seal you recently opened. In the GC, most leaks occur in: • GC inlet septum • GC inlet column nut • Broken or cracked capillary column Leaks can occur in many more places in the MSD: • GC/MSD interface column nut • Side plate O-ring (all the way around) • Vent valve O-ring • Calibration valve(s) • GC/MSD interface O-ring (where the interface attaches to the analyzer chamber) • Front and rear end plate O-rings • Diffusion pump KF seal • Diffusion pump baffle adapter O-ring • Turbo pump O-ring 2 General Troubleshooting Contamination 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 59 Contamination Contamination is usually identified by excessive background in the mass spectra. It can come from the GC or from the MSD. The source of the contamination can sometimes be determined by identifying the contaminants. Some contaminants are much more likely to originate in the GC. Others are more likely to originate in the MSD. Contamination originating in the GC typically comes from one of these sources: • Column or septum bleed • Dirty GC inlet • GC inlet liner • Contaminated syringe • Poor quality carrier gas • Dirty carrier gas tubing • Fingerprints (improper handling of clean parts) Contamination originating in the MSD typically comes from one of the following sources: • Air leak • Cleaning solvents and materials • Foreline pump oil (standard foreline pump) • Fingerprints (improper handling of clean parts) Table 6 on page 60 lists some of the more common contaminants, the ions characteristic of those contaminants, and the likely sources of those contaminants. 2 General Troubleshooting Contamination 60 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Table 6 Common contaminants Ions (m/z) Compound Possible source 18, 28, 32, 44 or 14, 16 H20, N2, O2, CO2 or N, O Residual air and water, air leaks, outgassing from Vespel ferrules 31, 51, 69, 100, 119, 131, 169, 181, 214, 219, 264, 376, 414, 426, 464, 502, 576, 614 PFTBA and related ions PFTBA (tuning compound) 31 Methanol Cleaning solvent 43, 58 Acetone Cleaning solvent 78 Benzene Cleaning solvent 91, 92 Toluene or xylene Cleaning solvent 105, 106 Xylene Cleaning solvent 151, 153 Trichloroethane Cleaning solvent 69 Foreline pump oil or PFTBA Foreline pump oil vapor or calibration valve leak 73, 147, 207, 221, 281, 295, 355, 429 Dimethylpolysiloxane Septum bleed or methyl silicone column bleed 149 Plasticizer (phthalates) Vacuum seals (O-rings) damaged by high temperatures, vinyl gloves Peaks spaced 14 m/z apart Hydrocarbons Fingerprints, foreline pump oil 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 61 3 CI Troubleshooting Common CI-Specific Problems 62 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 63 Air Leaks 64 Pressure-Related Symptoms 68 Signal-Related Symptoms 71 Tuning-Related Symptoms 78 This chapter outlines troubleshooting 5977B Series MSDs equipped with the chemical ionization (CI) ion source. Most of the troubleshooting information in the previous chapter also applies to CI MSDs. 3 CI Troubleshooting Common CI-Specific Problems 62 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Common CI-Specific Problems Because of the added complexity of the parts required for CI, there are many potential problems added. The greatest number of, and most serious problems with CI are associated with leaks or contamination in the reagent gas introduction system. NCI is especially sensitive to the presence of air; small leaks that cause no problems in PCI can destroy NCI sensitivity. As with EI, if the MSD tunes well and no air leak is present, sample sensitivity problems should be addressed by GC inlet maintenance first. • Wrong reagent gas • Reagent gas not hooked up or hooked up to wrong reagent gas inlet port • Wrong ions entered in tune file • Wrong tune file selected • Not enough bakeout time has elapsed since vent (background is too high) • Wrong column positioning (extending > 2 mm past tip of interface) • Interface tip seal not installed • EI ion source installed in CI mode • EI filament or other EI ion source parts in CI ion source • Air leaks in reagent gas flow path • CI filament has stretched and sagged: • High EMV • Linear (no inflection point) electron energy (EIEnrgy) ramp 3 CI Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 63 Troubleshooting Tips and Tricks Rule 1: Look for what has been changed. Many problems are introduced accidentally by human actions. Every time any system is disturbed, there is a chance of introducing a new problem. • If the MSD was just pumped down after maintenance, suspect air leaks or incorrect assembly. • If the reagent gas bottle or gas purifier were just changed, suspect leaks or contaminated or incorrect gas. • If the GC column was just replaced, suspect air leaks or contaminated or bleeding column. • If you have just switched ion polarity or reagent gas, suspect the tune file you have loaded in memory. Is it the appropriate file for your mode of operation? Rule 2: If complex is not working, go back to simple. A complex task is not only more difficult to perform, but also more difficult to troubleshoot as well. For example, CI requires more parts to work correctly than EI does. • If you are having trouble with NCI, verify that PCI still works. • If you are having trouble with other reagent gases, verify that methane still works. • If you are having trouble with CI, verify that EI still works. Rule 3: Divide and conquer. This technique is known as half-split troubleshooting. If you can isolate the problem to only part of the system, it is much easier to locate. • To isolate an air leak, select Shutoff valve. If the abundance of m/z 32 decreases, the problem is not in the flow module. 3 CI Troubleshooting Air Leaks 64 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Air Leaks How do I know if I have an air leak? Large air leaks can be detected by vacuum symptoms: loud gurgling noise from the foreline pump, inability of the turbo pump to reach 95% speed, or, in the case of smaller leaks, high pressure readings on the high vacuum gauge controller. The mass flow controller is calibrated for methane, and the high vacuum gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen, so measurements are not accurate in absolute terms. Familiarize yourself with the measurements on your system under operating conditions. Watch for changes that may indicate a vacuum or gas flow problem. Always look for small air leaks when setting up methane flow. Select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. The abundance of m/z 19 (protonated water) should be less than 50% of m/z 17 for acceptable PCI performance. For NCI, the abundance of m/z 19 (protonated water) should be less than 25% that of m/z 17. If the MSD was just pumped down, look for the abundance of m/z 19 to be decreasing. 3 CI Troubleshooting Air Leaks 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 65 There should not be any peak visible at m/z 32 (O2). This almost always indicates an air leak. Special NCI notes Since NCI is so extremely sensitive, air leaks that are not detectable in EI or PCI can cause sensitivity problems in NCI. To check for this kind of air leak in NCI, inject OFN. The base peak should be at m/z 272. If the abundance of m/z 238 is much greater than that of m/z 272, you have an air leak. How do I find the air leak? 1 See Figure 3 on page 67 and Table 7 on page 67. 2 Look for the last seal that was disturbed. • If you just pumped down the MSD, press on the sideplate to check for proper seal. Poor alignment between the analyzer and the GC/MSD interface seal can prevent the sideplate from sealing. • If you just replaced the reagent gas bottle or gas purifier, check the fittings you just opened and refastened. Figure 2. Looking for air leaks 3 CI Troubleshooting Air Leaks 66 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 3 Check for tightness of seals at GC inlet and interface column nuts. Ferrules for capillary columns often loosen after several heat cycles. Do not overtighten the interface nut. 4 If any of the fittings inside the flow module (VCR fittings) were loosened and then retightened, the gasket must be replaced. These gaskets are good for one use only. 5 Remember that most small air leaks visible in CI mode are located in either the carrier gas or reagent gas flow paths. Leaks into the analyzer chamber are not likely to be seen in CI because of the higher pressure inside the ionization chamber. 6 Half-split the system. • Close valves starting at the gas select valves (Gas A then Gas B), then close the shutoff valve. See Figure 3 on page 67 and Table 7 on page 67. • Cool and vent the MSD, remove the GC column, and cap off the interface. Using argon or other introduced gas to find air leaks does not work well for the reagent gas flow system. It takes as long as 15 minutes for the peak to reach the ion source if the leak is at the inlet to the flow module. CAUTION Do not loosen the nuts on any VCR fittings unless you intend to replace the gaskets. Otherwise, you will create an air leak. 3 CI Troubleshooting Air Leaks 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 67 Figure 3. Schematic of CI flow control module Gas A (methane) supply Gas B (other) supply Gas A select valve Gas B select valve MFC Calibration valve Restrictor Calibration vial Shutoff valve GC/MSD interface GC column CI source Table 7 Flow module valve state diagram Result Gas A flow Gas B flow Purge with Gas A Purge with Gas B Pump out flow module Standby, vented, or EI mode Gas A Open Closed Open Closed Closed Closed Gas B Closed Open Closed Open Closed Closed MFC On (at setpoint) On (at setpoint) On (at 100%) On (at 100%) On (at 100%) Off (at 0%) Shutoff valve Open Open Open Open Open Closed 3 CI Troubleshooting Pressure-Related Symptoms 68 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Pressure-Related Symptoms The following symptoms are all related to high vacuum pressure. Each symptom is discussed in more detail in the following pages. The mass flow controller is calibrated for methane, and the high vacuum gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen, so these measurements are not accurate in absolute terms (Table 8). They are intended as a guide to typical observed readings. They were taken with the following set of conditions: Poor vacuum without reagent gas flow Excess water in the background Scan from 10 to 40 m/z. A large peak at m/z 19 (>m/z 17) indicates water in the background. If water is present, allow the instrument to bake out more, and flow reagent gas through the lines to purge any accumulated water. Source temperature 250 °C Quad temperature 150 °C GC/MSD Interface temperature 280 °C Helium carrier gas flow 1 mL/min Table 8 Pressure measurements Pressure (Torr) MFC (%) Methane Ammonia 10 5.5 × 10–5 5.0 × 10–5 15 8.0 × 10–5 7.0 × 10–5 20 1.0 × 10–4 8.5 × 10–5 25 1.2 × 10–4 1.0 × 10–4 30 1.5 × 10–4 1.2 × 10–4 35 2.0 × 10–4 1.5 × 10–4 40 2.5 × 10–4 2.0 × 10–4 3 CI Troubleshooting Pressure-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 69 Air leak In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. A visible peak at m/z 32 indicates air in the system. Check for, and correct any leaks. See “Air Leaks” on page 64. The foreline pump is not working properly For the standard foreline pump, replace the pump oil. If that does not help, or for the dry foreline pump, it may be necessary to replace the pump. Contact your local Agilent Technologies Customer Engineer. The turbo pump is not working properly Check the pump speed. It should be at least 95%. Contact your local Agilent Technologies service representative. High pressure with reagent gas flow The reagent gas flow rate is too high On the flow controller, turn down reagent gas flow as appropriate. Verify that reagent ion ratios are correct. Air leak Select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. A visible peak at m/z 32 indicates air in the system. Check for, and correct any leaks. See “Air Leaks” on page 64. Interface tip seal is not installed Check the source storage box. If the seal is not in the box, vent the MSD and verify that the seal is correctly installed. CAUTION Use of ammonia as reagent gas can shorten the life of the foreline pump oil (with standard pump) and possibly of the foreline pump itself. 3 CI Troubleshooting Pressure-Related Symptoms 70 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Pressure does not change when reagent flow is changed The reagent gas regulator is closed Check and, if necessary, open the reagent gas regulator. The reagent gas regulator is set to the wrong pressure Set the reagent gas regulator to 10 psi (70 kPa) for methane or to 3 to 10 psi (20 to 70 kPa) for isobutane or ammonia. The valve on the reagent gas bottle is closed Check and, if necessary, open the valve on the reagent gas bottle. The reagent gas supply is empty Check and, if necessary, replace the reagent gas supply. Reagent lines kinked, bent, pinched, or disconnected Inspect the reagent lines, and repair any defects. Check especially to ensure the reagent line is connected to the rear of the flow module. Ensure the methane line is connected to the Gas A inlet. GC/MSD interface clogged or damaged Check for flow, and repair or replace components as indicated. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 71 Signal-Related Symptoms This section describes symptoms related to the signal. The symptom may be too much signal, too little signal, a noisy signal, or an incorrect signal. Signal-related symptoms are generally observed during tuning, but may also be observed during data acquisition. Error messages in autotune due to insufficient signal may vary. The following symptoms are covered in more detail in this section: • No peaks, see page 71. • No or low reagent gas signal, see page 73. • No or low PFDTD signal, see page 75. • Excessive noise, see page 76. • Low signal-to-noise ratio, see page 76. • Large peak at m/z 19, see page 76. • Peak at m/z 32, see page 77. No peaks When troubleshooting no peaks, it is important to specify what mode of operation is being used, and what expected peaks are not being seen. Always start with methane PCI and verify presence of reagent ions. No reagent gas peaks in PCI If the MSD has been working well and nothing seems to have been changed • Wrong tune file loaded, or tune file corrupted • Wrong ion polarity (there are no reagent ions visible in NCI) • No reagent gas flow; look for background ions, and check pressure • Wrong reagent gas selected for the tune file (looking for wrong ions) • Large air leak • Dirty ion source • Poor vacuum (pump problem), see page 68. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 72 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual If the MSD was recently switched from EI to CI • Isolation tip not installed • No reagent gas flow • Analyzer not sealed (big air leak) • Wrong tune file loaded or tune file corrupted • Ion source not assembled or connected correctly • Wrong reagent gas selected for the tune file (looking for wrong ions) No PFDTD peaks in PCI • Incorrect reagent gas. There are no PCI PFDTD peaks created with isobutane or ammonia. Switch to methane. • Analyzer not sealed (big air leak) • No calibrant in vial • Defective calibration valve(s) • Air leak in carrier or reagent gas path No reagent gas peaks in NCI • Reagent gases do not ionize in NCI; look for background ions instead. • Verify tune parameters. • If no background ions are visible, go back to methane PCI. No PFDTD calibrant peaks in NCI • Look for background ions: 17 (OH–), 35 (Cl–), and 235 (ReO3–). • Verify tune parameters. • Go back to methane PCI. No sample peaks in NCI • Look for background ions: 17 (OH–), 35 (Cl–), and 235 (ReO3–). • Go back to methane PCI. • Poor quality reagent gas (purity less than 99.99%). 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 73 Large peak at m/z 238 in NCI OFN spectrum • Look for background ions: 17 (OH–), 35 (Cl–), and 235 (ReO3–). • Find and fix your small air leak. No or low reagent gas signal If you have just installed the CI ion source and have an air leak or large amounts of water in the system after running one or more autotunes, the ion source is probably dirty. Fix the air leak. Clean the ion source, and bake out for 2 hours before tuning. See the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual. The wrong reagent gas is flowing. Turn on the correct reagent gas for your tune file. Ion polarity is set to Negative. No reagent gas ions are formed in NCI. Switch to Positive ionization mode. The reagent gas flow is set too low. Increase the reagent gas flow. Reagent gas supply tubing is blocked, kinked, pinched, or disconnected. Inspect and, if necessary, repair or replace the reagent gas supply tubing. Wrong filament wires are connected to filament. Ensure that the filament 1 wires are connected to the CI ion source filament, and that the filament 2 wires are connected to the dummy filament. Carbon has built up on the filament, or the filament has sagged out of alignment. Inspect the filament, if necessary, replace the filament. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 74 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Too much air or water in the system. In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. Peaks at m/z 32 and 19 usually indicate air and water, respectively. Bake out and purge the instrument until there is no visible peak at m/z 32, and the peak at m/z 19 is reduced to a very low level. If the peak at m/z 32 does not decrease, an air leak is likely. See“Air Leaks” on page 64 for more information. The signal cable is not connected. Check and, if necessary, reconnect the signal cable. The filament or filament support is shorted to the ion source body or repeller. Inspect the filament, if necessary, realign the filament support arms. The electron inlet hole is blocked. Inspect the electron inlet hole and, if necessary, clean the hole with a clean toothpick and a slurry of aluminum oxide powder and methanol. If the electron inlet hole is that dirty, the entire ion source probably needs to be cleaned. Ion source wires are not connected, or incorrectly connected. Inspect the repeller. Ensure the repeller lead is firmly attached to the repeller. Inspect the wires to the ion focus and entrance lenses. If the connections are reversed, correct the problem. One of the detector leads (in the analyzer chamber) is not connected. Check and, if necessary, reconnect the electron multiplier leads. Saturated methane/isobutane gas purifier Replace the gas purifier. Poor quality methane (purity below 99.99%) Replace the methane with high-purity methane. If necessary, clean and purge the reagent gas lines and clean the ion source. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 75 No or low PFDTD signal, but reagent ions are normal You are using any reagent gas but methane in PCI. Switch to methane. Wrong or corrupted tune file loaded Check your tune file. No PFDTD in the calibrant vial Inspect the calibration vial on the back of the flow controller. If necessary, fill the vial with PFDTD. Do not fill the vial completely; keep the level at least 0.5 cm from the top of the vial. The pressure of the methane entering the flow controller is too high. Ensure the regulator on the methane supply is set to 10 psig (70 kPa). The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the ion source. The calibration valve was not purged after the vial was refilled. Purge the calibration valve as described in “To Purge the Calibration Valves” on page 122. Then clean the ion source. The calibrant vial was overfilled. Excess PFDTD can quench the chemical ionization reactions. Check the level of the PFDTD in the calibration vial. It should be below the end of the inside tube in the vial. Poor quality methane (purity below 99.99%) Replace the methane with high-purity methane. If necessary, clean and purge the reagent gas lines and clean the ion source. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 76 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Excessive noise or low signal-to-noise ratio The GC inlet needs maintenance. Refer to the GC manual. The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the ion source. Poor vacuum Check the pressure on the high vacuum gauge controller. Air leak In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. A large peak at m/z 32 indicates air in the system. Check for, and correct any leaks. See “Air Leaks” on page 64. Saturated methane/isobutane gas purifier Replace the gas purifier. Poor quality methane (purity below 99.99%) Replace the methane with high-purity methane. If necessary, clean and purge the reagent gas lines and clean the ion source. Reagent gas flows too high (in EI/PCI MSDs) Verify that the reagent gas setup is correct. Large peak at m/z 19 If the abundance of the peak at m/z 19 is more than half abundance of the peak at m/z 17, there probably is too much water in the system. The system was not baked out sufficiently after it was last vented. Bake out the system as described in the Maintenance chapter of this manual. 3 CI Troubleshooting Signal-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 77 Moisture left over in the reagent gas supply tubing and flow module Purge the reagent gas supply lines for at least 60 minutes. Contaminated reagent gas supply Replace the reagent gas supply, and purge the lines and flow module. Saturated methane/isobutane gas purifier Replace the gas purifier. Peak at m/z 32 A visible peak at m/z 32 in methane pretune often indicates air in the system. Residual air from recent venting — check for water indicated by a large peak at m/z 19. To eliminate water, bake out the system under vacuum. New or dirty reagent gas supply tubing Purge the reagent gas supply lines and flow module for at least 60 minutes. See the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual. Air leak Check for leaks, and correct any that you find. See“Air Leaks” on page 64. After all leaks have been corrected, clean the ion source. Contaminated reagent gas supply. Suspect this if you have recently replaced your gas tank, and you have ruled out air leaks. Replace the reagent gas supply. The capillary column is broken or disconnected. Inspect the capillary column. Ensure it is not broken and it is installed correctly. Saturated methane/isobutane gas purifier Replace the gas purifier. 3 CI Troubleshooting Tuning-Related Symptoms 78 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Tuning-Related Symptoms This section describes symptoms related to tuning. Most symptoms involve difficulties with tuning or with the results of tuning. The following symptoms are covered in this section: • CI ion ratio is difficult to adjust or unstable • High electron multiplier voltage • Cannot complete autotune • Peak widths are unstable Reagent gas ion ratio is difficult to adjust or unstable The interface tip seal is incorrectly placed, damaged, or missing. Inspect the Isolation tip. If necessary, remove and reinstall it to ensure a good seal with the CI ion source. Replace it if it is damaged. Install it if it is missing. Residual air and water in the MSD or in the reagent gas supply lines In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. Air will appear as a peak at m/z 32 and excessive water as a peak at m/z 19 > m/z 17. If either of these conditions is present, purge the reagent gas supply lines and bake out the MSD. See “To Clean the Reagent Gas Supply Lines” on page 141. Continued presence of a large peak at m/z 32 may indicate an air leak. After correcting the problems, you may need to clean the ion source. Air leak In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. Large peak at m/z 32 indicates air in the system. Check for and correct any leaks. See“Air Leaks” on page 64. 3 CI Troubleshooting Tuning-Related Symptoms 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 79 The reagent gas supply is at the wrong pressure. Check the regulator on the reagent gas supply. It should be adjusted to 20 psi (140 kPa). A leak in the reagent gas delivery path. This is especially likely if you have set the methane flow much higher than normal and the ratio is still too low. Check the reagent gas path. Tighten fittings. The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the ion source. High electron multiplier voltage The electron multiplier voltage can range from a few hundred volts to 3,000 V. If the CI autotune program consistently sets the electron multiplier voltage at or above 2,600 V but can still find peaks and complete the tune, it may indicate a problem. The filament is worn out. The CI filament may wear out without actually breaking. Check the Electron Energy ramp; the curve should have a definite maximum with an inflection point. If the curve is linear with a positive slope and no inflection point, and the EMV is high, the filament has stretched to the point where it does not line up with the hole in the ion source body, and most electrons are not getting into the source. Replace the filament. The analyzer is not at the proper operating temperature. Verify the ion source and quadrupole temperatures. The default source temperature is 250 °C for PCI and 150 °C for NCI. The quadrupole temperature is 150 °C for both CI modes. The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the ion source. The electron multiplier (detector) is failing. Switch to EI mode and confirm. Replace the electron multiplier. 3 CI Troubleshooting Tuning-Related Symptoms 80 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Cannot complete Autotune Wrong or corrupted tune file Check the tune parameters. The m/z 28/27 ion ratio (for methane) is incorrect. The correct ratio should be between 1.5 and 5.0. If the ion ratio is incorrect, adjust it. See the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual. The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the source. Too much air or water in the system See“Air Leaks” on page 64. After eliminating these problems, clean the ion source. Peak widths are unstable Wrong or corrupted tune file Check the tune parameters. The CI ion source is dirty. Clean the ion source. Air leak In PCI mode, select Methane Pretune from the Setup menu in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software, and follow the system prompts. See the software online help for additional information. A visible peak at m/z 32 indicates air in the system. Check for and correct any leaks. See“Air Leaks” on page 64”. After eliminating all air leaks, clean the ion source. 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 81 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 83 Maintaining the Vacuum System 88 To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC 89 To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC 91 To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC 93 To Reconnect the MSD to the 9000 GC 94 To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to an 8890 or 7890 GC 96 To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to a 9000 GC 98 To Check the Foreline Pump Oil 100 To Drain the Foreline Pump 102 To Refill the Foreline Pump 103 To Change the Oil Mist Filter on the Foreline Pump 104 To Install the Exhaust Filter on the IDP3 Dry Pump 106 To Change the Filter Cartridge on the IDP3 Dry Foreline Pump 108 To Check the DP Fluid 109 To Remove the DP 111 To Replace the DP Fluid 113 To Install the DP 115 To Remove the Foreline Gauge 117 To Install the Foreline Gauge 119 To Refill the EI Calibration Vial 120 To Purge the Calibration Valves 122 To Remove the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 123 To Install the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 124 4 General Maintenance 82 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Replace the Fan for the High Vacuum Pump 125 To Remove the Ion Vacuum Gauge 127 To Install an Ion Vacuum Gauge 127 To Lubricate the Side Plate O-Ring 128 To Lubricate the Vent Valve O-Ring 130 Maintaining the Electronics 132 To Adjust the Quad Frequency 134 To Replace the Primary Fuses 136 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 83 Before Starting For your safety, read all of the information in this introduction before performing any maintenance tasks. Scheduled maintenance Performing common maintenance tasks when scheduled can reduce operating problems, prolong system life, and reduce overall operating costs. (See Table 9.) Keep a record of system performance (tune reports) and maintenance operations performed. This makes it easier to identify variations from normal operation, and to take corrective action. Table 9 Maintenance schedule Task Every week Every 6 months Every year As needed Tune the MSD X Check the foreline pump oil level X Check the calibration vial(s) X Replace the foreline pump oil* X Replace the DP fluid X Check the dry foreline pump X Change the dry foreline pump tip seal X Change the foreline pump oil mist filter X Clean the ion source X Check the carrier gas trap(s) on the GC and MSD X Replace the worn out parts X Lubricate sideplate or vent valve O-rings† X Replace CI Reagent gas supply X Replace GC gas supplies X * Every 3 months for CI MSDs using ammonia reagent gas. † Vacuum seals other than the side plate O-ring and vent valve O-ring do not need to be lubricated. Lubricating other seals can interfere with their correct function. 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 84 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Tools, spare parts, and supplies Some of the required tools, spare parts, and supplies are included in the GC shipping kit, MSD shipping kit, or MSD tool kit. You must supply others yourself. Each maintenance procedure includes a list of the materials required for that procedure. (See “Consumables and Maintenance Supplies” on page 236.) High voltage precautions Whenever the MSD is plugged in, even if the power switch is off, potentially dangerous voltage (120 VAC or 200/240 VAC) exists on: • The wiring and fuses between where the power cord enters the instrument and the power switch When the power switch is on, potentially dangerous voltages exist on: • Electronic circuit boards • Toroidal transformer • Wires and cables between these boards • Wires and cables between these boards and the connectors on the back panel of the MSD • Some connectors on the back panel (for example, the foreline power receptacle) Normally, all of these parts are shielded by safety covers. As long as the safety covers are in place, it should be difficult to accidentally make contact with dangerous voltages. Some procedures in this chapter require access to the inside of the MSD while the power switch is on. Do not remove any of the electronics safety covers in any of these procedures. To reduce the risk of electric shock, follow the procedures carefully. WARNING Do not perform maintenance with the MSD turned on or plugged into its power source unless you are instructed by one of the procedures in this chapter to do so. 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 85 Dangerous temperatures Many parts in the MSD operate at, or reach, temperatures high enough to cause serious burns. These parts include, but are not limited to the: • GC inlets • GC oven and its contents, including the column nuts attaching the column to a GC inlet, GC/MSD interface, or GC detector • GC detector • GC valve box • Foreline pump • Diffusion pump • Heated MSD ion source, GC/MSD interface, and quadrupole The GC inlets and GC oven also operate at very high temperatures. Use the same caution around these parts. See the documentation supplied with your GC for more information. WARNING Never touch these parts while your MSD is on. After the MSD is turned off, give these parts enough time to cool before handling them. WARNING The GC/MSD interface heater is powered by a heated zone on the GC. The interface heater can be on, and at a dangerously high temperature, even though the MSD is off. The GC/MSD interface is well insulated. Even after it is turned off, it cools very slowly. WARNING The foreline pump can cause burns if touched when operating. It has a safety shield to prevent the user from touching it. 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 86 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Chemical residue Only a small portion of your sample is ionized by the ion source. The majority of any sample passes through the ion source without being ionized. It is pumped away by the vacuum system. As a result, the exhaust from the foreline pump will contain traces of the carrier gas and your samples. Exhaust from the standard foreline pump also contains tiny droplets of foreline pump oil. An oil trap is supplied with the standard foreline pump. This trap stops only pump oil droplets. It does not trap any other chemicals. If you are using toxic solvents or analyzing toxic chemicals, do not use this oil trap. For all foreline pumps, install a hose to take the exhaust from the foreline pump outdoors or into a fume hood vented to the outdoors. For the standard foreline pump, this requires removing the oil trap. Comply with your local air quality regulations. The fluids in the DP and standard foreline pump also collect traces of the samples being analyzed. All used pump fluid should be considered hazardous and handled accordingly. Dispose of used fluid correctly, as specified by your local regulations. Electrostatic discharge All of the printed circuit boards in the MSD contain components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Do not handle or touch these boards unless absolutely necessary. In addition, wires, contacts, and cables can conduct ESD to the electronics boards to which they are connected. This is especially true of the mass filter (quadrupole) contact wires which can carry ESD to sensitive components on the side board. ESD damage may not cause immediate failure, but it will gradually degrade the performance and stability of your MSD. When you work on or near printed circuit boards, or when you work on components with wires, contacts, or cables connected to printed circuit boards, always use a grounded antistatic wrist strap and take other antistatic precautions. The wrist strap should be connected to a known good earth ground. WARNING The oil trap supplied with the standard foreline pump stops only foreline pump oil. It does not trap or filter out toxic chemicals. If you are using toxic solvents or analyzing toxic chemicals, remove the oil trap. Do not use the trap if you have a CI MSD. Install a hose to take the foreline pump exhaust outside or to a fume hood. WARNING When replacing pump fluid, use appropriate chemical-resistant gloves and safety glasses. Avoid all contact with the fluid. 4 General Maintenance Before Starting 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 87 If that is not possible, it should be connected to a conductive (metal) part of the assembly being worked on, but not to electronic components, exposed wires or traces, or pins on connectors. Take extra precautions, such as a grounded antistatic mat, if you must work on components or assemblies that have been removed from the MSD. This includes the analyzer. CAUTION To be effective, an antistatic wrist strap must fit snugly (not tight). A loose strap provides little or no protection. Antistatic precautions are not 100% effective. Handle electronic circuit boards as little as possible and then only by the edges. Never touch components, exposed traces, or pins on connectors and cables. 4 General Maintenance Maintaining the Vacuum System 88 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Maintaining the Vacuum System Periodic maintenance Some maintenance tasks for the vacuum system must be performed periodically. (See Table 9 on page 83.) These include: • Checking the foreline pump oil (every week) • Checking the calibration vial (every 6 months) • Replacing the foreline pump oil (every 6 months; every 3 months for CI MSDs using ammonia reagent gas, standard foreline pump) • Tightening the foreline pump oil box screws (first oil change after installation, standard foreline pump) • Changing the foreline pump exhaust filters • Replacing the DP fluid (once a year) • Changing the dry foreline pump tip seal (once a year) Failure to perform these tasks as scheduled can result in decreased instrument performance. It can also result in damage to your instrument. Other procedures Tasks such as replacing a Micro-Ion vacuum gauge should be performed only when needed. (See“General Troubleshooting” on page 33.) Refer to the online help in the Agilent MassHunter GC/MS Acquisition software for symptoms that indicate this type of maintenance is required. More information is available If you need more information about the locations or functions of vacuum system components. (See“Vacuum System” on page 145.) Most of the procedures in this chapter are illustrated with video clips on the 5977B Series MSD User Information media. 4 General Maintenance To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 89 To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC Materials needed • Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510) Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Turn off the GC. 3 Remove the capillary column from the GC/MSD interface. 4 The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. Move it as needed to provide slack in the tubing and cables. 5 Move the MSD away from the GC until you have access to the GC/MSD interface cable. (See Figure 4.) WARNING Ensure the GC/MSD interface and GC oven have cooled before you remove the column. Figure 4. Separating and connecting the MSD and GC The Agilent 7890 GC has a front and a back location for the MSD interface. The Agilent 7820A GC has only one location for the MSD interface. Interface cable LVDS cable 4 General Maintenance To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC 90 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 6 Place a column nut with a blank ferrule on the end of the interface. This will help keep contamination out of the MSD. 7 Disconnect the GC/MSD interface cable and the LVDS cable (if applicable). LVDS cable position will vary on different models of GC. Disconnecting either cable with the GC on can cause a fault condition. 8 Continue to move the MSD until you have access to the part requiring maintenance. 4 General Maintenance To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 91 To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC Materials needed • Screwdriver, T-20 Torx (8710-1615) Procedure Separate the MSD and 9000 GC 1 Remove the 9000 GC/MSD Tail. Refer to the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual. 2 Power off the GC. 3 Using a T-20 Torx screwdriver, loosen the lock plate by turning the lock plate screw clockwise. 4 The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. Move it as needed to provide slack in the tubing and cables. 5 Slide the MSD backwards, and then away from the GC until you have access to the GC/MSD cables. (See Figure 5 on page 92.)  WARNING Ensure the GC/MSD interface and the analyzer zones are cool (below 100 °C) before you vent the MSD. A temperature of 100 °C is hot enough to burn skin; always wear cloth gloves when handling analyzer parts. WARNING If you are using hydrogen as a carrier gas, the carrier gas flow must be closed before turning off the MSD power. If the foreline pump is off, hydrogen will accumulate in the MSD and an explosion may occur. Before operating the MSD with hydrogen carrier gas read the hydrogen safety information. (See“Hydrogen Safety” on page 22.) CAUTION Ensure the GC heated zones and the GC/MSD interface are cool before turning off carrier gas flow. WARNING Ensure the GC/MSD interface and GC heated zones have cooled before you remove the 9000 GC/MSD Tail. 4 General Maintenance To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC 92 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 6 Disconnect the GC/MSD interface heater cables, and the LVDS cable. Disconnecting the interface heater cables with the GC on can cause a fault condition. 7 Continue to move the MSD until you have access to the part requiring maintenance. Figure 5. GC/MSD interface heater cables and LVDS cable Interface cables LVDS cable 4 General Maintenance To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 93 To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC Materials needed • Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510) Procedure 1 Position the MSD so the end of the GC/MSD interface is near the GC. 2 Reconnect the GC/MSD interface and the LVDS cables (if applicable). 3 Slide the MSD to its regular position next to the GC. Be careful not to damage the GC/MSD interface as it passes into the GC. Ensure the end of the GC/MSD interface extends into the GC oven. 4 The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. 5 Reinstall the capillary column. 6 Pump down the MSD. 7 Turn on the MS and GC. Enter appropriate temperature setpoints for the GC/MSD interface and GC oven.  4 General Maintenance To Reconnect the MSD to the 9000 GC 94 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Reconnect the MSD to the 9000 GC This procedure starts with both instruments shut down and at room temperature. Procedure 1 Position the MSD so the end of the GC/MSD interface is near the GC. (See Figure 5 on page 92.) 2 Tighten the thumb screw at the top of the interface heater clamp. If the thumb screw is loose when reconnecting the GC/MSD, it will be difficult to retighten when installing the 9000 GC/MSD Tail. 3 Connect the GC/MSD interface heater cables and LVDS cable. 4 Slide the MSD against the GC with the transfer line entering the GC side opening, and the metal brackets entering their slots in the base of the GC. Be careful not to damage the GC/MSD interface as it passes into the GC. 5 Open the GC front door. 6 Slide the MS forward until the GC/MSD interface lightly contacts the bus. (See Figure 6.) Figure 6. GC/MSD interface and bus  4 General Maintenance To Reconnect the MSD to the 9000 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 95 7 Using a T-20 Torx screwdriver, tighten the lock plate by turning the lock plate screw counter clockwise. 8 Install the 9000 GC/MSD Tail. 9 If the MSD is equipped with an MFC, attach the MFC gas lines. CAUTION Do not turn on any GC heated zones until carrier gas flow is on. Heating a column with no carrier gas flow will damage the column. CAUTION During pumpdown, do not push on the filament board safety cover while pressing on the analyzer boards. This cover was not designed to withstand this type of pressure. WARNING Ensure your MSD meets all the conditions listed in the Pumpdown section of the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual before starting up and pumping down the MSD. Failure to do so can result in personal injury. 4 General Maintenance To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to an 8890 or 7890 GC 96 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to an 8890 or 7890 GC Materials needed • Ferrule, blank (5181-3308) • Interface column nut (05988-20066) • Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510) Procedure 1 Move the MSD away from the GC. (See “To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 89.) 2 Tighten the vent valve. 3 Install the interface nut and blank ferrule on the GC end of the GC/MSD interface. 4 Open the analyzer cover. 5 Finger-tighten the side plate thumbscrews. (See Figure 7 on page 97.) 6 Plug the MSD power cord in. 7 Switch the MSD on for 5 minutes to establish a rough vacuum. 8 Switch the MSD off. 9 Close the analyzer cover. 10 Disconnect the LAN, remote, and power cables. CAUTION Do not overtighten the side plate thumbscrews. Overtightening will strip the threads in the analyzer chamber. It will also warp the side plate and cause leaks. 4 General Maintenance To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to an 8890 or 7890 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 97 The MSD can now be stored or moved. The foreline pump cannot be disconnected; it must be moved with the MSD. Ensure the MSD remains upright, and is never tipped on its side or inverted. Figure 7. Side plate thumbscrews Front thumbscrew Rear thumbscrew CAUTION The MSD must remain upright at all times. If you need to ship your MSD to another location, contact your Agilent Technologies service representative for advice about packing and shipping. 4 General Maintenance To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to a 9000 GC 98 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to a 9000 GC Materials needed • Ferrule, blank (5181-3308) • Interface column nut (05988-20066) • 7/16-inch open-end wrench Procedure 1 Separate the MSD and the 9000 GC. (See “To Separate the MSD from the 9000 GC” on page 91.) 2 Install a blank ferrule and interface column nut on the GC end of the GC/MSD interface. 3 Tighten the vent valve. 4 Open the analyzer cover. 5 Finger-tighten the side plate thumbscrews. (See Figure 7 on page 97.) 6 Plug the MSD power cord in. 7 Switch the MSD on for 5 minutes to establish a rough vacuum. 8 Switch the MSD off. 9 Close the analyzer cover. 10 Disconnect the LAN, remote, and power cables. CAUTION Do not overtighten the side plate thumbscrews. Overtightening will strip the threads in the analyzer chamber. It will also warp the side plate and cause leaks. 4 General Maintenance To Move or Store the MSD when Connected to a 9000 GC 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 99 The MSD can now be stored or moved. The foreline pump cannot be disconnected; it must be moved with the MSD. Ensure the MSD remains upright, and is never tipped on its side or inverted. Figure 8. Side plate thumbscrews Front thumbscrew Rear thumbscrew CAUTION The MSD must remain upright at all times. If you need to ship your MSD to another location, contact your Agilent Technologies service representative for advice about packing and shipping. 4 General Maintenance To Check the Foreline Pump Oil 100 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Check the Foreline Pump Oil Standard foreline pumps only Materials needed • Foreline pump oil (6040-0621) • Funnel (9301-6461) • Hex key to remove drain plug (5 mm for Pfeiffer pump, 8710-1838) • Screwdriver, flat-blade, to remove fill cap Procedure Always replace the oil if it is dark or cloudy or due for replacement instead of adding oil. (See“To Drain the Foreline Pump” on page 102 and“To Refill the Foreline Pump” on page 103.) 1 Examine the oil level window (Figure 9 on page 101). 2 Note the two lines on the pump left of the window. The oil level should be between the lines. The foreline pump oil should be almost clear. If the oil level is near or below the lower line, add foreline pump oil. (See“To Refill the Foreline Pump” on page 103, starting at step four.)  WARNING The foreline pump can cause burns if touched when operating. It has a safety shield to prevent the user from touching it. WARNING Never add oil while the foreline pump is on. 4 General Maintenance To Check the Foreline Pump Oil 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 101 Figure 9. Pfeiffer Duo foreline pump Fill cap Oil level line Drain plug Oil mist filter 4 General Maintenance To Drain the Foreline Pump 102 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Drain the Foreline Pump Standard foreline pump only Materials needed • Book or other solid object approximately 5 cm thick • Container for catching old pump oil, 500 mL • Gloves, oil- and solvent-resistant • Screwdriver, flat-blade, large (8730-0002) • Hex key to remove drain plug (5 mm for Pfeiffer pump, 8710-1838) Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 If necessary, slide the foreline pump to a safe, accessible location. The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. 3 Remove the fill cap. (See Figure 9 on page 101.) 4 Place a container under the drain plug. 5 Remove the drain plug. Allow the pump oil to drain out. The oil drains faster if it is still warm. If necessary, you can place a book or other object under the pump motor to tilt it up slightly. 6 Reinstall the drain plug after draining the oil.  WARNING The foreline pump can cause burns if touched when operating. It has a safety shield to prevent the user from touching it. WARNING The old pump oil may contain toxic chemicals. Treat it as hazardous waste. 4 General Maintenance To Refill the Foreline Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 103 To Refill the Foreline Pump Standard foreline pump only Materials needed • Foreline pump oil (6040-0621) – approximately 0.28 L required • Funnel (9301-6461) • Gloves, oil- and solvent-resistant • Screwdriver, flat-blade, large (8730-0002) • Drain plug O-ring (if required) (0905-1515) • Hex key to remove drain plug (5 mm for Pfeiffer pump, 8710-1838) Procedure 1 Drain the foreline pump. (See“To Drain the Foreline Pump” on page 102.) 2 Reinstall the drain plug. If the old O-ring appears worn or damaged, replace it. 3 Remove the propping object from under the pump motor. 4 Add foreline pump oil until the oil level in the window is near, but not above, the upper line. The foreline pump requires approximately 0.28 L of oil. 5 Wait a few minutes for the oil to settle. If the oil level drops, add oil to bring the oil level near the upper line. 6 Reinstall the fill cap. 7 If necessary, slide the foreline pump back under the analyzer chamber. The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. 8 Pump down the MSD.  WARNING The foreline pump can cause burns if touched when operating. It has a safety shield to prevent the user from touching it. 4 General Maintenance To Change the Oil Mist Filter on the Foreline Pump 104 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Change the Oil Mist Filter on the Foreline Pump Materials needed • Oil mist filter (G1099-80039) • Gloves, oil-resistant Procedure 1 Unscrew the filter from the top of pump. 2 Screw the replacement filter on to the pump.  WARNING The foreline pump can cause burns if touched when operating. It has a safety shield to protect the user from touching it. WARNING Do not breathe the pump exhaust; it may contain traces of pump oil vapor, solvents, and analytes. Do not replace the trap while samples are being analyzed. WARNING The oil mist filter may contain traces of oil, solvents, and analytes. Treat it as hazardous. Dispose of the oil trap in accordance with local environmental and safety regulations. 4 General Maintenance To Change the Oil Mist Filter on the Foreline Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 105 Figure 10. Foreline pump with oil mist filter Oil mist filter 4 General Maintenance To Install the Exhaust Filter on the IDP3 Dry Pump 106 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Install the Exhaust Filter on the IDP3 Dry Pump Materials needed • Exhaust filter (G7077-67017) Procedure 1 Disconnect the foreline pump exhaust hose from the adapter. 2 Unscrew the adapter from the pump. 3 Screw the filter on to the pump. WARNING Do not breathe the pump exhaust; it may contain traces of solvents and analytes. Do not install the exhaust filter while samples are being analyzed.  4 General Maintenance To Install the Exhaust Filter on the IDP3 Dry Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 107 Figure 11. IDP3 pump with exhaust filter Exhaust filter Exhaust hose Hose adapter 4 General Maintenance To Change the Filter Cartridge on the IDP3 Dry Foreline Pump 108 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Change the Filter Cartridge on the IDP3 Dry Foreline Pump Materials needed • Exhaust filter cartridge (REPLSLRFILTER2) • Gloves, oil-resistant Procedure 1 Unscrew the cap from the exhaust filter. (See Figure 11 on page 107.) 2 Pull the filter cartridge out of the filter cap. 3 Install a new filter cartridge. 4 Align the cap onto the filter and rotate the cap counterclockwise to lock in place. WARNING Do not breathe the pump exhaust; it may contain traces of solvents and analytes. Do not install the exhaust filter while samples are being analyzed.  WARNING The exhaust filter cartridge may contain traces of solvents and analytes. Treat it as hazardous. Dispose of the filter cartridge in accordance with local environmental and safety regulations. 4 General Maintenance To Check the DP Fluid 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 109 To Check the DP Fluid Materials needed • Screwdriver, Torx T-20 (8710-1615) Procedure 1 Remove the analyzer window cover. 2 Vent the MSD. 3 Remove the side cover. 4 Check the DP fluid level. (See Figure 12 on page 110.) The DP fluid level can be seen through the window below the fan at the front of the MSD. The DP fluid level should be between the top and bottom of one of the FULL ranges. There are two sets of marks. Use the HOT marks if the DP is on and is at its normal operating temperature. Use the COLD marks if the pump is off and has had time to cool. If the fluid level is below the bottom of the appropriate range, replace the DP fluid. Do not just add fluid. The pump fluid should be clear or almost clear. Dark or cloudy pump fluid indicates an air leak or excessive heat. If the pump fluid appears dark or cloudy, replace it. Then, check for an air leak. The DP fluid should be replaced at least once a year, or more often if the pump fluid level is low, or if the fluid is dark or cloudy.  WARNING Do not remove any other covers. Removing other covers may expose hazardous voltages. WARNING Keep your hair away from the cooling fan if the MSD is turned on. WARNING The diffusion pump operates at a dangerously high temperature. Do not touch it. 4 General Maintenance To Check the DP Fluid 110 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 12. DP Fan Fluid level window (sight glass) 4 General Maintenance To Remove the DP 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 111 To Remove the DP Materials needed • Aluminum foil, clean • Gloves, oil-resistant Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Separate the MSD from the GC. (See“To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 89.) 3 Disconnect high vacuum power (HIVAC POWER) cable from the back panel of the MSD. (This is the thick black cable that emerges near the bottom of the pump.) 4 Disconnect the DP temperature sensor wires from the wiring harness. 5 Support the DP with one hand. WARNING Treat the DP fluid as hazardous, as it may contain traces of toxic chemicals.  WARNING The diffusion pump operates at a dangerously high temperature. Make sure it has cooled before touching it. 4 General Maintenance To Remove the DP 112 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 6 Remove the KF50 clamp. (See Figure 13.) 7 Lower the DP. 8 Remove the O-ring assembly from the top of the DP. The O-ring will have DP fluid on it, and will be very sticky. Place the O-ring on clean aluminum foil (shiny side down) to keep your lab bench and the O-ring clean. 9 Remove the DP through the side of the MSD. You may have to tilt the pump slightly to remove it. Do not tilt the pump past 45 degrees if the pump is warm. 10 Disconnect the foreline gauge assembly from the DP outlet. The foreline gauge cable can be disconnected or can remain connected to the foreline gauge. Figure 13. Removing the DP Foreline gauge assembly KF50 clamp DP 4 General Maintenance To Replace the DP Fluid 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 113 To Replace the DP Fluid Materials needed • Aluminum foil, clean • Cloths, clean, lint-free (05980-60051) • Container for old DP fluid • DP fluid, 18.5 mL (6040-0809) – Two bottles are required • Gloves • Oil- and solvent-resistant • Thermally insulated Procedure 1 Remove the DP from the MSD. (See“To Remove the DP” on page 111.) Remove the O-ring assembly from the top of the DP. 2 Cover the top of the DP with aluminum foil (shiny side up). 3 Heat the DP at 60 °C for 15 minutes. (If the pump will fit, you can use the GC oven.) 4 Pour the old DP fluid out the top of the pump. Even after heating, the pump fluid pours very slowly. 5 Check the color of the pump fluid. If the DP has been heated with insufficient pump fluid (or with a large air leak in the MSD), the remaining pump fluid may be severely charred and blackened. Blackened pump fluid may also be baked onto the internal parts (stack) of the pump. If so, you may have to remove the DP stack and clean  WARNING The pump and pump fluid will be hot. Wear protective gloves when you remove the pump from the oven. WARNING Treat the old pump fluid as hazardous. It may contain traces of toxic chemicals. WARNING Methylene chloride is a hazardous solvent. Work in a fume hood and take all appropriate precautions. 4 General Maintenance To Replace the DP Fluid 114 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual its parts, and the interior of the pump, with methylene chloride. Be very careful when reinstalling the stack. Misalignment of stack components can seriously reduce DP performance. 6 Clean the DP flange on the analyzer chamber. 7 Preheat the new DP fluid following the instructions on the bottle. 8 Pour new DP fluid into the DP until the fluid level is within the FULL COLD range. The recommended charge for this pump is 30 mL. It will require approximately 1.5 of the bottles (18.5 mL each) of DP fluid. Pour the fluid between the center stack and the side wall. Watch the sight glass while pouring. Do not overfill. 9 Reinstall the DP. (See “To Install the DP” on page 115.) Figure 14. Filling the DP with fluid Only use about half of the second bottle 4 General Maintenance To Install the DP 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 115 To Install the DP Materials needed • Gloves, oil-resistant • Vacuum cleaner, non-ESD generating (92175V or equivalent) This procedure works best with two people, one to hold the pump, and one to install the clamp. Procedure 1 Vacuum the fan that cools the DP. Keeping the fan clean helps ensure maximum cooling. This is one of the few times you will have convenient access to the pump side of the fan. 2 Slide the DP into the MSD. You may have to tilt the pump slightly to get it into the MSD. Do not tilt it past 45 degrees. 3 Install the O-ring assembly on the DP. (See Figure 15 on page 116.) 4 Lift the DP into its normal position. 5 Install the KF50 clamp. 6 Reconnect the DP temperature sensor wires to the wiring harness. 7 Reconnect the high vacuum power cable to the HIVAC POWER connector on the back panel of the MSD. This is the thick black cable that emerges near the bottom of the pump. 8 Reconnect the foreline gauge fitting to the outlet of the DP. If you disconnected the foreline gauge cable, reconnect it to the foreline gauge. 9 Move the MSD back to its normal position.  4 General Maintenance To Install the DP 116 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 15. Installing the DP Foreline gauge assembly KF50 clamp O-ring assembly DP DP outlet 4 General Maintenance To Remove the Foreline Gauge 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 117 To Remove the Foreline Gauge Materials needed • Screwdriver, flat-blade, large (8730-0002) Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Separate the MSD from the GC and disconnect the transfer line temperature sensor. (See“To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 89.) 3 Unplug the foreline gauge cable from the foreline gauge. 4 Disconnect the foreline gauge assembly from the DP outlet. 5 Loosen the hose clamp. 6 Pull the foreline gauge assembly out of the foreline hose. (See Figure 16 on page 118.)  WARNING The foreline pump and DP may still be hot. CAUTION Ensure the MSD is vented to atmosphere before breaking the seal at the foreline gauge. Never vent the MSD at the pump end; use the vent valve. 4 General Maintenance To Remove the Foreline Gauge 118 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 16. Foreline gauge assembly Foreline gauge 4 General Maintenance To Install the Foreline Gauge 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 119 To Install the Foreline Gauge Materials needed • Foreline gauge assembly (G1099-60545) • Screwdriver, flat-blade, large (8730-0002) Procedure 1 Connect a new foreline gauge assembly to the foreline hose. 2 Tighten the hose clamp. 3 Connect the foreline gauge assembly to the DP outlet. 4 Connect the foreline gauge cable to the foreline gauge. 5 Reconnect the MSD to the GC. (See “To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 93.) 6 If necessary, slide the foreline pump back under the analyzer chamber. The foreline pump may be located on the floor, on the lab bench next to or behind the MSD, or under the analyzer chamber at the back of the MSD. 7 Pump down the MSD.  4 General Maintenance To Refill the EI Calibration Vial 120 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Refill the EI Calibration Vial Materials needed • PFTBA (05971-60571) Procedure 1 Stop any tuning or data acquisition. 2 Turn off the analyzer. (See MassHunter software online help.) 3 If your MSD is equipped with a vacuum gauge, turn off the gauge. 4 Remove the analyzer window cover. 5 Loosen the calibration vial collar by turning it counterclockwise. (See Figure 17.) Do not remove the collar. 6 Pull the calibration vial out. You may feel some resistance due to O-ring friction and residual vacuum. 7 Syringe or pipette PFTBA into the vial. With the vial vertical, the liquid should be just below the end of the internal tube, approximately 70 µL. 8 Push the calibration vial into the valve as far as possible. 9 Withdraw the vial 1 mm. This prevents damage when you tighten the collar. Figure 17. Removing the EI calibration vial  Calibration vial Collar 4 General Maintenance To Refill the EI Calibration Vial 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 121 10 Turn the collar clockwise to tighten it. The collar should be snug but not overly tight. Do not use a tool to tighten the collar. It does not require that much force. 11 Reinstall the analyzer window cover. 12 Purge the EI calibration valve. (See“To Purge the Calibration Valves” on page 122.) CAUTION Failure to purge the calibration valve will result in damage to the filaments and detector. 4 General Maintenance To Purge the Calibration Valves 122 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Purge the Calibration Valves EI calibration valve After adding new PFTBA to the EI calibration vial, you must purge the air out of the vial and valve. 1 If the vacuum gauge controller is on, turn it off. 2 In Tune and Vacuum Control view, select Purge Calibrant Valve under the Vacuum menu. This will open the EI calibration valve for several minutes with all analyzer voltages turned off. CI calibration valve After adding new PFDTD to the CI calibration vial, you must purge the air out of the vial and valve. 1 If the vacuum gauge controller is on, turn it off. 2 Verify that PCICH4.U is loaded. 3 In Tune and Vacuum Control view, select Purge Calibrant Valve under the Vacuum menu. This will open the CI calibration valve for several minutes with all analyzer voltages turned off. CAUTION After removing a calibration vial, you must purge the calibration valve. Failure to do so will result in damage to the filaments and the electron multiplier. 4 General Maintenance To Remove the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 123 To Remove the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly Materials needed • Screwdriver, Torx T-20 (8710-1615) Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Trace the calibration valve cable to the connector next to the fan, and disconnect it. 3 Loosen the collar, and remove the calibration vial. (See Figure 17 on page 120.) Just loosen the collar, do not remove it. 4 Remove the two screws holding the valve assembly to the top of the analyzer chamber. Do not lose the O-ring under it.  CAUTION Removing the valve with the vial installed can result in liquid calibrant getting into the restrictor of the valve. Liquid in the restrictor will prevent diffusion of PFTBA into the analyzer chamber for tuning. Replace the valve if this happens. 4 General Maintenance To Install the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly 124 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Install the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly Materials needed • Calibration valve • Diffusion (G7077-60211) • Turbo (G7077-60204) • O-ring for calibration valve (0905-1217) • PFTBA (05971-60571) or other tuning compound • Screwdriver, Torx T-20 (8710-1615) Procedure 1 Remove the old valve assembly. (See“To Remove the EI Calibration and Vent Valve Assembly” on page 123 and Figure 17 on page 120.) 2 Ensure the valve O-ring is in place. If it is worn or damaged, replace it. 3 Install the calibration and vent valve assembly, and tighten the screws that hold it in place. 4 Reconnect the calibration valve cable to the connector next to the fan. 5 Remove the vial from the new calibration valve. (See“To Refill the EI Calibration Vial” on page 120.) The valve is supplied with a vial already installed. 6 Fill and reinstall the calibration vial. 7 Pump down the MSD. 8 Purge the calibration valve. (See “To Purge the Calibration Valves” on page 122.)  CAUTION Failure to purge the calibration valve will damage the filaments and detector. 4 General Maintenance To Replace the Fan for the High Vacuum Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 125 To Replace the Fan for the High Vacuum Pump Materials needed Fan (G7005-60564) Screwdriver, Torx T-20 (8710-1615) Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Remove the left side MSD cover. 3 Disconnect the fan wiring from the connector on the MSD frame. (See Figure 18 on page 126.) 4 Remove the four fan screws and the safety grill. Remove the fan. Keep the screws. 5 Install the new fan with the flow arrow on the side pointing toward the pump. The wires should be at the upper left, close to the connector. 6 Add the safety grill and the four screws. Tighten the screws firmly. 7 Connect the fan wiring to the fan connector on the MSD frame. 8 Reinstall the MSD covers. 9 Pump down the MSD.  WARNING Do not touch the high vacuum pump. The pump could still be hot enough to burn you. WARNING Ensure the safety grill that shields the fan blades is in place. 4 General Maintenance To Replace the Fan for the High Vacuum Pump 126 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 18. Replacing the pump fan (DP shown) Fan wiring Fan wiring connector 4 General Maintenance To Remove the Ion Vacuum Gauge 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 127 To Remove the Ion Vacuum Gauge Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Disconnect the cable on the back of the ion vacuum gauge. 3 Unscrew the red plastic thumbnut on the gauge clamp. 4 Remove the long screw from the clamp. 5 While supporting the gauge body, remove the clamp from the mounting flange. 6 Remove the gauge. 7 If you will not be replacing the gauge soon, install the blanking plate provided with the gauge and secure it with the clamp, screw, and thumbnut. To Install an Ion Vacuum Gauge Material needed • KF16 O-ring (0905-1463) Procedure 1 Place the KF16 O-ring in the groove on the analyzer chamber flange. Replace it if it is worn or damaged. 2 Hold the gauge flange against the chamber flange with the O-ring. Push the clamp over both flanges. 3 Insert the long screw, add the thumbnut, and tighten. 4 Attach the communication cable to the back of the gauge and connect the other end to the back of the MS.   4 General Maintenance To Lubricate the Side Plate O-Ring 128 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Lubricate the Side Plate O-Ring Materials needed • Cloths, clean (05980-60051) • Gloves, clean, lint-free • Large (8650-0030) • Small (8650-0029) • Grease, Apiezon L, high vacuum (6040-0289) The side plate O-ring needs a thin coat of grease to ensure a good vacuum seal. If the side plate O-ring appears dry or does not seal correctly, lubricate it using this procedure. A good test is to wipe off the side plate with methanol, then close the analyzer chamber. If the O-ring has enough grease on it, it will leave a faint trace on the side plate. Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Open the analyzer chamber. (See “To Open the Analyzer Chamber” in the 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual.) 3 Use a clean, lint-free cloth or glove to spread a thin coat of high vacuum grease only on the exposed surface of the O-ring. (See Figure 19 on page 129.) CAUTION Vacuum seals other than the side plate O-ring and vent valve O-ring do not need to be lubricated. Lubricating other seals can interfere with their correct function.  WARNING The analyzer, GC/MSD interface, and other components in the analyzer chamber operate at very high temperatures. Do not touch any part until you are sure it is cool. CAUTION Always wear clean gloves to prevent contamination when working in the analyzer chamber. CAUTION Make sure you use an antistatic wrist strap, and take other antistatic precautions before touching analyzer components. 4 General Maintenance To Lubricate the Side Plate O-Ring 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 129 4 Use a clean, lint-free cloth or glove to wipe away excess grease. If the O-ring looks shiny, there is too much grease on it. 5 Close the analyzer chamber. 6 Pump down the MSD. CAUTION Do not use anything except the recommended vacuum grease. Excess grease can trap air and dirt. Grease on the surface of the O-ring other than the exposed surface can trap air, resulting in air spikes during operation. Figure 19. Side plate O-ring Side plate O-ring 4 General Maintenance To Lubricate the Vent Valve O-Ring 130 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Lubricate the Vent Valve O-Ring Materials needed • Cloths, clean (05980-60051) • Gloves, clean, lint-free • Large (8650-0030) • Small (8650-0029) • Grease, Apiezon L, high vacuum (6040-0289) • O-ring, vent valve (0905-1217). Replace if the old O-ring is worn or damaged The vent valve O-ring needs a thin coat of lubrication to ensure a good vacuum seal and smooth operation. If the vent valve O-ring does not turn smoothly or does not seal correctly, lubricate it using this procedure. Procedure 1 Vent the MSD. 2 Completely remove the vent valve knob. (See Figure 20 on page 131.) 3 Inspect the O-ring. If the O-ring appears damaged, replace it. 4 Use a clean, lint-free cloth or glove to spread a thin coat of high vacuum grease on the exposed surface of the O-ring. 5 Use a clean, lint-free cloth or glove to wipe away excess grease. If the O-ring looks shiny, there is too much grease on it CAUTION Vacuum seals other than the side plate O-ring and vent valve O-ring do not need to be lubricated. Lubricating other seals can interfere with their function.  CAUTION Excess grease can trap air and dirt. Grease on surfaces of the O-ring other than the exposed surface can trap air, resulting in air spikes during operation. 4 General Maintenance To Lubricate the Vent Valve O-Ring 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 131 6 Reinstall the vent valve knob. 7 Pump down the MSD. Figure 20. Vent valve O-ring Vent valve knob CAUTION Be very careful when reinstalling the vent valve knob. It is possible to cross thread the knob and damage the threads in the valve body. Ensure the O-ring stays in place. 4 General Maintenance Maintaining the Electronics 132 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Maintaining the Electronics Scheduled maintenance None of the electronic components of the MSD need to be replaced on a regular schedule. None of the electronic components in the MSD need to be adjusted or calibrated on a regular schedule. Avoid unnecessary handling of the MSD electronics. Electronic components Very few of the electronic components are operator serviceable. The primary fuses can be replaced by the operator. The RF coils can be adjusted by the operator. All other maintenance of the electronics should be performed by your Agilent Technologies service representative. Electrostatic precautions All of the printed circuit boards in the MSD contain components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Do not handle or touch these boards unless absolutely necessary. In addition, wires, contacts, and cables can conduct ESD to the printed circuit boards to which they are connected. This is especially true of the mass filter (quadrupole) contact wires which can carry ESD to sensitive components on the side board. ESD damage may not cause immediate failure, but it will gradually degrade the performance and stability of your MSD. When you work on or near printed circuit boards, or when you work on components with wires, contacts, or cables connected to printed circuit boards, always use a grounded antistatic wrist strap and take other antistatic precautions. The wrist strap should be connected to a known good earth ground. WARNING Improper use of these procedures could create a serious safety hazard. Improper use of these procedures could also result in serious damage to, or incorrect operation of, the MSD. WARNING Vent the MSD and disconnect its power cord before performing any of these procedures except adjusting the RF coils. 4 General Maintenance Maintaining the Electronics 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 133 If that is not possible, it should be connected to a conductive (metal) part of the assembly being worked on, but not to electronic components, exposed wires or traces, or pins on connectors. Take extra precautions, such as a grounded antistatic mat, if you must work on components or assemblies that have been removed from the MSD. This includes the analyzer. More information is available More information about the functions of electronic components section is found later in this manual. (See Chapter 8, “Electronics,” starting on page 201.) Most of the procedures in this chapter are illustrated with video clips. CAUTION To be effective, an antistatic wrist strap must fit snugly (not tight). A loose strap provides little or no protection. CAUTION Antistatic precautions are not 100% effective. Handle electronic circuit boards as little as possible and then only by the edges. Never touch the components, exposed traces, or pins on connectors and cables. 4 General Maintenance To Adjust the Quad Frequency 134 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Adjust the Quad Frequency Materials needed • Screwdriver, flat-blade, large (8730-0002) Procedure 1 Ensure the MSD is at thermal equilibrium. It takes at least 2 hours after all heated zones have reached their setpoints for the MSD to reach thermal equilibrium. 2 Open the analyzer cover. 3 Ensure the RF cover on the side board is secure and no screws are missing. A loose RF cover or missing screw can significantly affect coil adjustment. 4 In the Tune and Vacuum Control view, select Optimize Quadrupole Frequency from the Execute menu. 5 Enter an m/z value of 100. 6 Slowly turn the quad frequency adjustment screws to minimize the voltage displayed. (See Figure 21 on page 135.) Turn the adjustment screws alternately. Turn each screw only a little bit at a time. Keep the screws at equal extension. 7 When the voltage is minimized, click Stop.  WARNING Do not remove any other covers. Dangerous voltages are present under these covers. CAUTION Do not use a coin to adjust the screws. If you drop it, it could fall into the electronics fan and cause significant damage. 4 General Maintenance To Adjust the Quad Frequency 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 135 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 for m/z 650. 9 Exit the Optimize Quadrupole Frequency program. 10 Select MS OFF from the Execute menu. 11 Close the analyzer cover. 12 Tune the MSD. Figure 21. Adjusting the quad frequency RF cover Quad frequency adjustment screws 4 General Maintenance To Replace the Primary Fuses 136 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Replace the Primary Fuses Materials needed • Fuse, T12.5A, 250 V (2110-1398) – two required • Screwdriver, flat-blade (8730-0002) The most likely cause of failure of the primary fuses is a problem with the foreline pump. If the primary fuses in your MSD fail, check the foreline pump. Procedure 1 Vent the MSD, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet. If one of the primary fuses has failed, the MSD will already be off, but for safety you should switch off the MSD, and unplug the power cord. It is not necessary to allow air into the analyzer chamber. 2 Turn one of the fuse holders counterclockwise until it pops out. (See Figure 22 on page 137.) The fuse holders are spring loaded. 3 Remove the old fuse from the fuse holder. 4 Install a new fuse in the fuse holder. 5 Reinstall the fuse holder. WARNING Never replace the primary fuses while the MSD is connected to a power source. WARNING If you are using hydrogen as a GC carrier gas, a power failure may allow it to accumulate in the analyzer chamber. In that case, further precautions are required. (See“Hydrogen Safety” on page 22.) 4 General Maintenance To Replace the Primary Fuses 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 137 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the other fuse. Always replace both fuses. 7 Reconnect the MSD power cord to the electrical outlet. 8 Pump down the MSD. Figure 22. Primary fuses (turbo model shown) Primary fuses in holders 4 General Maintenance To Replace the Primary Fuses 138 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 139 5 CI Maintenance To Replace the Methane/Isobutane Gas Purifier 140 To Clean the Reagent Gas Supply Lines 141 To Refill the CI Calibration Vial 142 This chapter describes maintenance procedures and requirements that are unique to 5977B Series MSDs equipped with the Chemical Ionization hardware. 5 CI Maintenance To Replace the Methane/Isobutane Gas Purifier 140 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Replace the Methane/Isobutane Gas Purifier Materials needed • Methane/Isobutane gas purifier (G1999-80410) • Front ferrule for 1/8-inch tubing (5180-4110) • Rear ferrule for 1/8-inch tubing (5180-4116) • Tubing cutter (8710-1709) The methane/isobutane gas purifier needs to be replaced after four tanks of reagent gas. This frequency may vary depending on purity of the gas and care taken in uncapping and installing the gas purifier. A large leak upstream from the gas purifier can quickly exhaust the reduced metal of the oxygen and moisture traps. Procedure 1 To install the methane/isobutane gas purifier, follow the instructions on the label for installation and replacement intervals. 2 Disconnect the fittings on the old filter. 3 Remove the ferrules from the tubing at the outlet of the gas purifier. Using the tubing cutter, cut off the end of the tubing with the ferrules. 4 Install the new filter. 5 Purge the new filter. 6 Cap the old filter and prepare it to be sent for regeneration. See the instructions on the label. CAUTION Do not remove the caps until you are ready to install the gas purifier. Only remove the caps in the gas flow to prevent contamination by air. WARNING Methane is flammable. Extinguish all flames in the area before turning on gas flow.  5 CI Maintenance To Clean the Reagent Gas Supply Lines 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 141 To Clean the Reagent Gas Supply Lines Materials needed • Clean, dry nitrogen • Heat gun • Tubing cutter (8710-1709) Procedure If the reagent gas lines become contaminated, they can be cleaned. 1 Disconnect the reagent gas tubing from the gas supply, the gas purifier, and the MSD. 2 Cap the gas purifier following the instructions on the label. 3 Connect one end of the tubing to a supply of clean, dry nitrogen and turn on the gas flow. 4 Use the heat gun to warm the tubing, starting at the supply end and working your way to the free end. 5 Repeat for any other pieces of tubing that need to be cleaned. 6 Reconnect the tubing to the gas supply, gas purifier, and MSD. Follow the instructions on the gas purifier label. WARNING Do not heat the gas tubing when reagent gas is flowing. CAUTION Do not put liquids into the tubing. Do not heat the tubing when it is connected to the MSD. 5 CI Maintenance To Refill the CI Calibration Vial 142 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Refill the CI Calibration Vial Materials needed • PFDTD calibrant (8500-8510) Procedure 1 Set the reagent gas flow to Gas Off. 2 Vent the MSD. 3 Remove the capillary column from the GC/MSD interface. 4 Pull the MSD away from the GC to expose the calibration vial and valve. See“To Separate the MSD from an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 89. 5 Loosen the calibration vial collar by turning it counterclockwise. Do not remove the collar. 6 Remove the calibration vial. See Figure 23 on page 143. 7 Fill the vial no higher than the bottom of the internal tube with fresh PFDTD calibrant (8500-8510). 8 Replace the vial and tighten the collar. 9 Reposition the MSD next to the GC. See “To Reconnect the MSD to an 8890 or 7890 GC” on page 93. 10 Reinstall the capillary column. 11 Pump down the MSD. 12 Purge the calibration valve. See“To Purge the Calibration Valves” on page 122.  CAUTION Do not rinse the vial with any solvents. Never expose the inside of the vial to chlorinated solvents or isopropyl alcohol or water — this will result in severe loss of CI sensitivity. CAUTION After removing the calibrant vial, you must purge the calibration valve. Failure to do so will result in severe contamination of the ion source and damage to the filament and electron multiplier. 5 CI Maintenance To Refill the CI Calibration Vial 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 143 Figure 23. CI calibration valve and vial Calibration valve Calibration vial Collar 5 CI Maintenance To Refill the CI Calibration Vial 144 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 145 6 Vacuum System Overview 146 Vacuum System Components 147 Common Vacuum System Problems 148 Foreline Pump 149 High Vacuum Pump 152 Analyzer Chamber 153 Side Plate 154 Vacuum Seals 157 Face seals 157 KF (NW) seals 157 Compression seals 158 High voltage feedthrough seal 158 Foreline Gauge 159 Diffusion Pump and Fan 160 Turbo Pump and Fan 166 Calibration Valves and Vent Valve 167 Micro-Ion Vacuum Gauge 170 This chapter describes components of the MSD vacuum system. 6 Vacuum System Overview 146 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Overview The vacuum system creates the high vacuum (low pressure) required for the MSD to operate. Without the vacuum, the molecular mean free path would be very short and ions would collide with air molecules before they could reach the detector. Operation at high pressures also would damage analyzer components. The 5977B Series MSDs use two vacuum pumps to obtain the vacuum levels needed. One of two foreline pumps (standard or dry) creates a low vacuum, then a high vacuum pump engages to create the vacuum needed for operation. The 5977B Series MSD uses one of two kinds of high vacuum pumps: a diffusion pump or a turbomolecular pump. The pump type determines the maximum column flow supported by the MSD. The 5977B HES Series MSD model G7079B uses a turbomolecular (turbo) pump for high vacuum. It has a maximum column flow rate of 4.0 mL/min. Most vacuum system operation is automated. Operator interaction is through the data system or control panel. Monitor the vacuum system through the data system or GC control panel. Table 10 Recommended maximum flow rates by model Model number Description Maximum recommended column flow G7080B Diffusion pump, EI 1.5 mL/min G7077B Turbo pump, EI 4.0 mL/min G7078B Turbo pump, EI 4.0 mL/min G7081B Turbo pump, EI 4.0 mL/min G7079B Turbo pump, EI HES 4.0 mL/min 6 Vacuum System Vacuum System Components 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 147 Vacuum System Components The parts of the vacuum system are identified in Figure 24. • Foreline (rough) pump • High vacuum pump (diffusion or turbo pump) • Analyzer chamber • Side plate (analyzer door), and front and rear end plates • Vacuum seals • Calibration valve(s) and vent valve • Vacuum control electronics • Vacuum gauges and gauge control electronics Each of these is discussed in more detail in this chapter. Figure 24. Vacuum system components (MSD with turbo pump shown) High vacuum High vacuum Analyzer GC/MSD Ion vacuum gauge (if present) CI flow control Vent valve cooling fan pump pump interface chamber (not shown) 6 Vacuum System Common Vacuum System Problems 148 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Common Vacuum System Problems Air leak symptoms The most common problems associated with any vacuum system are air leaks. Symptoms of air leaks include: • Loud gurgling noise from the foreline pump (very large leak) • Inability of the turbo pump to reach 95% speed • High foreline pressure in diffusion pump MSDs • Higher than normal high vacuum gauge controller readings The 5977B Series MSD will not pump down successfully unless you press on the side plate (analyzer door) when you turn on the MSD power. Continue to press until the sound from the foreline pump becomes quieter. Pumpdown failure shutdown The system will shut down both the high vacuum and the foreline pump if the system fails to pump down correctly. Two conditions that trigger shutdown are: • Diffusion pump MSDs, shutdown occurs if the foreline pressure is above 300 mTorr after 7 minutes. • Turbo pump MSDs speed below 80% after 7 minutes. This is usually because of a large air leak: either the side plate has not sealed correctly or the vent valve is still open. This feature helps prevent the foreline pump from sucking air through the system, which can damage the analyzer and pump. To restart the MSD, find and correct the air leak, then switch the power off and on. Press on the side plate when turning on the MSD power to ensure a good seal. 6 Vacuum System Foreline Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 149 Foreline Pump The foreline pump reduces the pressure in the analyzer chamber so the high vacuum pump can operate. It also pumps away the gas load from the high vacuum pump. The foreline pump is connected to the high vacuum pump by a 130-cm hose called the foreline hose. There are four different types of foreline pumps, the Pfeiffer DUO (Figure 25), the MVP-070-3 (Figure 26 on page 150), the MVP-070-3C (not shown), and the IDP3 (Figure 27 on page 150). The dry foreline pumps are not supported with diffusion pump base MSDs. Figure 25. Pfeiffer Duo foreline pump Hose to vacuum pump Ballast control Fill cap Exhaust outlet Power switch Oil level window with oil mist filter Drain plug (on front) 6 Vacuum System Foreline Pump 150 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 26. MVP-070-3 dry foreline pump Exhaust outlet Power switch Hose to vacuum pump Figure 27. IDP3 dry foreline pump Power cord Exhaust filter CAUTION Agilent does not recommend using hydrogen as a carrier gas on systems equipped with an IDP3 dry foreline pump. 6 Vacuum System Foreline Pump 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 151 The standard foreline pump is a two-stage rotary-vane pump. An optional dry pump is also available. The pump turns on when the MSD power is turned on. The foreline pump has a built-in antisuckback valve to help prevent backstreaming in the event of a power failure. The foreline pump can be placed under the analyzer chamber at the rear of the MSD (with the exhaust outlet to the rear) or on the floor below the MSD. An oil mist filter is available for the standard pump that can be used to filter pump oil out of the foreline pump exhaust. This filter stops only pump oil. Do not use the filter if you are analyzing toxic chemicals or using toxic solvents or if you have a CI MSD. Instead, install an 11-mm id hose to remove the exhaust from your lab. A window (sight glass) in the front of the standard foreline pump shows the level of the foreline pump oil. There are two marks next to the window. The level of the pump oil should never be above the upper mark or below the lower mark. If the level of pump oil is near the lower mark, add foreline pump oil. The oil pan under the foreline pump can be a fire hazard (standard pump) Oily rags, paper towels, and similar absorbents in the oil pan could ignite and damage the pump and other parts of the MSD. WARNING The oil mist filter supplied with the standard foreline pump stops only foreline pump oil. It does not trap or filter out toxic chemicals. If you are using toxic solvents or analyzing toxic chemicals, remove the oil trap. Do not use the filter if you have a CI MSD. Install a hose to take the foreline pump exhaust outside or to a fume hood. CAUTION Do not place the foreline pump near any equipment that is sensitive to vibration. CAUTION The ballast control knob controls the amount of air allowed into the pump. Keep the ballast control closed (fully clockwise) at all times, except when ballasting the pump. WARNING Combustible materials (or flammable/nonflammable wicking material) placed under, over, or around the foreline (roughing) pump constitutes a fire hazard. Keep the pan clean, but do not leave absorbent material such as paper towels in it. 6 Vacuum System High Vacuum Pump 152 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual High Vacuum Pump Diffusion pump system The diffusion pump supports a maximum flow rate of 1.5 mL/min into the MSD. The diffusion pump uses baffling to prevent vapor from migrating into the analyzer chamber. Foreline pressure is monitored by the foreline gauge. The AC board controls the diffusion pump heater. Turbo pump system The 5977B Series MSD supports a turbo pump. The turbo pump has a screen to keep debris out of the pump, but no baffle is necessary. Pump speed is controlled by the turbo controller; there is no foreline gauge. 6 Vacuum System Analyzer Chamber 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 153 Analyzer Chamber The analyzer chamber (Figure 28) is where the analyzer operates. The manifold is extruded and machined from an aluminum alloy. Large openings in the side, front, and rear of the analyzer chamber are closed by plates. O-rings provide the seals between the plates and the manifold. Ports in the manifold and the plates provide attachment points for the Micro-Ion vacuum gauge, calibration valve, vent valve, GC/MSD interface, and high vacuum pump. Diffusion pump version The diffusion pump attaches, with a KF50 seal, to a baffle adapter that is clamped to the bottom of the manifold. A vapor baffle helps prevent migration of pump fluid vapor into the manifold. Cooling fins on the bottom of the manifold keep the baffle cool so the vapor will condense on it. Turbo pump version The turbo pump and the mounting bracket for the turbo controller are clamped directly to the manifold. Figure 28. Analyzer chamber Vacuum gauge baffle GC/MSD interface To high vacuum pump Calibration and vent valves Analyzer window Side plate O-ring 6 Vacuum System Side Plate 154 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Side Plate The side plate for the HES version (See Figure 29 on page 155) or the non-HES version (See Figure 30 on page 156) covers the large opening in the side of the analyzer chamber. It is attached to the manifold with a hinge. The analyzer assembly is attached to the side plate inside the analyzer chamber. The hinge allows the side plate to swing away from the manifold for easy access to the analyzer. Several electrical feedthroughs are built into the side plate. Wires connect the feedthroughs to analyzer components. The electronic side board is mounted on the atmospheric side of the side plate. Thumbscrews are located at each end of the side plate. CAUTION Fasten both side plate thumbscrews for shipping or storage only. For normal operation, both thumbscrews should be loose. For operation with hydrogen carrier gas, or with flammable or explosive CI reagent gases, the front thumbscrew should be fastened just finger-tight. Overtightening will warp the side plate and cause air leaks. Do not use a tool to tighten the side plate thumbscrews. CAUTION When you turn on the power to pump down the MSD, press on the side board to ensure a good seal. 6 Vacuum System Side Plate 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 155 Figure 29. Side plate feedthroughs (HES version) High voltage (HED) Detector focus Ion source and heater Mass Filter (quadrupole) Signal (detector output) EM voltage PE1, PE2, and Ext feedthroughs 6 Vacuum System Side Plate 156 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 30. Side plate feedthroughs (non-HES version) High voltage (HED) Detector focus Ion source and heater Mass filter (quadrupole) Screws for radiator mounting brackets Signal (detector output) EM voltage (2 of 4) 6 Vacuum System Vacuum Seals 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 157 Vacuum Seals Vacuum seals are shown in Figure 31 on page 158. Several types of Viton elastomer O-ring seals are used to prevent air leaks into the analyzer chamber. All these O-rings, and the surfaces to which they seal, must be kept clean and protected from nicks and scratches. A single hair, piece of lint, or scratch can produce a serious vacuum leak. Two of the O-rings, the side plate O-ring and the vent valve O-ring, are lightly lubricated with Apiezon-L vacuum grease. Face seals A face seal is an O-ring that fits in a shallow groove. The sealing surface is usually a flat plate. The manifold side plate and end plate O-rings fit into grooves around the large openings in the analyzer chamber. The side plate swings into place against the side plate O-ring, and must be held in place when the MSD is turned on for pump down to ensure a good seal. The front and rear end plates are screwed onto the manifold and should not need to be removed. The GC/MSD interface fastens to the manifold with three screws. The calibration valve assembly is fastened onto the front end plate by two screws. The vent valve knob threads into the front end plate. Small O-rings in grooves in the front end plate provide vacuum seals. The diffusion pump baffle adapter has a groove for its O-ring. The baffle adapter is clamped to the manifold with four claw grips. KF (NW) seals Most of the seals for the high vacuum pumps, foreline gauge, and foreline pump are KF seals. KF seals have an O-ring supported by a centering ring. The centering ring can be either on the inside or outside of the O-ring. The clamp presses two flanges against the O-ring, making a seal. KF clamps must not be overtightened. 6 Vacuum System Vacuum Seals 158 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Compression seals A compression fitting consists of a threaded fitting on the analyzer chamber and a threaded collar with a ferrule and O-ring. A cylindrical part fits inside the collar. Tightening the collar presses the ferrule, compressing the O-ring around the part. The calibration vials use compression seals. High voltage feedthrough seal The high voltage (HED) feedthrough seal is an O-ring that is compressed against the side plate by a threaded collar. Figure 31. Vacuum seals Side plate O-ring seal KF seal with internal centering ring KF seal with external centering ring Compression seal (clamp not shown) (clamp not shown) 6 Vacuum System Foreline Gauge 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 159 Foreline Gauge The foreline gauge monitors the pressure (vacuum) at the exit of the diffusion pump. The primary function of the foreline gauge is diffusion pump control. When the foreline pump has reduced the pressure in the analyzer chamber to below 300 mTorr (0.3 Torr), the diffusion pump is automatically switched on. If the foreline pressure rises above 400 mTorr (0.4 Torr), the AC board switches off the diffusion pump heater and the analyzer electronics. Monitor the foreline pressure from the data system or the LCP. The foreline gauge is used only with diffusion pump MSDs. 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 160 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Diffusion Pump and Fan The diffusion pump in the MSD is an air-cooled vapor diffusion pump with 90 L/s capacity. It mounts with a KF50 fitting to a baffle adapter clamped to the bottom of the analyzer chamber. The diffusion pump has a cylindrical body surrounded by fins to help dissipate heat. Its inlet is open to the interior of the analyzer chamber, through the adapter and baffle. A structure called the stack is located at the center of the pump body. An electric heater is located at the bottom of the stack. See Figure 32 on page 160 and Figure 33 on page 161 . Figure 32. Diffusion pump with fan 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 161 The diffusion pump transports gas by momentum transfer. The heater boils a special fluid (a polyphenyl ether) inside the stack. As the vapor pressure increases, the pump fluid vapor is forced out and downward through nozzles in the stack. The vapor forced out of these nozzles strikes the gas molecules that are present. This forces the gas molecules down toward the outlet near the bottom of the pump. Another nozzle in the stack points directly at the outlet, and forces the gas molecules out. The vapor condenses on the sides of the pump, and the liquid drains down to the bottom. The liquid is boiled again, and is reused continuously. Figure 33. Diffusion pump parts Foreline gauge assembly Foreline gauge cable – part of high vacuum control cable Diffusion pump outlet KF10/16 seal Foreline hose and hose clamp KF10/16 clamp 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 162 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual A cooling fan is located between the diffusion pump and the front cover of the MSD. The fan draws air through the cover and blows it over the pump. Without this cooling, the pump fluid vapor would not condense correctly, and would diffuse into the analyzer chamber. The foreline pump is connected by the foreline hose to the outlet of the diffusion pump. It removes the gas molecules that reach the outlet. The diffusion pump operation is controlled by the AC board. The AC board automatically turns on the diffusion pump heater as soon as the foreline pump lowers the pressure in the analyzer chamber below approximately 300 mTorr (0.3 Torr). Until the foreline pressure drops below 300 mTorr, the diffusion pump heater will not turn on. If the pressure does not drop below 300 mTorr within 7 minutes of turning the MSD on, the foreline pump will shut off. During operation, if the foreline pressure rises above 400 mTorr, the diffusion pump heater will turn off. The AC board allows the analyzer electronics to turn on when the diffusion pump is hot. The diffusion pump typically maintains an indicated pressure below 1.0 × 10-4 Torr for GC helium carrier gas flows up to 2 mL/min. High vacuum (manifold) pressure can only be measured if your MSD is equipped with the optional gauge controller. The small size of the diffusion pump allows it to heat up and cool down quickly. This simplifies pumpdown and venting. From initial power-on, the system can pump down to operating pressure in approximately 15 minutes. If the power fails, the diffusion pump fluid stops boiling before the analyzer chamber pressure begins to rise significantly. This helps prevent back diffusion of pump fluid into the analyzer chamber. Your data system has pumpdown and venting programs to guide you through these procedures. Follow the instruction carefully. Two thermal switches monitor diffusion pump operational readiness. See Table 11. Table 11 Diffusion pump thermal switches Thermal switch Too cold Too hot Normal state Normally open Normally closed Changes at 170 °C rising; 140 °C falling 365 °C rising Function Keeps analyzer turned off until the pump is hot enough to for adequate vacuum. Prevents analyzer damage Shuts off diffusion pump and analyzer if the pump overheats. Prevents damage to the pump and analyzer. 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 163 Check the condition and level of the diffusion pump fluid through the window (sight glass) near the base of the front of the pump. See Figure 34 on page 164. If the level drops below the appropriate marker (there are separate ranges for hot and cold conditions) or if the fluid turns dark brown or black, replace the fluid. Otherwise, replace the fluid once a year. Message The high vacuum pump is not ready Difficulty with the high vacuum pump What it means Normal during pumpdown Always indicates a problem What to do Wait for pump to heat up Check the level and conditions of the fluid. Make sure pump is cool, and power-cycle MSD to reset. Table 11 Diffusion pump thermal switches (continued) 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 164 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 34. The diffusion pump Inlet Cooling fins Too cold sensor Too hot sensor Diffusion pump outlet Cold fluid level marker Diffusion pump heater cable Hot fluid level marker Fluid level window 6 Vacuum System Diffusion Pump and Fan 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 165 Diffusion pump fluid that is exposed to air at operating temperature will break down and turn dark brown or black. This reaction is called cracking. Cracked pump fluid gives two symptoms: higher manifold pressure and high background with a large peak at m/z 446. See also • “Maintaining the Vacuum System” on page 88. • The troubleshooting sections of the MSD Data Acquisition online help. 6 Vacuum System Turbo Pump and Fan 166 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Turbo Pump and Fan The turbo pump is clamped directly to the bottom of the analyzer chamber. The turbo pump has a cylindrical body with its inlet open to the interior of the analyzer chamber. Inside the pump body is a central shaft or cylinder. Sets of small blades (airfoils) radiate from the central shaft. The shaft spins at up to 60,000 revolutions per minute (rpm) in the turbo pump. Turbo pumps move gas by momentum transfer. The turbine blades are angled so that when they strike a gas molecule it is deflected downward. Each set of blades pushes the gas molecules further down toward the pump outlet. The foreline pump is connected by a hose to the outlet of the turbo pump. It removes the gas molecules that reach the outlet. A controller regulates current to the pump and monitors pump motor speed and temperature. A cooling fan is located between the turbo pump and the front panel of the MSD. The fan draws air from outside the MSD and blows it over the pump. The turbo pump automatically turns on when the MSD power is switched on. The system allows the analyzer to be turned on when the turbo pump is greater than 80% speed, but the pump normally operates at 100% speed. Turbo pump MSDs typically maintain an indicated pressure below 8 × 10-5 Torr for helium column flows up to 4 mL/minute for the performance turbo pump, and up to 2 mL/minute for the standard turbo pump. Pressure (vacuum) can only be measured if your MSD is equipped with the optional gauge controller. The turbo pump spins up (starts) and spins down (stops) quickly. This simplifies pumpdown and venting. From initial power-on, the system can pump down to operating pressure in 5 to 10 minutes. See Also • “To pump down the MSD in the Operating Manual” in the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual • “To vent the MSD” in the Agilent 5977B Series MSD Operating Manual • “Turbo pump control” on page 207 6 Vacuum System Calibration Valves and Vent Valve 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 167 Calibration Valves and Vent Valve Calibration valves A calibration valve (See Figure 35 on page 168) is an electromechanical valve with a vial to hold the tuning compound. When a calibration valve is opened, tuning compound in the vial diffuses into the ion source. EI MSDs have one calibration valve; CI MSDs have a second calibration valve for the CI tuning compound. The valves are controlled by the MSD Data Acquisition software. EI calibration valve The EI calibration valve is held onto the top of the analyzer chamber by two screws. A small O-ring provides a face seal. The diffusion pump has a calibration valve with less restriction than that in the turbo MSD; this allows the correct diffusion of calibrant for each vacuum system. Perfluorotributylamine (PFTBA) is the most commonly used tuning compound for EI operation. PFTBA is required for automatic tuning of the MSD. Other compounds can be used for manual tuning. CI calibration valve The CI tuning compound is perfluoro-5,8-dimethyl-3,6,9-trioxidodecane (PFDTD). The CI calibration valve is part of the reagent gas flow control module. It is controlled by the Data Acquisition software. It opens automatically during CI autotune or manual tuning, allowing PFDTD to diffuse through the GC/MSD interface and into the ion source. Vent valve The vent valve knob (See Figure 36 on page 169) screws into a threaded port in the front of the calibration valve. An O-ring is compressed between the knob and the valve to form a seal. The threaded end of the knob has an air passage inside it, allowing air to flow into the manifold when the knob is partially unscrewed. If you turn the knob too far, the O-ring can come out of its slot. 6 Vacuum System Calibration Valves and Vent Valve 168 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 35. Calibration valves EI calibration valve EI calibration vial Vent valve knob CI calibration valve CI calibration vial EI calibration above analyzer window CI calibration right side of MSD 6 Vacuum System Calibration Valves and Vent Valve 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 169 Figure 36. Vent valve Vent valve knob O-ring Air passage Valve closed Valve open Valve open too far 6 Vacuum System Micro-Ion Vacuum Gauge 170 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Micro-Ion Vacuum Gauge The G3397B Micro-Ion vacuum gauge is standard on CI MSDs and optional on EI MSDs. It consists of the sensing element (an ionization-type gauge) and the necessary electronics to support it. Both parts are mounted in a single package. The ionization gauge creates a current when energized electrons collide with gas molecules. The electronics provide the voltages required, measure the current produced, and produce an output signal that is used by the MSD software. The Micro-Ion vacuum gauge mounts on the end of the analyzer chamber and is open to it. This allows you to monitor chamber pressure in daily operation and in troubleshooting. The gauge is calibrated for nitrogen (N2). The carrier gas is usually helium, which does not ionize as readily as nitrogen. Therefore, the indicated pressure for helium is approximately six times lower than the absolute pressure. For example, a reading of 2.0 × 10-5 Torr versus an absolute pressure of 1.2 × 10-4 Torr. In a CI MSD, the indicated pressure reflects the contribution of both the carrier gas and the reagent gas. The distinction between indicated and absolute pressure is not important for normal operation of the MSD. Of greater concern are changes in pressure from hour to hour or day to day. These changes can indicate air leaks or other problems with the vacuum system. All the pressures listed in this manual are indicated pressures for helium carrier gas. The gauge controller setpoints are also indicated pressures. 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 171 7 Analyzer Overview 172 EI Ion Source 175 HES EI Ion Source 182 CI Ion Source 185 Filaments 188 Other Source Elements 190 Magnet 190 Repeller 190 Drawout plate and cylinder 190 Ion focus 191 Entrance lens 191 Quadrupole Mass Filter 192 AMU gain 193 AMU offset 193 219 width 193 DC polarity 194 Mass (axis) gain 194 Mass (axis) offset 194 Quadrupole maintenance 194 Detector 195 Detector ion focus 195 High energy dynode 195 EM horn 195 Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 197 7 Analyzer Overview 172 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Overview The analyzer with an XTR source (See Figure 38 on page 174) or the analyzer with a HES (See Figure 43 on page 183) is the heart of the MSD. It ionizes the sample, filters the ions, and detects them. The sample components exiting the GC column flow into the ion source. In the ion source, the sample molecules are ionized and fragmented. The resulting ions are repelled from the ion source into the quadrupole mass filter. The mass filter allows selected ions to pass through the filter and strike the detector. The detector generates a signal current proportional to the number of ions striking it. The analyzer is attached to the vacuum side of the side plate. The side plate is hinged for easy access. The ion source and the mass filter are independently heated. Each is mounted inside a radiator for correct heat distribution. Each of the parts of the analyzer is discussed in the following material. The analyzer has four basic components The analyzer consists of the following components (See Figure 38 on page 174) or (See Figure 37 on page 173): • Ion source • Mass filter • Detector • Heaters and radiators 7 Analyzer Overview 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 173 Figure 37. The analyzer with an HES Feedthrough board Mass filter heater assembly Detector Ion source (inside radiator) Mass filter (inside radiator) 7 Analyzer Overview 174 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 38. The analyzer with an XTR source Detector Mass filter contact cable Mass filter heater assembly Feedthrough board Mass filter contact Ion source (inside radiator) Mass filter (inside radiator) 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 175 EI Ion Source The EI ion source (See Figure 39 on page 176) operates by electron ionization. The sample enters the ion source from the GC/MSD interface. Electrons emitted by a filament enter the ionization chamber, guided by a magnetic field. The high-energy electrons interact with the sample molecules, ionizing and fragmenting them. The positive voltage on the repeller pushes the positive ions into the lens stack, where they pass through several electrostatic lenses. These lenses concentrate the ions into a tight beam, which is directed into the mass filter. Ion source body The ion source body (See Figure 39 on page 176 and Figure 40 on page 177) is a cylinder. It holds the other parts of the ion source, including the lens stack. With the repeller, and in the SST/Inert ion source, the drawout plate, it forms the ionization chamber. The ionization chamber is the space where the ions are formed. Slots in the source body help the vacuum system to pump away carrier gas and unionized sample molecules or fragments. 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 176 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 39. SST/Inert ion source structure Entrance lens Filament Drawout cylinder Drawout plate Repeller Ion focus lens Lens insulation 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 177 Figure 40. Extractor ion source structure Entrance lens Filament Extractor lens Ceramic insulator Repeller Ion focus lens Lens insulation 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 178 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 41. SST/Inert ion source 1 2 8* 15 14 2* 2* 16 8* 12* 10 2* 8* 8* 7* 17 18 3 8 8 7 12 13 4 6 5 11 9 Table 12 Parts list for the standard or inert EI ion source (Figure 41 on page 178) Item number Item description Part number (SSL) Part number (Inert) 1 Gold plated set screw G1999-20022 G1999-20022 2 Gold plated screw G3870-20021 G3870-20021 3 Interface socket G1099-20136 G1099-20136 4 Source body G1099-20130 G2589-20043 5 Drawout cylinder G1072-20008 G1072-20008 6 Drawout plate 05971-20134 G2589-20100 7 Filament G7005-60061 G7005-60061 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 179 8 Spring washer 3050-1374 3050-1374 8 Flat washer 3050-0982 3050-0982 9 Lens insulator G3170-20530 G3170-20530 10 Entrance lens G3170-20126 G3170-20126 11 Ion focus lens 05971-20143 05971-20143 12 Repeller insulator G1099-20133 G1099-20133 13 Repeller G3870-60172 G3870-60173 14 Flat washer 3050-0627 3050-0627 15 Belleville spring washer 3050-1301 3050-1301 16 Repeller nut 0535-0071 0535-0071 17 Source heater block assembly G3870-60180 G3870-60179 18 Repeller block insert G3870-20135 G3870-20125 Table 12 Parts list for the standard or inert EI ion source (Figure 41 on page 178) (continued) Item number Item description Part number (SSL) Part number (Inert) 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 180 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 42. Extractor ion source Table 13 Parts list for extractor ion source (Figure 42 on page 180) Item number Item description Part number 1 Setscrews G3870-20446 2 Screws G3870-20021 3 Source body G3870-20440 4 Extractor lens G3870-20444 5 Extractor lens insulator G3870-20445 6 Filament G7005-60061 7 Spring washer 3050-1301 7 Analyzer EI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 181 The CI ion source is similar in design, but critical dimensions are different. Do not interchange parts. 7 Flat washer 3050-0982 8 Lens insulator G3870-20530 9 Entrance lens assembly, Extended G7000-20026 10 Ion focus lens 05971-20143 11 Repeller insulator G1099-20133 12 Repeller G3870-60171 13 Flat washer 3050-0891 14 Belleville spring washer 3050-1301 15 Repeller nut 0535-0071 16 Source heater block assembly G3870-60177 17 Insert, Repeller block G3870-20135 Table 13 Parts list for extractor ion source (Figure 42 on page 180) (continued) Item number Item description Part number 7 Analyzer HES EI Ion Source 182 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual HES EI Ion Source The HES EI ion source operates by electron impact ionization. The sample enters the ion source from the GC/MSD interface. Electrons emitted by a filament enter the ionization chamber, guided by a magnetic field. The high-energy electrons interact with the sample molecules, ionizing and fragmenting them. The positive voltage on the repeller pushes the positive ions into the lens stack, where they pass through several electrostatic lenses. These lenses concentrate the ions into a tight beam, directed into the mass filter. Ion source body The ion source body is a cylinder. It holds the other parts of the ion source, including the lens stack. The repeller, source mount, and filament block form the ionization chamber. The ionization chamber is the space where the ions are formed. Slots in the source body help the vacuum system to pump away carrier gas and un-ionized sample molecules or fragments. 7 Analyzer HES EI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 183 Figure 43. HES ion source 1 2 8 16 17 15 9 4 3 11 10 6 5 7 13 12 14 8 12 Table 14 Parts list for HES EI ion source Item number Item description Part number 1 Source finger grip G7002-20008 2 Filament block G7002-20019 3 Extractor lens (5)* , with 3 mm opening G7004-20061 4 Ceramic insulator for extractor G7002-20064 5 Entrance lens assembly, Extended, HES (1)* G7004-20065 6 Ion focus lens (2)* G7004-20068 7 Lens insulator/holder G7002-20074 7 Analyzer HES EI Ion Source 184 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 8 M2 x 0.4 screw x 12 mm long gold plated screw G7002-20083 9 Source body G7002-20084 10 Post extractor lens 2 (3)* G7004-20090 11 Post extractor lens 1 (4)* G7004-20004 12 M2 x 6 mm gold plated screw G7002-20109 13 Locking ring lens insulator G7002-20126 14 High efficiency dual filament G7002-60001 15 Ring heater/sensor assembly G7002-60043 16 Source mount 1.5 mm G7002-60053 17 Repeller assembly G7002-67057 * The number in parenthesis is the number engraved on the lens Table 14 Parts list for HES EI ion source (continued) Item number Item description Part number 7 Analyzer CI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 185 CI Ion Source The CI ion source is similar in shape to the traditional EI ion source, but only has one part in common with the EI ion source — the entrance lens. The single CI filament has a straight wire and a reflector. A “dummy” filament provides connections for the other wires. The holes in the ion source (electron-entrance and ion-exit) are very small (0.5 mm), making it possible to pressurize the ionization chamber. Both the source body and the plate are at repeller potential, electrically isolated from the radiator and the interface tip. The seal for the interface tip (Figure 45 on page 186) ensures a leak-tight seal and electrical isolation between the CI interface and ion source. Ion source body Figure 44. CI ion source structure Entrance lens Filament Drawout cylinder Drawout plate Dummy filament Ion focus lens Lens insulation Repeller 7 Analyzer CI Ion Source 186 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 45. Interface tip seal Interface tip seal Figure 46. CI ion source 15 16 7 Analyzer CI Ion Source 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 187 Table 15 Parts list for the CI ion source (Figure 46 on page 186) Item number Item description Part number 1 Setscrew G1999-20022 2 Filament screw G1999-20021 Not shown CI interface tip seal G3870-20542 4 CI repeller insulator G1999-20433 5 CI lens insulator G3170-20540 6 CI drawout cylinder G1999-20444 7 CI drawout plate G1999-20446 8 CI ion source heater block assembly G3870-60415 9 Entrance lens G3170-20126 10 CI ion source body G3170-20430 11 CI ion focus lens G1999-20443 12 CI repeller G7077-20432 13 CI filament G7005-60072 14 Dummy filament G1999-60454 15 Curved washer 3050-1374 16 Flat washer 3050-9082 7 Analyzer Filaments 188 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Filaments For an HES two filaments are located within the ion source mount of the EI ion source. For a non-HES, two filaments are located on opposite sides of the outside of the EI ion source. The active filament carries an adjustable AC emission current. The emission current heats the filament causing it to emit electrons which ionize the sample molecules. In addition, both filaments have an adjustable DC bias voltage. The bias voltage determines the energy on the electrons, usually –70 eV for a non-HES source and 120eV for the HES. The CI ion source has only one filament of a different design from the standard or extractor EI filaments. A dummy filament provides connections for the Filament 2 wire. The filament is shut off automatically if there is a general instrument shutdown. Three parameters affect the filaments: filament selection (Filament), filament emission (Emission) current, and electron energy (EIEnrgy). Filament selection The filament selection parameter (Filament) selects which filament in the ion source is active. In the CI ion source, it is always Filament 1. Sometimes, one EI filament will give better performance than the other does. To select the better of the two filaments, run two autotunes, one with each filament. Use the filament that gives the best results. Emission current The filament emission current (Emission) is variable between 0 and 315 µA, but should be set to the software default for normal operation. Electron energy The electron energy (EIEnrgy) is the amount of energy on the ionizing electrons. It is determined by the bias voltage; –70 VDC bias on the filament causes emitted electrons to possess –70 eV (electron volts). This value is adjustable from –5 to –241 VDC, but for normal operation, set this parameter to 70 for a non-HES source and 120 for the HES. 7 Analyzer Filaments 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 189 Filament care Similar to the filaments in incandescent light bulbs, the ion source filaments will eventually burn out. Certain practices reduce the chance of early failure: • If you have an optional G3397B Micro-Ion vacuum gauge, use it to verify that the system has an adequate vacuum before turning on the analyzer, especially after any maintenance was performed. • If you are controlling your MSD from the Manual Tune screen, always select MSOff before changing any of the filament parameters. • When setting up data acquisition parameters, set the solvent delay so that the analyzer will not turn on while the solvent peak is eluting. • When the software prompts Override solvent delay? at the beginning of a run, always select NO. • Higher emission current reduces filament life. • Higher electron energy reduces filament life. • Leaving the filament on for short times (≤1 minute) during data acquisition reduces filament life. 7 Analyzer Other Source Elements 190 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Other Source Elements Magnet The field created by the magnet directs the electrons emitted by the filament into and across the ionization chamber. The HES magnet assembly is a permanent magnet with a charge of 650 gauss in the center of the field. The non-HES and CI source magnet assembly is a permanent magnet with a charge of 350 gauss in the center of the field. Repeller The repeller forms one wall of the ionization chamber. A positive charge on the repeller pushes positively-charged ions out of the source through a series of lenses. The repeller voltage is also known as the ion energy, although the ions only receive about 20% of the repeller energy. The repeller voltage can be varied from 0 to +42.8 VDC. Some tune programs use a fixed repeller voltage. Others ramp the repeller voltage to find the optimum setting. • Setting repeller voltage too low results in poor sensitivity and poor high mass response. • Setting repeller voltage too high results in precursors (poor mass filtering) and poor low mass resolution. Drawout plate and cylinder The drawout plate forms another wall of the ionization chamber. The ion beam passes through the hole in the drawout plate and into the drawout cylinder. The drawout cylinder is slotted. The slots correspond to slots in the source body. These slots allow carrier gas and unionized sample molecules or fragments to be pulled away by the vacuum system. The drawout plate and drawout cylinder are both at ground potential. These are used in the standard, inert, and CI ion sources only. Extractor lens A voltage is applied to the extractor lens to increase ion focusing through the source. 7 Analyzer Other Source Elements 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 191 HES Post extractor lens 1 and 2 The post extractor lenses are part of the lens stack in the EI HES source only. A voltage is applied to the two lenses to increase ion focusing through the source. Ion focus The voltage on the ion focus lens can be varied from 0 to –127 VDC. A typical voltage is between –70 and –90 VDC. In general: • Increasing the ion focus voltage improves sensitivity at lower masses. • Decreasing the ion focus voltage improves sensitivity at higher masses. • Incorrect ion focus adjustment results in poor high mass response. Entrance lens The entrance lens is at the entrance to the quadrupole mass filter. This lens minimizes the fringing fields of the quadrupole which discriminate against high-mass ions. Entrance lens offset The entrance lens offset (EntOff) controls the fixed voltage applied to the entrance lens. It can be varied from 0 to –64 VDC (–20 V is typical). Increasing the entrance lens offset generally increases the abundance of ions at low masses without substantially decreasing the abundance of high mass ions. Entrance lens gain Entrance lens gain (EntLens) controls the variable voltage applied to the entrance lens. It determines how many volts are applied for each m/z. It can be varied from 0 to –128 mV/(m/z). A typical range is 0 to –40 mV/amu. 7 Analyzer Quadrupole Mass Filter 192 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Quadrupole Mass Filter The mass filter separates ions according to their mass-to-charge ratio (m/z). At a given time, only ions of a selected m/z can pass through the filter to the detector. The mass filter in the MSD is a quadrupole (See Figure 47 on page 193). The quadrupole is a fused-silica (quartz) tube coated with a thin layer of gold. The four hyperbolic surfaces create the complex electric fields necessary for mass selection. Opposing segments are connected; adjacent segments are electrically isolated. One pair has positive voltages applied, the other has negative voltages applied. A combined direct current (DC) and radio frequency (RF) signal is applied to the two pairs of segments. The magnitude of the RF voltage determines the m/z of the ions that pass through the mass filter and reach the detector. The ratio of DC-to-RF determines the resolution (widths of the mass peaks). There are several parameters that control the DC and RF voltages. All these parameters are set by Autotune, but can be manually adjusted in the Edit Tune Parameters dialog. • AMU gain (AmuGain) • AMU offset (AmuOffs) • 219 width (Wid219) • DC polarity (DC Pol) • Mass (axis) gain (MassGain) • Mass (axis) offset (MassOffs) • MS quad temp 7 Analyzer Quadrupole Mass Filter 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 193 AMU gain AMU gain (AmuGain) affects the ratio of DC voltage to RF frequency on the mass filter. This controls the widths of the mass peaks. • Higher gain yields narrower peaks. • AMU gain affects peaks at high masses more than peaks at low masses. AMU offset AMU offset (AmuOffs) also affects the ratio of DC voltage to RF frequency on the mass filter. • Higher offset yields narrower peaks. • AMU offset generally affects peak widths equally at all masses. 219 width m/z 219 is a prominent ion near the middle of the mass range of PFTBA. The width parameter (Wid219) makes small corrections to the m/z 219 peak width. Amu gain and amu offset must be readjusted after the 219 width is changed. If you are tuning with a compound other than PFTBA, there may not be an ion at m/z 219. In that case, set the 219 width to the last value found for it by Autotune, or set it to 0. Figure 47. Quadrupole mass filter 7 Analyzer Quadrupole Mass Filter 194 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual DC polarity The DC polarity (DC Pol) parameter selects the orientation of the direct current applied to the quadrupole mass filter. The DC Pol that works best for your MSD is determined at the factory. It is listed on the final test sheet accompanying your MSD. It is also listed on a label on the cover over the RF coils. This cover can be viewed by removing the upper MSD cover. Mass (axis) gain Mass gain (MassGain) controls the mass assignment, that is, assignment of a particular peak to the correct m/z value. • A higher gain yields higher mass assignment. • Mass gain affects peaks at high masses more than peaks at low masses. Mass (axis) offset Mass offset (MassOffs) also controls the mass assignment. • A higher offset yields higher mass assignment. • Mass offset generally affects peaks equally at all masses. Quadrupole maintenance The mass filter requires no periodic maintenance. It should not be removed from the radiator. If absolutely necessary (that is, if the only alternative is replacement), the quadrupole can be cleaned. Cleaning must be performed by Agilent Technologies service personnel. CAUTION Using the nonpreferred DC polarity may result in very poor performance. Always use the factory-specified polarity. CAUTION Never put the quadrupole in an ultrasonic cleaner. Never change the physical orientation of the quadrupole mass filter. The fused-quartz quadrupole is fragile and will break if dropped or handled roughly. The material in the cusps of the quadrupole is very hygroscopic. If exposed to water, the quadrupole must be dried very slowly to prevent damage. 7 Analyzer Detector 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 195 Detector The detector (See Figure 48 on page 196) in the MSD analyzer is a high energy conversion dynode (HED) coupled to an electron multiplier (EM). The detector is located at the exit end of the quadrupole mass filter. It receives the ions that have passed through the mass filter. The detector generates an electronic signal proportional to the number of ions striking it. The detector has three main components: the detector ion focus, the HED, and the EM horn. Detector ion focus The detector ion focus directs the ion beam into the HED, which is located off axis. The voltage on the detector focus lens is fixed at –600 V. High energy dynode The HED operates at –10,000 V for EI and PCI, and +10,000 V for NCI. It is located off-axis from the center of the quadrupole mass filter to minimize signals due to photons, hot neutrals, and electrons coming from the ion source. When the ion beam hits the HED, electrons are emitted. These electrons are attracted to the more positive EM horn. Do not touch the insulator. EM horn The EM horn carries a voltage of up to –3,000 V at its opening and 0 V at the other end. The electrons emitted by the HED strike the EM horn and cascade through the horn, liberating more electrons as they go. At the far end of the horn, the current generated by the electrons is carried through a shielded cable outside the analyzer to the signal amplifier board. The voltage applied to the EM horn determines the gain. The voltage is adjustable from 0 to –3,000 VDC. Use the EM voltage found in autotune as a baseline for the EM voltage setting. • To increase signal gain, increase the EM voltage. • For concentrated samples where less signal gain is needed, decrease the EM voltage. As the EM horn ages, the voltage (EMVolts) required increases over time. If the EM voltage must always be set at or near –3,000 VDC to complete Autotune, with no other probable cause, it may need to be replaced. Check your tune charts 7 Analyzer Detector 196 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual for gradual degradation, which indicates wearing out. Select the Tune Plot icon from the Program menu of your desktop to see the tune plots. Sudden changes usually indicate a different type of problem. See Also • Troubleshooting in the online help for more information about symptoms that may indicate EM problems. Figure 48. The detector HED high voltage EM horn 7 Analyzer Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 197 Analyzer Heaters and Radiators The ion source and mass filter are housed in cylindrical aluminum tubes called radiators (See Figure 49 on page 198) or (See Figure 50 on page 199). The radiators control the distribution of heat in the analyzer. They also provide electrical shielding for analyzer components. The source heater and temperature sensor are mounted in the source heater block. The mass filter (quad) heater and temperature sensor are mounted on the mass filter radiator. Analyzer temperatures can be set and monitored from the MSD Data Acquisition software. In selecting the temperatures to use, consider the following: • Higher temperatures help keep the analyzer clean longer. • Higher ion source temperatures result in more fragmentation and, therefore, lower high-mass sensitivity. After pumpdown, it takes at least 2 hours for the analyzer to reach thermal equilibrium. Data acquired sooner may not be reproducible. Recommended settings (for EI operation): • Ion source 230 °C • Quadrupole 150 °C The GC/MSD interface, ion source, and mass filter (quad) heated zones interact. The analyzer heaters may not be able to accurately control temperatures if the setpoint for one zone is much lower than that of an adjacent zone. CAUTION Do not exceed 200 °C on the quadrupole, or 350 °C on the ion source. 7 Analyzer Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 198 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Figure 49. Heaters and radiators with an XTR source Mass filter radiator Mass filter heater assembly Ion source radiator Ion source heater assembly 7 Analyzer Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 199 Figure 50. Heaters and radiators with an HES Mass filter radiator Mass filter heater assembly Ion source radiator Ion source heater/sensor wires (gray and purple) 7 Analyzer Analyzer Heaters and Radiators 200 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 201 8 Electronics GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED 202 Side Board 204 Electronics Module 205 LAN/MS Control Card 209 Power Supplies 210 Back Panel and Connectors 211 Interfacing to External Devices 214 Most of this material is not essential for day-to-day operation of the MSD. It may be of interest to persons responsible for servicing the MSD. WARNING Dangerous voltages are present under the safety covers. Do not remove safety covers. Refer servicing to your Agilent Technologies service representative. 8 Electronics GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED 202 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED GC Control Panel (LCP) You can view MSD system status and perform some control functions from the control panel on a connected 8890 GC (touchscreen) or 7890 GC (keypad). There is no control panel on the MSD. Functions available through the GC control panel include: • Configure network settings of the MSD • Change the MSD temperatures • View analyzer vacuum or turbo pump speed • View foreline pump vacuum • Vent or pumpdown the MSD • View the firmware version and serial number of the MSD • Enable LVDS on the MSD • Reboot the MSD • Enable BOOTP on the MSD Power switch The power switch is part of the electronics module, and is located on the lower left of the front of the MSD. It is used to turn the MSD and foreline pump on and off. Front Panel LED The front panel LED shows the current instrument status through a color code, as shown in Table 16 on page 203. CAUTION Do not switch the MSD off unless it has completed the vent program. Incorrect shutdown can seriously damage the MSD. 8 Electronics GC Control Panel, Power Switch, and Front Panel LED 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 203 Table 16 Front panel Instrument Status LED codes Instrument status LED code Ready Solid green Acquiring data Blinking green Not ready Solid yellow JetClean Acquire & Clean operation Blinking magenta JetClean Clean Only operation Solid magenta Not connected to DS (system idle) Solid blue Ready and not connected to DS Solid yellow for 3 sec, quick double blink Start up (prior to FW load) Blinking red Fault Solid red 8 Electronics Side Board 204 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Side Board The side board is mounted on the side plate. It performs these functions: • Provides the 1 MHz reference clock for the RF amplifier. • Generates the RF component of the voltage applied to the quadrupole mass filter according to a signal from the main board. The amplitude of this voltage is proportional to the mass selected. • Generates the DC component of the voltage applied to the quadrupole mass filter. The magnitude of this voltage is proportional to the RF voltage. • Passes voltages generated on the main board and the detector focus voltage from the HED power supply to elements in the ion source and the detector. • Generates and adjusts filament emission current and electron energy as controlled by the main board. • Switches the filament power from one filament to the other. • Monitors for RF faults and shuts down the analyzer if one is detected. 8 Electronics Electronics Module 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 205 Electronics Module Most of the electronics in the MSD are contained in the electronics module. The whole electronics module can be replaced, if necessary, by your Agilent Technologies service representative. The electronics module contains: • Main board • Signal amplifier board • LAN/MS control card • AC board (power distribution/vacuum control board) • Low voltage (AC-DC) power supply • High voltage (HED) power supply • Toroid transformer assembly • Lens driver board for HES Main board The main board is mounted on the outer side of the electronics module. The main board performs these functions: • Receives and decodes digital instructions from the LAN/MS control card. • Sends digital information to the LAN/MS control card. • Generates voltages for the ion source lenses. • Generates control signals for filament selection, filament emission current, and electron energy. Generates control signals for quadrupole RF drive, quad frequency adjustment, DC polarity selection, and all detector voltages. • Performs analog-to-digital conversion for the Direct signal, ion source and mass filter temperature signals, and foreline pressure or turbo pump speed signal. • Monitors the signals from the vacuum system and fans and the filament status, HV fault and RF fault signals from the side board. Activates the shutdown line when the analyzer electronics must be disabled. • Generates the control signals (on and off) used by the AC board for the high vacuum pump and calibration valve. • Generates ±280 VDC (nominal) power for main board lens amplifiers and side board DC amplifiers. 8 Electronics Electronics Module 206 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual • Supplies and controls the power for the ion source and quadrupole (mass filter) heaters. • Provides 24 VDC power for the cooling fans. Signal amplifier board The signal amplifier board amplifies the output of the detector. It produces an output voltage of 0 to 10 V DC, proportional to the logarithm of the input current of 3 picoamps to 50 microamps. An analog-to-digital converter converts the amplifier output voltage to digital information. The LAN/MSD control card converts the data into abundance counts proportional to the detector signal current. Lens driver board for HES The lens driver board provides the lens voltages for the extractor, post extractor 1, and post extractor 2 lenses. AC board The AC board is mounted on the opposite side of the electronics panel from the LAN/MSD control card. The AC board is also sometimes called the power distribution/vacuum control board. It performs these functions: • Provides input voltage transparency for the MSD. • Distributes AC line power to the AC/DC power supply, the foreline pump, and the turbo pump controller. • Turns the calibration valve on or off as directed by the main board. • Provides the voltage for the calibration valve. • Provides a logic interface to turbo controller. • Controls the diffusion pump: • Controls the foreline gauge. • Turns on the diffusion pump once the foreline pressure is low enough, as directed by the main board. • Regulates the AC power to the diffusion pump heater. • Turns off the diffusion pump if the foreline pressure is too high or if the diffusion pump is too hot. 8 Electronics Electronics Module 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 207 • Passes the foreline pressure signal from the foreline gauge or turbo pump speed and other vacuum status information to the main board. • Turns off the foreline pump in case of a problem with pumpdown. Diffusion pump control The power regulator ensures that the diffusion pump heater receives constant power, even if there are fluctuations in the AC line voltage. It measures the voltage across the heater and the current through it, multiplies them together, and compares the result with a standard value. Any discrepancy is applied as an error signal to adjust the power. If the power distribution board senses a malfunction in the diffusion pump power regulator, it shuts off power to the diffusion pump. See Figure 51. Turbo pump control Your MSD is equipped with a turbo pump with an integrated controller. The AC board sends control signals to, and receives turbo pump status information from, the turbo pump controller. The turbo pump controller provides power to the turbo pump and regulates pump speed. If the pump fails to reach 80% speed within 7 minutes after beginning pumpdown or if the speed drops below 50% during operation, the controller shuts off the turbo pump and the AC board shuts off the foreline pump. Figure 51. Diffusion pump control Hi vac power cable Diffusion pump harness Diffusion pump heater cable Fan Diffusion pump Heater Sensors HI VAC Power Harnes CAL valve MSD electronics module (AC board) Foreline gauge 8 Electronics Electronics Module 208 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Pumpdown failure shutdown The AC board will shut down both the high vacuum and the foreline pump if the system fails to pump down correctly. Other conditions that trigger shutdown are turbo pump speed below 80% after 7 minutes, or foreline pressure above 300 mTorr after 7 minutes. This is usually because of a large air leak: either the sideplate has not sealed correctly, or the vent valve is still open. This feature helps prevent the foreline pump from sucking air through the system, which can damage the analyzer and pump. To correct the problem, power cycle the MSD and troubleshoot. You have 7 minutes to find and correct the air leak before the system shuts down again. Press on the side plate when turning on the MSD power to ensure a good seal. 8 Electronics LAN/MS Control Card 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 209 LAN/MS Control Card The LAN/MS control card is located to the left of the main board on the electronics panel. The LAN/MS control card has two main functions: • Providing a communication interface between the MSD and the data system • Providing real-time control of the MSD, freeing the data system for other tasks Functional areas of the LAN/MS control card include: • Instrument controller • Data processor • Main processor • Serial communication processor • Network communication controller • Remote start processor • Random access memory (RAM) • Status LEDs • Local Control panel firmware • Mini display module LEDs on the LAN/MS control card are visible on the rear panel. The upper two LEDs indicate network communication. The two bottom LEDs are the power (On, digital 5 V) and the heartbeat indicator. The flashing heartbeat LED indicates that the operating system of the MSD is functioning. In case of catastrophic loss of flash memory, the heartbeat flashes in an SOS (•••– – – •••) pattern. 8 Electronics Power Supplies 210 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Power Supplies Low voltage (AC-DC) power supply The low voltage power supply is mounted next to the toroid transformer in the electronics module. A universal input power supply, it converts AC line voltage into the DC voltages used by the rest of the electronics. The power supply generates the following DC voltages: • +24 V (nominal) • +15 V (nominal) • –15 V (nominal) • +5 V (nominal) High voltage (HED) power supply The high voltage power supply provides the –10,000 V DC for the high energy dynode (HED) in the detector for the EI MSD. The EI/PCI/NCI MSD requires a bipolar power supply that can also provide +10,000 V for NCI operation. The HED power supply also provides 600 VDC for the detector focus lens. Due to the high impedance of this circuit, measuring the detector focus voltage with a handheld voltmeter will give a typical reading of 90 to 100 V where the polarity matches that of the HED voltage. Toroid transformer The toroid transformer is mounted next to the AC board. It provides 24 VAC for the mass filter and source heater circuits. The input wires take 120 VAC or 200 to 260 VAC from the AC board. The AC board samples the line voltage and uses a relay to appropriately strap the toroid primary. The output wires connect to the main board. 8 Electronics Back Panel and Connectors 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 211 Back Panel and Connectors The back panel (See Figure 52 on page 213) contains several connectors, the primary fuses, and several status LEDs. Most of these components are part of the AC board or the LAN/MS control card, and extend through the back panel. HI-VAC SIGNAL The high vacuum signal connector is on the AC board. See “Turbo pump control” on page 207 and “Diffusion pump control” on page 207. HI-VAC POWER The high vacuum power connector carries power for the diffusion pump heater or the turbo controller from the AC board. Primary fuses The primary fuses limit current into the MSD in case of a short circuit in the foreline pump. The primary fuses are on the AC board. Power cord receptacle The AC power cord brings in all electrical power for the MSD. The power cord can be detached from the MSD. FORELINE PUMP The foreline pump power cord receptacle provides AC power for the foreline pump. If the power switch is off, no power is supplied to the foreline pump. REMOTE The remote start connector is the external connector for the remote start circuitry on the LAN/MS control card. It receives remote start signals from the GC. 8 Electronics Back Panel and Connectors 212 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual High vacuum gauge connector This powers the high vacuum gauge and connects its signal to the controlling electronics. SERIAL A This RS-232 connector is not currently used. CI COMM This RS-232 connector goes to the CI flow module if it is installed on the MSD. It handles data communication between the GC and the MSD. LAN The LAN cable from the data system is connected to this LAN connector. This cable carries all data communication between the PC and the MSD. LAN/MSD control card LEDs The two upper LEDs indicate network communication. The two bottom LEDs are the power and the heartbeat indicator. GC COMM This RS-232 cable connector is used for LVDS communication with a supported GC. 8 Electronics Back Panel and Connectors 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 213 Figure 52. Back panel connections Remote start Primary fuses Power cord LAN High vacuum control High vacuum power Foreline pump RS-232 Serial B power cord RS-232 Serial A GC communication High vacuum gauge connector 8 Electronics Interfacing to External Devices 214 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Interfacing to External Devices Remote control processor The remote control processor on the LAN/MS control card synchronizes start-run signals with GCs and other devices. The functions of the remote control processor are extended to the remote start (Remote) connector (Figure 53) on the back panel of the MSD. The remote start cable connects the GC and the MSD. Remote start signals It is often necessary to communicate with external devices (for example, a purge-and-trap) during a run. Typically, these communications are requests to send a system-ready signal. They also include: • Receive a start run signal from an external device • Program the timing of events during a run System ready When interfacing to an external device, it is often desirable to send a system-ready signal to the device. In the case of a multisample Tekmar purge-and-trap, each sample is purged onto a trap where it waits for a ready signal. On receipt of the ready signal, the desorbtion cycle begins. When a specific temperature is reached, the purge-and-trap closes a contact to indicate the run has started. Figure 53 Remote start connector Start Ground Ready 8 Electronics Interfacing to External Devices 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 215 The ready pin on the remote start connector on the GC is held low at all times except when the GC, MSD, and data system are all ready. On system ready, a logic high of 5 VDC is present between that pin and any ground. This same high can be detected between the ready and ground pins on the remote start connector on the MSD. Start run input The best way to generate a start run signal is to use the remote start connector on the GC. Since remote start cables are made for most common devices, this is often the simplest way. A general-purpose remote start cable (05890-61080), that terminates in spade lugs, is also available. Ensure that the system is actually ready before the start run signal is sent. If necessary, the remote start connector on the back of the MSD can be used to send the start run signal. A contact closure between the start and ground pins will start the run, if the system is ready. 8 Electronics Interfacing to External Devices 216 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 217 9 Parts To Order Parts 218 Electronics 219 Fuses 219 Vacuum System 219 O-rings and seals 219 Standard foreline pump and related parts 220 MVP-070 foreline pump and related parts 222 IDP3 Dry foreline pump and related parts 223 Turbo pump and related parts 225 Turbo pump and related parts 225 Analyzer 226 Extractor ion source 228 CI ion source 230 HES ion source 232 EI GC/MSD Interface 234 CI GC/MSD Interface 235 Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 236 This chapter lists parts that can be ordered for use in maintaining your 5977B Series MSD. It includes most of the parts or assemblies in the MSDs. This chapter is organized so that related parts are grouped together. Some of the parts listed are not user-replaceable. They are listed here for use by Agilent Technologies service representatives. 9 Parts To Order Parts 218 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual To Order Parts To order parts for your MSD, contact your local Agilent Technologies office. Supply them with the following information: Model and serial number of your MSD, located on a label on the lower left side near the front of the instrument. • Part number(s) of the part(s) needed • Quantity of each part needed Some parts are available as rebuilt assemblies Rebuilt assemblies pass all the same tests and meet all the same specifications as new parts. Rebuilt assemblies can be identified by their part numbers. The first two digits of the second part of the part number are 69 or 89 (such as xxxxx-69xxx or xxxxx-89xxx). Rebuilt assemblies are available on an exchange-only basis. When you return the original part to Agilent Technologies (after you receive the rebuilt assembly), you will receive a credit. If you cannot find a part you need If you need a part that is not listed in this chapter, check the Agilent Technologies Analytical Supplies Catalog or the on-line catalogue on the worldwide web at http://www.agilent.com/chem. If you still cannot find it, contact your Agilent Technologies service representative or your Agilent Technologies office. 9 Parts Electronics 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 219 Electronics The printed circuit boards in the MSD are available only as complete assemblies. Individual electronic components are not available. This section contains the following parts: fuses (Table 17). Fuses Vacuum System This section lists replacement parts available for the vacuum system. It includes, O-rings and seals (Table 18), standard foreline pump and related components (Table 19 on page 220 and Figure 54 on page 221), dry foreline pump and related components (Table 20 on page 222, Table 21 on page 223, Figure 55 on page 222, and Figure 56 on page 223), diffusion pump and related components (Table 22 on page 224 and Figure 57 on page 224), and turbo pump vacuum system components (Table 23 on page 225 and Figure 58 on page 225). O-rings and seals Table 17 Fuses Description Part number Fuse T12.5A, 250 V 2110-1398 Table 18 O-rings and seals Description Part number Calibration valve O-ring (1/4-inch) 5180-4182 KF10/16 seal (foreline pump inlet), Micro-Ion vacuum gauge KC16AV KF10/16 seal (foreline pump inlet and diffusion pump outlet), Micro-Ion vacuum gauge KC16AV KF50 seal (diffusion pump inlet) 0100-1884 Side plate O-ring 0905-1442 Vent valve O-ring (1/4-inch) 5180-4182 9 Parts Vacuum System 220 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Standard foreline pump and related parts Table 19 Standard foreline pump and related parts (Figure 54 on page 221) Description Part number Pfeiffer RVP – 115 V G3870-80055 Pfeiffer RVP – 230 V G3870-80056 Pfeiffer RVP – 200 V G6870-80054 Pfeiffer RVP – 115 V – Rebuilt G3870-89055 Pfeiffer RVP – 230 V – Rebuilt G3870-89056 Pfeiffer RVP – 200 V – Rebuilt G6870-89054 Foreline hose assembly (hose and internal spring) 05971-60119 Hose Clamp* used with 05971-60119 * Hose clamps are interchangeable, but give an optimum fit if they are matched 1400-3241 Foreline pump inlet seal (KF10/16) KC16AV KF10/16 Clamp (foreline inlet), Micro-Ion vacuum gauge KC160000AB Oil drip tray G3170-00012 Drain plug for foreline pump 0100-2452 O-ring for foreline pump drain plug 0905-1619 Fill plug 0100-2451 O-ring for foreline fill plug 0905-1620 Oil mist filter (blue) G1099-80039 Hose barb adapter (exhaust fitting) G3170-80006 O-ring for oil mist filter and hose barb adapter 0905-1193 Foreline pump oil 6040-0621 5 mm hex key 8710-1838 9 Parts Vacuum System 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 221 Figure 54. Pfeiffer DUO pump 9 Parts Vacuum System 222 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual MVP-070 foreline pump and related parts Table 20 Dry foreline pump and related parts (Figure 55) Description Part number Dry pump, MVP 070-3 G3870-80051 Dry pump, MVP 070-3C G3870-80061 Dry pump, MVP 070-3 – Rebuilt G3870-80052 Dry pump, MVP 070-3C – Rebuilt G3870-89052 Figure 55. MVP-070 foreline pump 9 Parts Vacuum System 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 223 IDP3 Dry foreline pump and related parts Table 21 IDP3 foreline pump and related parts (Figure 56) Description Part number Foreline hose assembly (hose and internal spring) 05971-60119 Hose Clamp* used with 05971-60119 * Hose clamps are interchangeable, but give an optimum fit if they are matched 1400-3241 Dry foreline pump G3870-60600 Replace tip seal set, non-ammonia IDP3TS Solid tip seal kit, inert G3870-67000 KF10/16 Clamp (foreline inlet), Micro-Ion vacuum gauge 0100-1397 KF16 Hose adapter G1099-20531 Vibration Isolation kit IDP3VIBISOKIT Exhaust hose G3170-60100 Exhaust adapter G3170-80029 Barbed fitting G3170-80006 Exhaust filter cartridge REPLSLRFILTER2 Figure 56. IDP3 Dry foreline pump CAUTION Agilent does not recommend using hydrogen as a carrier gas on systems equipped with an IDP3 foreline pump. 9 Parts Vacuum System 224 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Diffusion pump and related parts Table 22 Diffusion pump MSD vacuum system components (Figure 57) Item Description Part number 1 Diffusion pump 120 V G1099-80500 220/240 V G1099-80501 2 Fan (for high vacuum pump) G7005-60564 3 Foreline gauge assembly G1099-60545 KF50 clamp 0100-1395 Figure 57. Diffusion pump removed from analyzer chamber connection and related parts Diffusion pump Foreline gauge assembly High vacuum fan 9 Parts Vacuum System 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 225 Turbo pump and related parts Table 23 Turbo pump MSD vacuum system components (Figure 58) Description Part number Turbomolecular pump G3170-80162 Pfeiffer HiPace 300 turbo pump- Rebuilt G3170-89162 Turbo power assembly G3170-60600 Centering ring seal with screen 0905-1613 Figure 58. Turbo pump and related parts Turbo Pump Ion gauge assembly 9 Parts Analyzer 226 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Analyzer Table 24 and Figure 59 show the analyzer chamber and associated parts. Table 25 and Figure 60 on page 227 (non-HES version) or Figure 61 on page 227 (HES version) show the replacement parts for the analyzer. Analyzer screws are listed in the tables that follow. Table 24 Analyzer chamber and related parts Description Part number Calibration vial G3170-80002 Vent valve knob G7077-20554 Figure 59. Analyzer chamber and related parts Calibration vial Vent valve knob Table 25 Analyzer parts Description Part number TAD assembly (Detector, HED, bracket) G7002-80105 Detector (Electron multiplier horn) G7002-80103 EI 350 ion source, new Turbo – inert Diffusion – stainless steel G3870-67700 G3870-67750 EI 350 extractor ion source G3870-67720 HES ion source G7002-67055 CI ion source G7077-67404 Interface tip seal G3870-20542 9 Parts Analyzer 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 227 Figure 60. Analyzer parts (non-HES version) Figure 61. Analyzer parts (HES version) Ion source Electron multiplier horn (under clips) Detector Detector Electron multiplier horn (under clips) Ion source 9 Parts Analyzer 228 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Extractor ion source Table 26 Analyzer screws Description Part number Ion source thumbscrew G1099-20138 Table 27 Parts list for extractor ion source (Figure 62 on page 229) Item Description Part number 1 Setscrews G3870-20446 2 Screws G3870-20021 3 Source body G3870-20440 4 Extractor lens G3870-20444 5 Extractor lens insulator G3870-20445 6 Filament G7005-60061 7 Spring washer 3050-1301 7 Flat washer 3050-0982 8 Lens insulator G3870-20530 9 Entrance lens assembly, Extended G7000-20026 10 Ion focus lens 05971-20143 11 Repeller insulator G1099-20133 12 Repeller G3870-60171 13 Flat washer 3050-0891 14 Belleville spring washer 3050-1301 15 Repeller nut 0535-0071 16 Source heater block assembly G3870-60177 17 Insert, Repeller block G3870-20135 9 Parts Analyzer 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 229 Figure 62. Extractor EI ion source 9 Parts Analyzer 230 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual CI ion source Table 28 Parts list for the CI ion source (Figure 63 on page 231) Item Description Part number 1 Setscrew G1999-20022 2 Filament screw G1999-20021 Not shown CI interface tip seal G3870-20542 4 CI repeller insulator G1999-20433 5 CI lens insulator G3170-20540 6 CI drawout cylinder G1999-20444 7 CI drawout plate G1999-20446 8 CI ion source heater block assembly G3870-60415 9 Entrance lens G3170-20126 10 CI ion source body G3170-20430 11 CI ion focus lens G1999-20443 12 CI repeller G7077-20432 13 CI filament G7005-60072 14 Dummy filament G1999-60454 15 Curved washer 3050-1374 16 Flat washer 3050-9082 9 Parts Analyzer 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 231 Figure 63. The CI ion source 15 16 9 Parts Analyzer 232 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual HES ion source Table 29 Parts list for the HES EI ion source (Figure 64 on page 233) Item Description Part number 1 Source finger grip G7002-20008 2 Filament block G7002-20019 3 Extractor lens (5)* , with 3 mm opening * The number in parenthesis is the number engraved on the lens G7004-20061 4 Ceramic insulator for extractor G7002-20064 5 Entrance lens assembly, Extended, HES (1)* G7004-20065 6 Ion focus lens (2)* G7004-20068 7 Lens insulator/holder G7002-20074 8 M2 x 0.4 screw x 12 mm long gold plated screw G7002-20083 9 Source body G7002-20084 10 Post extractor lens 2 (3)* G7004-20090 11 Post extractor lens 1 (4)* G7004-20004 12 M2 x 6 mm gold plated screw G7002-20109 13 Locking ring lens insulator G7002-20126 14 High efficiency dual filament G7002-60001 15 Ring heater/sensor assembly G7002-60043 16 Source mount 1.5 mm G7002-60053 17 Repeller assembly G7002-67057 9 Parts Analyzer 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 233 Figure 64. HES ion source 1 2 8 16 17 15 9 4 3 11 10 6 5 7 13 12 14 8 12 9 Parts Analyzer 234 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual EI GC/MSD Interface Table 30 lists the replacement parts related to the EI GC/MSD interface. Figure 65 illustrates the parts. Table 30 EI GC/MSD interface Item Description Part number Not shown EI Transferline Assembly G7077-67300 1 Transferline tip cap, threaded G3870-20547 2 1/16 Ferrule no hole (qty 10) 5181-3308 3 M3 set screw 0515-0236 4 Transferline tip base, threaded G3870-20548 5 Transfer tip G3870-20542 6 Column nut 05988-20066 7 M3 screw G1999-20022 8 M4 X 0.7 16MM-LG 0515-0383 9 Heater clamp G7077-20210 10 Transfer line spring G1999-20023 11 Welded interface assembly G3870-60301 12 Heater/sensor assembly G1099-60109 Figure 65. EI GC/MSD interface 9 Parts Analyzer 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 235 CI GC/MSD Interface Table 31 lists the replacement parts related to the CI GC/MSD interface. Figure 66 illustrates the parts. Table 31 CI GC/MSD interface Item Description Part number Not shown CI Transferline Assembly, untested G7077-67400 1 Transferline tip cap, threaded G3870-20547 2 1/16 Ferrule no hole (qty 10) 5181-3308 3 M3 set screw 0515-0236 4 Transferline tip base, threaded G3870-20548 5 Transfer tip G3870-20542 6 Column nut 05988-20066 7 M3x3L screw-set, gold plated G1999-20022 8 M4 X 0.7 16MM-LG screws for heater clamp 0515-0383 9 Heater clamp G7077-20410 10 Transfer line spring G1999-20023 11 Welded interface assembly G3870-67401 12 Heater/sensor assembly G1099-60107 Figure 66. CI GC/MSD interface 9 Parts Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 236 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Consumables and Maintenance Supplies This section (Tables 32 through 36) lists parts available for cleaning and maintaining your MSD. Table 32 EI maintenance supplies Description Part number Abrasive paper, 30 µm 5061-5896 Alumina powder, 100 g 3937-6201 Cloths, clean (qty 300) 05980-60051 Cloths, cleaning (qty 300) 9310-4828 Cotton swabs (qty 100) 5080-5400 Diffusion pump fluid (2 required) 6040-0809 Foreline pump oil, D545, 0.5 L 6040-0621 IDP-3 foreline pump replacement tip seal kit IDP3TS IDP-3 foreline pump 24V Power Supply G3870-60600 Gloves, clean – Large 8650-0030 Gloves, clean – Small 8650-0029 Grease, Apiezon L, high vacuum 6040-0289 9 Parts Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 237 Table 33 Tools Description Part number Column installation tool G1099-20030 Funnel 9301-6461 Hex key, 5 mm 8710-1838 Tool Kit G1099-60566 Ball drivers, 1.5-mm 8710-1570 Ball drivers, 2.0-mm 8710-1804 Ball drivers, 2.5-mm 8710-1681 Hex nut driver, 5.5-mm 8710-1220 Pliers, long-nose (1.5-inch nose) 8710-1094 Screwdrivers Flat-blade, large 8730-0002 Screwdrivers Torx, T-6 8710-2548 Screwdrivers Torx, T-10 8710-1623 Screwdrivers Torx. T-20 8710-1615 Tweezers, nonmagnetic 8710-0907 Wrenches, open-end 1/4-inch x 5/16-inch 8710-0510 Wrenches, open-end 10-mm 8710-2353 9 Parts Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 238 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Table 34 Ferrules Description Part number For the GC/MSD interface using a standard column nut • Blank, graphite-vespel 5181-3308 • 0.3-mm id, 85%/15% for 0.10-mm id columns 5062-3507 • 0.4-mm id, 85%/15%, for 0.20 and 0.25-mm id columns 5062-3508 • 0.5-mm id, 85%/15%, for 0.32-mm id columns 5062-3506 • 0.8-mm id, 85%/15%, for 0.53-mm id columns 5062-3538 For the GC/MSD interface using a self-tightening column nut • Blank, graphite-vespel 5181-3308 • 0.3-mm id, 85%/15% for 0.10-mm id columns 5062-3507 • 0.4-mm id, 85%/15% for 0.0 and 0.25-mm id columns 5062-3508 • 0.5-mm id, 85%/15% for 0.32-mm id columns 5062-3506 • 0.8-mm id, 85%/15% for 0.53-mm id columns 5062-3512 Figure 67. GC/MSD interface with a self-tightening column nut GC/MSD interface with self-tightening nut 9 Parts Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual 239 Table 35 Ferrules for the GC inlet, using standard or self-tightening column nuts Description Part number • 0.27-mm id, 90%/10%, for 0.10-mm id columns 5062-3518 • 0.37-mm id, 90%/10%, for 0.20-mm id columns 5062-3516 • 0.40-mm id, 90%/10%, for 0.25-mm id columns 5181-3323 • 0.47-mm id, 90%/10%, for 0.32-mm id columns 5062-3514 Figure 68. GC inlet with self-tightening column nut GC inlet with selftightening nut 9 Parts Consumables and Maintenance Supplies 240 5977B Series MSD Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Table 36 Miscellaneous EI and CI parts and samples Description Part number Benzophenone, 100 pg/µL 8500-5400 Octafluoronaphthalene, OFN, 1 pg/µL 5188-5348 Octafluoronaphthalene, OFN, 100 fg/µL 5188-5347 OFN, 10 fg/µL 5190-0585 PFHT, 100 pg/µL 5188-5357 PFTBA, 10 g 8500-0656 PFTBA sample kit 05971-60571 PFDTD calibrant 8500-8510 Foreline pump tray (Pfeiffer pump) G1099-00015 Duo 2.5s and DS-42 foreline pump oil pan G3870-00015 Eval A, hydrocarbons 05971-60045 Ion gauge electronics G3870-80030 Methane/isobutane gas purifier G1999-80410 www.agilent.com Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2019 First edition, January 2019 *G7077-90035* G7077-90035

Posted on Leave a comment

Tandem mass spectrometry-based newborn screening strategy could be used to facilitate rapid and sensitive lung cancer diagnosis

Ting Huang,1,*Yunfeng Cao,1,*Jia Zeng,1Jun Dong,2Xiaoyu Sun,2Jianxing Chen,1 and Peng Gao2,3Author informationCopyright and License informationDisclaimerThis article has been cited by other articles in PMC.

Associated Data

Supplementary MaterialsGo to:

Abstract

Objective

Newborn screening (NBS) helps in the early detection of inborn errors of metabolism (IEM). The most effective NBS strategy prevailing in clinics is tandem mass spectrometry (MS/MS) analysis using dried blood spot (DBS) samples. Taking lung cancer (LC) as an example, this study tried to explore if this technique could be of any assistance for the discovery of tumor metabolite markers.

Materials and methods

Twenty-six acylcarnitines and 23 amino acids, which are commonly used in IEM screening, were quantified using DBS samples from 222 LC patients, 118 benign lung disease (LD) patients, and 96 healthy volunteers (CONT). Forty-four calculated ratios based on the abovementioned metabolites were also included using MS/MS quantification results.

Results

This pilot study led to the findings of 65 significantly changed amino acids, acylcarnitines, and some of their ratios for the LC, LD, and CONT groups. Among the differential parameters, 12 items showed reverse changing trends between the LC and LD groups compared to the CONT group. Regression analysis demonstrated that six of them – Arg, Pro, C10:1, Arg/Orn, Cit/Arg, and C5-OH/C0 – could be used to diagnose LC with a sensitivity of 91.3% and a specificity of 92.7%.

Conclusion

This study demonstrated the DBS-based MS/MS strategy was a promising tool for the discovery of tumor metabolite markers. Remarkably, this MS/MS analysis could be finished in several minutes, implying that it was a proper measure complementary to the traditional serum protein biomarker quantitation strategy for cancerous disease diagnosis and screening purposes.Keywords: lung cancer, mass spectrometry, newborn screening testsGo to:

Introduction

Newborn screening (NBS) helps in the early detection of inborn errors of metabolism (IEM). IEM consists of a group of metabolic disorders manifested by varied types of abnormal accumulation or deficiency of carbohydrates, amino acids, nucleic acids, steroids, and metals. Every IEM has its specific genetic deficiency and ~1,000 IEM mechanisms have been disclosed to date. These genetic abnormalities usually affect the structure of certain enzymes, availability of enzyme-specific cofactors, or biological processing of the enzymes. The typical pathological features of IEM include upstream substrate accumulation, downstream product shortage, or secondary metabolic byproduct overgeneration.1 It was estimated that the average morbidity due to IEM was ~1/4,000 in newborns.2

Tumor cells are transformed cells that evolve from normal cells. Genetic mutations can be found in nearly all tumor cells, although a single type of cancer can own different mutations or vice versa.3 The theory of “Warburg effect” demonstrates that cancer cells show distinct metabolic features compared to their normal counterparts. As observed in IEM, many metabolites are found to be abnormally accumulated and/or decreased in tumor tissues. For example, higher concentrations of blood branched-chain amino acids (BCAAs) are the pathological factors of maple syrup urine disease, a typical IEM. Recently, it was found that hepatocellular carcinoma and pancreatic adenocarcinoma were also linked to elevated blood BCAAs.4,5 Medium-chain acyl-CoA dehydrogenase (MCAD) deficiency will result in a series of IEM diseases characterized by abnormal organic acid metabolism, whereas dysregulated MCADs could be found in lung and hepatic cancers.6,7 Some IEM diseases are caused by secondary metabolite overproduction. For instance, phenylketonuria is due to the deficiency of phenylalanine hydroxylase. In this condition, phenylalanine is excessively converted into phenylpyruvate through an alternative pathway. Cancer cells can also transform normal substrates to uncommon byproducts. This can be demonstrated by the fact that malignant cells carrying isocitrate dehydrogenase mutations can catalyze isocitrate, on a large scale, to α-hydroxyglutarate instead of α-ketoglutarate.8 Furthermore, a body of evidence has shown that patients suffering from IEM diseases are susceptible to tumorigenesis.9 In this light, metabolic disorders are the common features of both IEM and cancerous diseases, implying the possibility that IEM screening measures could be, to some extent, used for cancer diagnosis purposes.

Tandem mass spectrometry (MS/MS) technology was first introduced into NBS in 1990.10 It plays key roles in IEM detection for its simultaneous multiple metabolite quantitation property. A single MS/MS run could be finished within 2–3 minutes, exhibiting great potential for high-throughput screening utilization.10 Currently, many countries have recommended MS/MS as one of the standard NBS techniques.11,12 The most popular sample type for NBS is the so-called dried blood spot (DBS) specimen. The notion of collecting blood samples for biochemical analysis on filter paper was first described by Ivar Christian Bang nearly a century ago.13 Subsequently, this method gained wide applications in clinical laboratories and was proved to be an effective and economic way of sampling blood. The distinct advantages of DBS sampling are 1) less blood volume is needed compared to the traditional venous blood sampling, which is often not compatible with pediatric patients; 2) sampling equipment is easy to operate and no expensive vacuum tube is needed; and 3) DBS can be stored for a long time using limited space with nearly no analyte degradation.13

Lung cancer (LC) is one of the lethal malignancies worldwide and has become the leading cause of cancer-related death globally. It was estimated that ~1.6 million cases were diagnosed and resulted in 1.4 million deaths in 2008.14 The prevailing diagnosis measures for LC in clinics include protein biomarker quantification, radiologic imaging, sputum cytology, and endoscopic examination. Of note, their sensitivities and specificities are not fully satisfied. In a study, it was found that 75% of the patients were diagnosed at later stages of disease, impairing the selection of effective therapeutic interventions and resulting in a 5-year survival rate of only 5%–10%.15 Taking LC as an example, this study would employ the popular NBS strategy, DBS-based MS/MS analysis, to test whether it could be used for LC diagnosis. The targeted analytes in this study included 26 acylcarnitines and 23 amino acids which are commonly used in IEM screening.16 These metabolites can reflect the systemic status of amino acid and fatty acid metabolism, and pathological changes associated with them are frequently encountered in most tumors including LC. In order to facilitate locking specific enzymatic activity fluctuation and enrich the data information, 44 calculated ratios based on the abovementioned metabolites were also included (our recently published results).Go to:

Materials and methods

Clinical samples

For this study, 222 LC patients, 118 benign lung disease (LD) patients, and 96 healthy volunteers (CONT) were enrolled from the First Affiliated Hospital of Liaoning Medical University. The LC patients with non-small-cell lung cancer (NSCLC) included those with adenocarcinoma (n=47), squamous carcinoma (n=103), adenosquamous carcinoma (n=49), and carcinoids (n=6). There were 17 small-cell lung cancer (SCLC) patients. Detailed information is given in Table 1. Before the study, written informed consents were acquired from the patients. The whole study was approved by the Hospital Ethics Committee of the First Affiliated Hospital of Liaoning Medical University and carried out in accordance with the Guidelines of the Hospital Ethics Committee of the First Affiliated Hospital of Liaoning Medical University. None of the LC patients had received chemotherapy or radiation treatment before sample collection. Every fasting blood DBS sample was collected from the tip of the distal phalanx of the third finger. The first drop of blood was discarded. The subsequent naturally formed blood drops were separately spotted onto the aseptic filter paper without the fingertip touching the paper surface. After drying at room temperature overnight, the sample paper was stored at −20°C in an airtight plastic bag individually. Then, 80% samples of each group were randomly selected as the training set to find differential metabolites and construct a regression model. The remaining 20% samples of each group were used for model validation purpose.

Table 1

Information of the patients and the healthy controls

GroupsLCLDCONT
Number of subjects22211896
Age (median, range), years57.47, 27–8159.61, 32–8056.07, 32–80
Male94 (42.34%)55 (46.61%)30 (31.25%)
Female128 (57.66%)63 (53.39%)66 (68.75%)

Open in a separate window

Abbreviations: LC, lung cancer; LD, benign lung disease; CONT, healthy control.

Chemicals

HPLC-grade acetonitrile (ACN), methanol, and pure water used for the experiments were all the products of Thermo Fisher Scientific (Waltham, MA, USA). 1-Butanol and acetyl chloride were provided by Sigma-Aldrich Co. (St Louis, MO, USA). Internal standard kits containing 12 isotope-labeled amino acids (catalog number: NSK-A) and eight acylcarnitines (catalog number: NSK-B) were used for absolute quantification purposes. They all were purchased from Cambridge Isotope Laboratories (Andover, MA, USA). The standards were separately dissolved in every 1 mL of pure methanol and then mixed together to construct a stock solution and stored at 4°C. Working solution was prepared by diluting the stock solution 100 times. For quality control (QC) purposes, kits containing mixed standard amino acids and acylcarnitines were purchased from Chromsystems (Grafelfing, Germany). The QC samples were processed as real samples and randomly inserted in the real sample analysis queue.

Sample preparation

A blood spot disc with a diameter of 3 mm (~3.2 μL of whole blood) from each filter was punched out. The disc was placed in a well of a Millipore MultiScreen HV 96-well plate (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany) containing 100 μL of freshly prepared working solution. The disc-containing plate was gently shaken for 20 minutes at room temperature to release metabolites from the filter discs. For each plate, at least four low-level and high-level QC solutions were added into randomly selected empty wells. The QC samples were analyzed in parallel with the real samples to ensure the stability of the analysis. Subsequently, the disc-containing plate was centrifuged at 1,500× g for 2 minutes to collect the filtrate into a new flat-bottom 96-well plate installed below the disc-containing plate. The filtrate was dried by pure nitrogen gas (50°C). For each well, 60 μL of 1-butanol and acetyl chloride mixture (90:10, v/v) was added and incubated at 65°C for 20 minutes for metabolite derivatization. After a second drying procedure by nitrogen gas, 100 μL of mobile phase solution was added into each well to redissolve the derivatized metabolites.

MS/MS analysis

For metabolite MS/MS analysis, an AB SCIEX 4000 QTrap system (Framingham, MA, USA) equipped with an electrospray ionization (ESI) source was employed in positive scan mode. For each analysis, 20 μL of redissolved solution was injected, and 80% ACN aqueous solution was used as mobile phase with an initial flow rate of 0.18 mL/min. When the sample was introduced into the MS system for 8 seconds, the flow rate immediately decreased to 0.02 mL/min within 2 seconds and remained constant for 0.07 minutes. Subsequently, the flow rate increased to 0.6 mL/min within 0.5 minutes and remained constant for another 0.5 minutes. After that, the flow rate returned to 0.18 mL/min for equilibration. The total runtime was 2 minutes for each single run. A 4.5 kV ion spray voltage was applied to the MS system. Pressures for ion source gas 1, Ion Source Gas 2, and curtain gas were 35, 35, and 20 psi, respectively. Auxiliary gas temperature was maintained at 350°C. The scan parameters for the considered metabolites were identical to our previous report.16 MS/MS data were collected by using Analyst v1.6.0 (AB SCIEX). ChemoView 2.0.2 software (AB SCIEX) was used for absolute quantification purposes.

MS/MS data analysis

For the analysis, 80% of randomly selected raw quantitation data from each group were fed to SIMCA-P v11.5 software (Umetrics AB, Umea, Sweden) for partial least squares-discriminant analysis (PLS-DA) to find the difference among the groups. Potential metabolite markers were first selected based on the algorithm of significant analysis of microarrays (SAM)17 and then confirmed by one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) or Student’s t-test (P<0.05 is considered significant). Metabolites showed reverse changing trends between the LC and LD groups compared to the CONT group subjected to binary logistic regression analysis to construct a diagnosis model. The diagnostic ability of the model was evaluated by the area under the receiver operating characteristic (ROC) curve (AUC). The diagnosis accuracy of this regression model was further validated by the remaining 20% samples from each group. All statistical analyses were conducted by using MINITAB v16.0 software (State College, PA, USA).Go to:

Results

QC sample data were first evaluated to ensure methodological applicability. All the QC values fell within the recommended ±2 standard deviation (SD) ranges (data not shown). This indicated that the adopted NBS tactic was stable and could be used to analyze real samples. For different LC types, the detected parameters showed no difference. This might be due to the fact that the parameters selected in this study could only reflect the general features of LC, or that the included patient numbers of different types were not sufficient enough to show subtype difference. PLS-DA was then used to differentiate the LC, LD, and CONT groups. It gave a relatively clear separation between the LC and non-LC (LD and CONT) groups (Figure 1A). A validation test based on 100 permutations indicated that no overfitting occurred in the analysis with the intercepts of R2=0.086 and Q2=−0.231 (Figure 1B).18 Evidently, Figure 1A shows a complete overlap between the LD and CONT groups, indicating that benign lung diseases did not cause substantial metabolic changes as malignant lung diseases.

An external file that holds a picture, illustration, etc.
Object name is ott-9-2479Fig1.jpg

Open in a separate windowFigure 1

PLS-DA analysis results of all three groups.

Notes: (A) The score plot based on the first two calculated components after PLS-DA of the detected metabolites. (B) Validation of the PLS-DA model by showing the intercepts of R2 and Q2.

Abbreviations: PLS-DA, partial least squares-discriminant analysis; LC, lung cancer; LD, benign lung disease; CONT, healthy control.

In the next step, SAM analysis was carried out to select the differentially changed metabolites and calculated ratios among the three groups. It was shown that the blood levels of 65 parameters were different at least between two randomly selected groups (Figure S1). Further analyzed by one-way ANOVA, all the 65 parameters changed significantly (P<0.05) as presented in the heat map (Figure 2).

An external file that holds a picture, illustration, etc.
Object name is ott-9-2479Fig2.jpg

Open in a separate windowFigure 2

Heat map representation of the differentially changed parameters among the three groups.

Abbreviations: LC, lung cancer; LD, benign lung disease; CONT, healthy control.

To further investigate whether the adopted method could facilitate LC diagnosis, the data shown in Figure 2 were explored to find the parameters that showed reverse changing trends between the LC and LD groups as compared to the CONT group. The results showed that 12 parameters showed reverse changing trends. They included nine endogenous metabolites and three calculated ratios (Figure 3). Compared to the CONT group, Pro, C12, C14, C14:1, and Cit/Arg levels were elevated in the LC group but decreased in the LD group. On the contrary, Arg, Hcy, Pip, Arg/Orn, C5-OH/C0, and C10:1 levels were decreased in the LC group and increased in the LD group. These results indicate that benign lung diseases would result in some reversible metabolic changes as compared to those of the malignant lung diseases.

An external file that holds a picture, illustration, etc.
Object name is ott-9-2479Fig3.jpg

Open in a separate windowFigure 3

The parameters showing difference between any two of the LC, LD, and CONT groups.

Abbreviations: LC, lung cancer; LD, benign lung disease; CONT, healthy control.

In the context of clinical utilization, these 12 parameters were further processed through a binary logistic regression analysis to establish a model for malignant and nonmalignant disease diagnosis. The final model included six parameters: Arg, Pro, C10:1, Arg/Orn, Cit/Arg, and C5-OH/C0 (P<0.05). ROC curve analysis indicated that diagnosis with a sensitivity of 91.3% and a specificity of 92.7% could be obtained if an optimal cutoff value of 0.766 was selected (Figure 4). The AUC was 0.967, indicating that this statistic model was robust for diagnostic purpose. On evaluation by another set of samples, the diagnosis accuracy of this regression model was 91.9% (68/74, with a sensitivity of 92.5% and a specificity of 91.2%). This diagnosis ability was comparable to that obtained by the combined use of routine multiple protein tumor markers for LC diagnosis.14Figure 4

ROC curve analysis of the regression model based on the parameters of Arg, Pro, Arg/Orn and Cit/Arg.

Notes: The final regression equation was: y=3.791–0.095×Arg–0.005×Pro+2.137×Arg/Orn+0.354×Cit/Arg–179.502×C5-OH/C0–12.652×C10:1. The dashed lines indicate the 95% confidence interval. The solid line represents the mean level.

Abbreviation: ROC, receiver operating characteristic.Go to:

Discussion

The search for new tumor markers has become a hot spot in all cancerous diseases including LC. Low-dose computed tomography could result in over 90% false-positive rates for LC diagnosis.14 The other strategies used were either with low sensitivity or with low specificity.14 One of the first used tumor markers for LC diagnosis is carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA). But, extremely elevated CEA levels could only account for 40%–80% of LC patients. It is most valuable as a prognostic marker rather than a diagnosis marker when used independently.19 Neuron-specific enolase (NSE) is another commonly used LC marker. Approximately, 40%–70% of LC patients, especially those suffering from SCLC, could have higher blood NSE levels. Approximately, 11%–41% of non-SCLC patients could be detected with elevated serum NSE levels. Similar to CEA, NSE tends to be used as a prognostic marker.19 The other markers include tissue polypeptide antigen and squamous cell carcinoma-related antigen. All of them are not sensitive enough and lack the specificity for LC if used individually. A recent report showed that combined use of different serum tumor biomarkers could improve LC diagnosis sensitivity and/or specificity.14 Remarkably, quantitation of these multiple serum protein markers is not cost-effective. What makes things worse is that nearly all the currently used LC biomarkers can elevate in benign lung diseases separately or collectively.14

Through sequential statistical analysis, at least 65 parameters were found to be differently expressed in the three groups (Figure 2). We speculated that benign lung diseases are characterized by reversible metabolic changes, but malignant lung diseases are the result of substantial irreversible metabolic remodeling.20 In order to avoid interference from the benign lung diseases, attention was paid to screening parameters that changed reversibly between the LC and LD groups as compared to the CONT group. Finally, 12 parameters were locked (Figure 3). Further filtered by regression analysis, the remaining six parameters could be sufficiently utilized for LC diagnosis purposes.

Increased blood Pro concentration has been found in various tumors.21,22 Pro is the only secondary amino acid involved in protein synthesis, and shows distinct biological functions compared to other primary amino acids.23 It plays significant roles in maintaining cancer cell proliferation and invasion and is also an anti-stress agent.24 Pro can be synthesized from Arg. The decreased concentrations of Arg in LC (Figure 3) might be due to its excessive conversion into Pro. For Pro synthesis, Arg should be first converted into Orn, which mainly takes place in the urea cycle. In the LC group, blood Arg/Orn was lower than that of the normal people. This evidence might partially explain the abovementioned deduction.23 Decreased Cit/Arg ratios were reported in interferon-α-treated cancer patients.25 Thus, this study implied that urea cycle intermediates play key roles in LC progression.

Acylcartinine-related parameters included in the regression model were also decreased in the LC group but increased in the LD group (Figure 3). Most of them were medium-and long-chain acylcarnitines, indicating the compromised mitochondrial β-oxidation functions. Impaired mitochondrial function is a universal pathological feature in nearly all tumors. A previous report also indicated that decreased medium- and long-chain acylcarnitines could be found in the urine of non-SCLC patients,26 whereas the exact biological significance is still elusive.Go to:

Conclusion

In this study, the DBS-based MS/MS NBS strategy was successfully used to assist in LC diagnosis. Combining six parameters, a regression model was constructed to realize accurate diagnosis of LC, which was comparable to the integrated utilization of some traditional serum protein biomarkers. Further analysis will focus on the integrated use of protein and metabolite markers to improve LC diagnosis accuracy. The employed MS/MS analysis could be completed in 2–3 minutes and was compatible with screening purposes. The cost to perform the MS/MS analysis is just similar to one tumor protein marker detection by immunochemiluminometric analysis, which meant that it was a cost-effective method for screening purposes. Here, only LC was selected as an example. It can be expected that this MS/MS analysis can be applied to explore the potential of metabolite markers for the diagnosis of other cancerous diseases.Go to:

Supplementary material

Figure S1

SAM analysis of the tandem mass spectrometry (MS/MS) data to screen the significantly changed parameters.Click here to view.(93K, tif)Go to:

Acknowledgments

This study was partially supported by the project from the Science and Technology Department of Liaoning Province.Go to:

Footnotes

Disclosure

The authors report no conflicts of interest in this work.Go to:

References

1. Lanpher B, Brunetti-Pierri N, Lee B. Inborn errors of metabolism: the flux from Mendelian to complex diseases. Nat Rev Genet. 2006;7(6):449–460. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]2. Zytkovicz TH, Fitzgerald EF, Marsden D, et al. Tandem mass spectrometric analysis for amino, organic, and fatty acid disorders in newborn dried blood spots: a two-year summary from the New England Newborn Screening Program. Clin Chem. 2001;47(11):1945–1955. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]3. Duesberg P, Mandrioli D, McCormack A, et al. Is carcinogenesis a form of speciation? Cell Cycle. 2011;10(13):2100–2114. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]4. Burrage LC, Nagamani SC, Campeau M, et al. Branched-chain amino acid metabolism: from rare Mendelian diseases to more common disorders. Hum Mol Genet. 2014;23(R1):R1–R8. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]5. Mayers JR, Wu C, Clish CB, et al. Elevation of circulating branched-chain amino acids is an early event in human pancreatic adenocarcinoma development. Nat Med. 2014;20(10):1193–1198. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]6. Huang D, Li T, Li X, et al. HIF-1-mediated suppression of acyl-CoA dehydrogenases and fatty acid oxidation is critical for cancer progression. Cell Rep. 2014;8(6):1930–1942. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]7. Sohn EJ, Kim J, Hwang Y, et al. TGF-beta suppresses the expression of genes related to mitochondrial function in lung A549 cells. Cell Mol Biol. 2012;(Suppl 58):OL1763–OL1767. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]8. Parker SJ, Metallo CM. Metabolic consequences of oncogenic IDH mutations. Pharmacol Ther. 2015;152:54–62. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]9. Onal IK, Turhan N, Oztas E, et al. Hepatocellular carcinoma in an adult patient with type IV glycogen storage disease. Acta Gastroenterol Belg. 2009;72(3):377–378. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]10. Millington DS, Kodo N, Norwood DL, et al. Tandem mass spectrometry: a new method for acylcarnitine profiling with potential for neonatal screening for inborn errors of metabolism. J Inherit Metab Dis. 1990;13(3):321–324. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]11. Pandor A, Eastham J, Chilcott J, et al. Economics of tandem mass spectrometry screening of neonatal inherited disorders. Int J Technol Assess Health Care. 2006;22(3):321–326. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]12. Pandor A, Eastham J, Beverley C, et al. Clinical effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of neonatal screening for inborn errors of metabolism using tandem mass spectrometry: a systematic review. Health Technol Assess. 2004;8(12):iii1–iii121. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]13. Gruner N, Stambouli O, Ross RS. Dried blood spots – preparing and processing for use in immunoassays and in molecular techniques. J Vis Exp. 2015;13(97):e52619. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]14. Hirales Casillas CE, Flores Fernandez JM, Padilla CE, et al. Current status of circulating protein biomarkers to aid the early detection of lung cancer. Future Oncol. 2014;10(8):1501–1513. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]15. Spiro SG, Porter JC. Lung cancer – where are we today? Current advances in staging and nonsurgical treatment. Am J Respir Crit Care Med. 2002;166(9):1166–1196. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]16. Wang Q, Sun T, Cao Y, et al. A dried blood spot mass spectrometry metabolomic approach for rapid breast cancer detection. OncoTargets and Therapy. 2016;9:1389–1398. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]17. Tusher VG, Tibshirani R, Chu G. Significance analysis of microarrays applied to the ionizing radiation response. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2001;98(9):5116–5121. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]18. Huang Z, Lin L, Gao Y, et al. Bladder cancer determination via two urinary metabolites: a biomarker pattern approach. Mol Cell Proteomics. 2011;10(10):M111. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]19. Ferrigno D, Buccheri G. Clinical applications of serum markers for lung cancer. Respir Med. 1995;89(9):587–597. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]20. Warburg O. On the origin of cancer cells. Science. 1956;123(3191):309–314. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]21. Catchpole G, Platzer A, Weikert C, et al. Metabolic profiling reveals key metabolic features of renal cell carcinoma. J Cell Mol Med. 2011;15(1):109–118. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]22. Hirayama A, Kami K, Sugimoto M, et al. Quantitative metabolome profiling of colon and stomach cancer microenvironment by capillary electrophoresis time-of-flight mass spectrometry. Cancer Res. 2009;69(11):4918–4925. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]23. Phang JM, Pandhare J, Liu Y. The metabolism of proline as microenvironmental stress substrate. J Nutr. 2008;138(10):2008S–2015S. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]24. Liu W, Glunde K, Bhujwalla ZM, et al. Proline oxidase promotes tumor cell survival in hypoxic tumor microenvironments. Cancer Res. 2012;72(14):3677–3686. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]25. Fekkes D, Van Gool AR, Bannink M, et al. Nitric oxide production and monoamine oxidase activity in cancer patients during interferon-alpha therapy. Amino Acids. 2009;37(4):703–708. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]26. Wu Q, Wang Y, Gu X, et al. Urinary metabolomic study of non-small cell lung carcinoma based on ultra high performance liquid chromatography coupled with quadrupole time-of-flight mass spectrometry. J Sep Sci. 2014;37(14):1728–1735. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]


Articles from OncoTargets and therapy are provided here courtesy of Dove Press


Formats:

Share

Save items

Add to FavoritesView more options

Similar articles in PubMed

See reviews…See all…

Cited by other articles in PMC

See all…

Links

Recent Activity

ClearTurn Off

See more…

Posted on Leave a comment

Mass Spectrometry Applications for Toxicology

Michael M. MbughuniPaul J. Jannetto, and Loralie J. LangmanAuthor informationCopyright and License informationDisclaimerThis article has been cited by other articles in PMC.Go to:

Abstract

Toxicology is a multidisciplinary study of poisons, aimed to correlate the quantitative and qualitative relationships between poisons and their physiological and behavioural effects in living systems. Other key aspects of toxicology focus on elucidation of the mechanisms of action of poisons and development of remedies and treatment plans for associated toxic effects. In these endeavours, Mass spectrometry (MS) has become a powerful analytical technique with a wide range of application used in the Toxicological analysis of drugs, poisons, and metabolites of both. To date, MS applications have permeated all fields of toxicology which include; environmental, clinical, and forensic toxicology. While many different analytical applications are used in these fields, MS and its hyphenated applications such as; gas chromatography MS (GC-MS), liquid chromatography MS (LC-MS), inductively coupled plasma ionization MS (ICP-MS), tandem mass spectrometry (MS/MS and MSn) have emerged as powerful tools used in toxicology laboratories. This review will focus on these hyphenated MS technologies and their applications for toxicology.Key words: Environmental toxicology, clinical toxicology, forensic toxicology, mass spectrometry technologiesGo to:

INTRODUCTION

Toxicology can be thought of as the study of poisons, how poisonous encounters occur, how individuals respond to these encounters, and how to develop strategies for the clinical management of toxic exposures1. Poisons can be broadly defined as biologically active substances causing toxic effects in living systems. In essence, any biologically active molecule capable of altering normal physiology within a living system becomes a poison upon accumulation to quantities sufficient for a toxic effect1. For this reason, even therapeutic remedies can become poisons and toxic effects depend not only on the dose, but also on the overall pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic effects2.

Since we are constantly surrounded by various chemicals, exposure can occur at home, work, or from the environment. The sheer complexity of possible poisons requires the use of sophisticated analytical tools and techniques to evaluate toxic exposures3-6. Toxic evaluations usually begin with qualitative or quantitative assessment in order to identify and/or quantify a toxic substance that could account for observed toxic syndromes (toxidromes) which are characteristic of different classes of poisons7. In addition, identification of the source for toxic exposures is equally important. However, the overall role of laboratory testing is to identify and confirm the presence of a suspected poison and also to provide prognostic information when test results are able to predict clinical outcomes and/or help guide patient management.

In toxicology, the general analytical scheme for assessment of poisons in various matrices involves; 1) extraction, 2) purification 3) detection and 4) quantification (Scheme 1, A)8. The rise of modern analytical tools used by toxicology laboratories seems to have coincided with the chemical/industrial revolution (roughly 1850’s to 1950’s). A time which saw development of new liquid-liquid and solid-phase extraction methods along with qualitative or quantitative methods of detecting poisons based on their physical characteristics8,9. By the early twentieth century, chromatographic techniques using differential migration processes for separation of target molecules were developed by Mikhail Tsvet9 and with the first versions of modern separation techniques such as liquid chromatography (LC) and gas-liquid chromatography (GLC or simply gas chromatography, GC) became routine in both analytical and preparative applications by mid-20th century1,10,11. At this time, labs also started to see the development of the first versions of modern mass spectrometers being used primarily for analysis of relatively pure materials11-12.Scheme 1

The analytical process for toxic compound evaluation in toxicology

As MS, GC and LC technologies continued to advance in the second half of the 20th century, the more sophisticated methods used in modern toxicology laboratories started to emerge as amalgamations of separation and detection modes, creating new powerful analytical applications.

These included; high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), GC-MS, LC-MS, MS/MS and MSn. These new technologies were initially used by research laboratories and later adopted into clinical laboratories11,13. To date, many of the modern analytical applications such as GC-MS and LC-MS still incorporate the same analytical scheme used by the earliest toxicology laboratories. But they are more stream-lined by combining multiple steps in the process with potential for automation (Scheme 1, B). This review will highlight current MS applications for Toxicology.

Mass spectrometry

Mass spectrometry is a quantitative technique which determines the mass-to-charge (m/z) ratio. In general, a mass spectrometer can be divided into four main components (Scheme 1, B): 1) a sample inlet, 2) an ion source, 3) a mass analyzer, and 4) a detector. The sample inlet is where the sample enters the instrument before reaching the ion source. Ion sources are generally distinguished based on their underlining ionization technique11,12. The ionization technique used will determine the type of sample (e.g solid, liquid, vs gaseous samples) that can be analyzed in a given instrument and therefore also the type of chromatographic separation technique that should be coupled to the MS. Furthermore, the efficiency of sample ionization also determines in part the instrument’s analytical sensitivity11,12. MS instruments in toxicology laboratories generally have LC or GC front ends, feeding into the instrument inlet either a liquid or gaseous sample for downstream ionization, analysis, detection, and quantitation (Figure 1, A-C)3,4.Figure 1

Simple representation of A) GC-MS; B) LC-MS; and C) ICP-MS instruments and the ionization process for EI, ESI, and ICP occurring prior to mass analysis and detection in the mass spectrometer

Common ionization techniques used by GC-MS include; electron ionization (EI) and chemical ionization (CI) for analysis of volatile and heat stable compounds (Figure 1A, GC-MS)11. For LC-MS, Atmospheric pressure ionization techniques (API) such as; electrospray ionization (ESI) and atmospheric pressure chemical ionization (APCI) are used for non-volatile and heat labile compounds (Figure 1B, LC-MS). Inductively coupled plasma ionization (ICP) is another ionization method used for elemental analysis usually for metals determination using ICP-MS (Figure 1C, ICP-MS) and matrix assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) for ionization of solid samples for MS analysis. Since MALDI techniques are not commonly used in toxicology applications, these won’t be discussed in much detail here. Furthermore, the focus will be on the more prevalent EI, ESI and ICP ionization techniques used for toxicology applications despite the fact that modern GC-MS and LC-MS instruments can usually switch between EI/CI and ESI/APCI ionization mechanisms, respectively4,5,11.

Mass analyzers and MS performance

From the ion source, sample ions enter the mass analyzer. Mass analyzers are the heart of the instrument and determine key performance characteristics such as the instrument’s mass resolution, accuracy, and range. The mass range is the analytical mass range of the instrument. The resolution determines the ability of the analyzer to resolve two adjacent masses on the mass spectrum and is defined by the full width of the mass peak at half height of the peak maximum (FWHM). For a given m/z value, the resolution can be expressed as a ratio of m/z to FWHM such that for an ion with m/z 1000 and peak width of 0.65 atomic mass unit (amu) at FWHM the resolution is 1538. Low resolution instruments have FWHM > 0.65 amu and high resolution instruments reaching FWHM < 0.1 amu. The mass accuracy of MS instrument refers to the error associated with a particular m/z measurement. High mass accuracy gives the ability to measure the true mass of an ion to more decimal points. For example if the true mass of target ion is 1000 m/z and the measured mass from the instrument is 1000.002 m/z. The mass accuracy can be expressed in parts per million based on the ratio of the difference between the true mass and the measured mass to that of the true mass. So a ratio of 0.002/1000 which equals 0.000002 or a mass accuracy of 2 ppm in this example.

Mass analyzers typically used in toxicology include; quadrupole, ion traps, time of flight (TOF) and sector4,11,15,16. Quadrupole analyzers use four parallel metal rods to create a variable electromagnetic field which allows ions within a particular m/z range to reach the detector in order to record the mass spectrum. Quadrupole analyzers are cheap and robust, but can typically only achieve resolution around 1000 and mass accuracies of 100 ppm16.

Ion trap (IT) instruments include quadrupole ion traps (QIT), Fourier Transform Ion Cyclotron Resonance (FT-ICR) and orbitraps. QIT use 2D or 3D quadrupole fields to trap target ions in a confined space and the mass spectrum is acquired by scanning the radion frequency (RF) and direct current (DC) fields to eject selected ions for detection11,12. Resolution for QIT is about 1000 – 10,000 with mass accuracy > 50 ppm16. FT-ICR are ion trap that keep ions in cyclotron motion within the trap. m/z detection occurs through measurement of induced currents from changes in ion orbits when an RF field is applied. This, allows calculation of m/z values with high accuracy (resolution > 200,000 and accuracy 2-5 ppm)11,12,16. Orbitraps use a metal barrel to create an electrostatic field for trapping ions in cyclical motion. The detection method is similar to that use in FT-ICR traps but with lower resolution < 150,000 but similar mass accuracy to FT-ICR16.

TOF mass analyzers use a fixed potential to accelerate ions through a drift tube. Since all ions in a given pulse will attain the same kinetic energy, ions accelerate according to their m/z value and the mass spectrum is collected based on the time it takes individual ions to strike the detector. TOF analyzers generally have a higher mass range than quadrupole and IT instruments with relatively high resolution (1000 – 40,000) and mass accuracy (> 5 ppm)16.

Sector analyzers are either magnetic sectors or double focusing (magnetic and electric) sectors. Similar to a TOF analyzer, magnetic sectors use a fixed potential to accelerate ions coming from the source such that ions attain the same kinetic energy but different momentum according to their m/z16. Accelerated ions are then passed through a magnetic field which guides ions through an arched path in order to strike the detector according to their momentum to charge ratio. By scanning the magnetic field strength, ions with different m/z are selected for detection. In magnetic sectors, resolution is limited by minor kinetic energy dispersions (ion velocities). A double focusing sector analyzer adds a electric field before or after the magnetic field to also focus ions according to their kinetic energy to charge ratios. Focusing ions of different velocities to the same point. This gives double focusing magnetic sectors relatively high resolution (100,000) and high mass accuracy (<1 ppm)16.

In summary, the ion source, mass analyzer, and detector for a particular instrument all play a role in defining the instrument’s analytical capabilities. It is also important to note that even though the basic design of MS instruments has stayed relatively unchanged over time, the performance capabilities of MS sources, analyzers, and detectors have continued to improve over time4,11,13,15. The strength of MS for Toxicology is the combined sensitivity and specificity that is needed to identify and quantify the toxic agents.

MS instruments

The versatility of MS analytical applications comes from the ability to couple different separation techniques in the front-end (i.e. GC or LC) and various analyzers either in tandem or hybrid configurations4,5,11,12,15. The type and arrangement in a given instrument not only determines its resolution, mass accuracy, and analytical range, but also the type of experiment(s) possible for analytical applications (Figure 2, A-E)4,11,13,15. In clinical applications, the MS instrument with most versatile capabilities is perhaps the triple quadrupole tandem mass spectrometer or TQ-MS/MS with three quadrupole analyzers arranged in tandem for MS/MS experiments13. The first quadrupole (Q1) selects ions that will enter the second quadrupole (Q2), a collision cell able to carry out collision induced dissociation (CID) of selected ions. From the collision cell, product ions enter the third quadrupole (Q3) which can guide selected ions into the detector. TQ-MS/MS instruments are capable of performing full MS scans (FS, Figure 2A), multiple reaction monitoring (MRM, Figure 2, B-E), or single reaction monitoring (SRM, not shown) for analyte detection13,3.Figure 2

Analytical experiments possible with a TQ-MS/MS instrument

The MS/MS experiment involves selected fragmentation of target ions using CID followed by analysis of the products (Figure 2B, product ion scan)13. The target ion is often referred to as parent ion and CID fragments are referred to as product ions. In MS/MS experiments, MRM will follow the conversion of one parent ion to one product ion via CID (indicated as parent m/z > product m/z) or any experimentally feasible combination of parent and product ions given analytical capabilities of the instrument. MRM and SRM usually increases sensitivity based on improved signal to noise ratio, and the MS/MS offers increased specificity at the cost of decreased sensitivity since signal is lost at each round of fragmentation. Specificity improves when unique fragmentation patterns are able to distinguish co-eluting ions with identical exact mass as targeted molecule, but different chemical composition. In addition, MS/MS can also be used for structural determinations. A key advantage of the TQ-MS/MS instrument is the ability to do precursor ion scan (PI, Figure 3C) or neutral loss (NL, Figure 3D) reaction scans over a wide m/z range4,11,13,15. This application can use a single sample injection for rapid scanning of the full m/z spectrum in order to identify compounds with known functional groups that dissociate as detectable ions or neutral masses following CID.

Due to the tandem arrangement of quadrupole analyzers in the TQ-MS/MS, MS/MS is done sequentially in space between different analyzers. In IT instruments (QIT, Fourier transform ion trap or FT-IT, and orbitrap), MS/MS experiments are done in sequence over time based on the ability of the trap to retain selected ions following each round of CID4,11. MS/MS also occurs with high efficiency in IT instruments but one key limitation is the capacity to retain ions and m/z scanning speed4,11. 2D ion traps were designed to overcome the ion capacity problem and have a higher analytical range giving FS, SRM, and MRM capabilities over a wider m/z range compared to 3D ion traps4,11. The in-time MS/MS application of IT instruments means PI and NL screening experiments are not possible. However, MSn experiments for structural determination of larger molecules are possible, usually with no more than three rounds of fragmentation due to loss of signal following each consecutive round of CID4.

Over time, MS instruments have continued to improve in selectivity, mass accuracy, and resolution, along with formation of hybrid instruments with enhanced capabilities often designed to overcome limitations of available instrumentation. For example, one key limitation of TQ-MS/MS instruments is that the PI/NL scans cannot be performed in a single injection along with MS/MS acquisitions for targeted structural determination. The QTRAP is a hybrid TQ-IT instrument where the third quadruple is a linear IT, making possible the acquisition of PI, NL, and MSn experiments in a single injection4,11. Other hybrid instruments are designed to couple more accurate mass determination with MS/MS or MSn capabilities like the hybrid quadrupole time-of-flight (QTOF) instrument or quadrupole-orbitrap hybrid (QE or Q Exactive).Go to:

MS APPLICATIONS FOR TOXICOLOGY

To date, MS and its hyphenated applications (GC/LC/ICP-MS) have emerged as a powerful analytical tool for toxicology applications. GC-MS is generally used for analysis of volatile and heat stabile compounds, LC-MS for analysis of non-volatile and heat labile compounds, and ICP-MS for elemental analysis usually in metals determination4,5,11,13,14,17. Owing to the analytical versatility of MS methods with exceptional specificity, sensitivity, dynamic range, and the ability to screen large numbers of unrelated compounds, MS applications are central for toxicological analysis of drugs and poisons. Current use includes drug analysis for targeted applications (e.g. in TDM and pain management), screening applications (e.g. in drugs of abuse (DOA), forensic toxicology, environmental toxicology, and clinical toxicology), and in pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamics (PK/PD) research5,11,14,15,17,18. Here, we will focus on GC-MS, LC-MS, ICP-MS, and MS/MS capabilities and respective applications for toxicology.

Overcoming limitations of Immunoassays (IA) in TDM and drug screens

Since MS applications emerged at a time where IAs were already established in clinical laboratories, one driving force for the expansion of GC and LC-MS application in Toxicology has been efforts to overcome the limitations of IAs in drug analysis13,19-22. One limitation is IA are usually developed by manufacturers who seek FDA test approval based on commercial interests, with the end user having little control over this process. Another limitation is poor analytical specificity and analytical interferences13,19-22. The specificity of IA’s developed for small drugs is usually limited to the detection of drug classes, but not necessarily individual drugs within a given drug class. This limitation could stem from the fact that antibodies generally recognize epitopes on large biomolecules, making the specificity of IAs poor for recognizing specific small molecules13,22. Currently, IA’s are often used in first line screening for Toxicology since they can quickly identify a potentially negative sample, and are useful in identifying drug classes or specific drugs (i.e. benzodiazepines, opiates, amphetamines, cannabinoids, methadone, fentanyl, and phencyclidine), but suffer from high rates of false positive and false negative results due to a lack of specificity, cross reactivity, or interferences4,21. Since immunoassays are generally available as FDA approved tests on large automated analyzers, the common approach is to screen using an immunoassay first and then confirm positive results using GC-MS or LC-MS techniques which have superior sensitivity and specificity to identify specific molecules4,21.

Drug analysis by GC-MS

Coupling of GC to MS provided an opportunity for development of routine applications with the specificity and sensitivity of MS (Figure 1A)11,14,17,23. GC is an analytical separation technique using a liquid or polymer stationary phase along with a gas mobile phase for separation of molecules based on partitioning between the stationary and gas phase. The process usually requires high temperature or temperature gradients (up to 350°C) in order to facilitate compound elution into the mobile gas phase (Figure 2A). The analytes are separated based on their column retention time, entering the MS in the gas phase for ionization usually with EI sources to facilitate MS detection. EI ionization uses the kinetic energy from a stream of high energy electrons (usually 70 eV) to strip electrons from analyte molecules at high temperatures, a process that produces a reproducible fragmentation patter from organic compounds (Figure 2A)11. For this reason, EI-GC-MS data is conducive to inter-laboratory spectral comparisons and extensive EI-GC-MS libraries have been generated for spectral matching based identification11,23,24. These libraries supplement “in-house” generated libraries and greatly increasing the ability to identify unknown compounds using GC-MS. This analytical advantage has made EI-GC-MS a premier tool for untargeted detection and quantitation of small molecules with MS specificity. EI-GC-MS is still used for general unknown screening applications using nearly any sample type17,21,25. Additionally, GC-MS is commonly used to confirm IA positive results in drug screens in clinical toxicology4,18,22,23. One key limitation of GC-MS is the need to have volatile and heat stabile analytes, this means that some analytes require chemical derivatization in order to make the drugs sufficiently volatile for GC-MS analysis23,25. This limits GC-MS expansion to analysis of many drugs and adds additional steps and cost during sample preparation.

GC-MS applications for toxicology

GC-MS does have several advantages compared to its LC-MS/MS counterpart that include: efficient GC separation with higher chromatographic resolution and peak capacity, a homogeneous gas mobile phase (usually helium or hydrogen), optimization of separation conditions with precise electronic controls such as temperature programming, and the ability to search EI-MS databased for library based toxic compound identification11,24. Taken together with good MS sensitivity (1-10 µg/L) and specificity, a leading application of GC-MS is the general screening of unknown drugs or toxic compounds in doping control, environmental analysis, and clinical and forensic toxicology24.

Therefore, in clinical toxicology, GC-MS is commonly used for screening blood and urine for acute overdose of prescription and over the counter medications in emergency room settings. This is specifically useful for drugs with toxic effects and known antidotes or therapies that can be initiated to treat the toxic effect1,17,25. It is also commonly used to perform drug screens for identification and/or quantitation of poisons in the clinical evaluation of toxindromes or in forensic investigations. Drugs commonly quantitated by GC-MS include; barbiturates, narcotics, stimulants, anesthetics, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, anti-epileptic drugs, sedative hypnotics, and antihistamines24. In environmental toxicology, GC-MS is used for the convenient screening of a wide range of toxic compounds such as; chloro-phenols in water and soil or polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), dioxins, dibenzofurans, organo-chlorine pesticides, herbicides, phenols, halogenated pesticides, and sulphur analysis in air24. One thing to mentions is most toxicology laboratories which can afford it are slowly replacing GC-MS with LC-MS as the method of choice for targeted drug screens for clinical and forensic toxicology applications4,14,23. Lastly, the higher specificity of MS detection compared to enzymatic spectrophotometric assays, GC-MS is sometimes used for identification and quantitation volatile substances (e.g. ethanol, methanol, acetone, isopropanol, and ethylene glycol) in body fluids such as blood and urine.

LC-MS applications for drug analysis

Due to the limitation of GC-MS for analysis of volatile and heat stable compounds, LC-MS applications have expanded MS applications to the direct analysis of non-volatile and heat labile molecules in toxicology laboratories (Figure 2B)4,11,13,21,22,26. The coupling of MS to LC was first possible when API-ESI sources became available in the 1990s, making it possible to ionize samples in the condensed phase and inject ions directly for MS analysis11,12. In contrast to EI used in GC, ESI is a soft ionization technique which does not induce fragmentation, instead, singly or multiply charged ions form from intact molecules due to proton transfer events (Figure 2B)11,12. ESI uses a capillary tube to flow solvent through a voltage potential before the solvent is sprayed into the MS vacuum as an aerosol12. Under vacuum, a heated gas (e.g. N2) is used to dry the droplets and release gas phase ions for MS detection. The exact mechanism of ion formation by ESI is not fully understood, but the aerosol droplets are either negative or positively charged depending on the voltage applied and protonation/deprotonation events giving intact [M+H]+ or [M-H] ions for MS analysis (Figure 2B)11,12. To date, there seems to be no limit to the size of molecule which can be ionized by ESI in biological samples12. Multiple protonation/deprotonation events also means ESI can yield more than one m/z peak from a single compound, a phenomenon that can either complicate the MS analysis or facilite measurements which improve precision or allow observation of m/z from targets with MW above the instrument range12. One inherent limitation of the ESI process, and therefore LC-MS, is the mass spectra of a given compound can vary depending on instrument conditions, including the capillary diameter, sample flow rate, and voltage applied4,23. The consequence is ESI mass spectra are instrument dependent, requiring the development of in-house derived spectral libraries for compound analysis23,26. Regardless, by overcoming key limitations of GC-MS, LC-MS has significantly expanded MS applications to targeted drug analysis of non-volatile and heat labile compounds such as drug metabolites11,13-15,26.

The switch form GC-MS to LC-MS for analysis of toxin and drug metabolites in toxicology is notable11,18,27-29. One reason for this is that most drugs or toxicants entering the body undergo biotransformation by phase I (functionalization) and phase II (conjugation with hydrophilic endogenous molecules) metabolic reactions in order to facilitate elimination from the body11,30. The transformations often result with structurally diverse hydrophilic and heat labile metabolites with biological activities ranging from no pharmacological activity, to pharmacologically activity, to toxicity15,23,29,30. The nature of these drug metabolites, especially phase II metabolites, gives LC-MS a unique advantage for analysis of drugs and their metabolites using LC-MS, MS/MS and MSn applications for identification, structural determination, and mapping PK/PD interactions during ADME30. To date, numerous studies have demonstrated that combined analysis of drug and metabolites greatly increases the ability to positively identify drug use using blood or urine samples25. Furthermore, urine has a much wider window of detection for detecting drug use, but extensive drug metabolism for urine excretion makes metabolite analysis more important for interpretation of results of urine drug analysis in pain management or DOA screening18,25. Lastly, LC-MS is also routinely used for targeted drug analysis in TDM, forensic toxicology, PK/PD pharmaceutical analysis, or in confirmation of compounds that do not work with GC-MS4,18,25,31.

ICP-MS applications for analysis of toxic metals

ICP-MS was introduced for clinical use in 1980’s for individual or multi-elemental metals analysis in toxicology5,32. The ICP source is designed for sample atomization and elemental analysis. Usually a peristaltic pump is used to inject aerosolized liquid samples into an argon plasma discharge at (5000-7000°C), but an LC can also be used for the separation of elements that require speciation (Figure 2C)33. The plasma vaporizes, atomizes, and effectively ionizes the sample for elemental analysis by MS. Advantages of LC-ICP-MS include the ability for metal speciation, multiple element measurements, and a wide dynamic range with accurate and precise trace metal measurements34,35. Detection limits for ICP-MS are commonly in the low ng/L range, giving an advantage in quantification of low levels of trace elements or toxic metals5,35.

A key limitation of ICP-MS applications for metals analysis is polyatomic interferences5,32,34. These are interferences that result from the combination of two (or more) atomic ions from the sample matrix to form molecules which have the same m/z with analytical targets. One example is the combination of the argon plasma gas (40 Da) with a chloride ion (35 Da) or carbon (12 Da) from the biological matrix to produce ArCl (75 Da) and ArC (52 Da) ions. ArCl and ArC have the same m/z as arsenic and chromium, two metals commonly incorporated into toxic metal surveys by ICP-MS5. To date, several ICP-MS applications have been developed in order to overcome isobaric or polyatomic interferences to improve specificity using collision/reactions cell applications. A dynamic reaction cell (DRC) uses a reactive gas in quadrupole ICP-MS instruments to overcome isobaric interferences from the plasma by reacting the gas with either the analyte (ion) of interest or isobaric compound (ion) in order to distinguish the two5. Equally, the quadrupole can act as a collision cell where a inert gas is introduced and will preferentially interact with polyatomic ions with larger radii, reducing their kinetic energy to allow resolution of polyatomic interferances from the analyte of interest through kinetic energy discrimination (KED). Lastly, collision induced dissociation (CID) in a triple quadrupole ICP-MS/MS can be used to break up polyatomic interferences prior to MS detection or a higher resolution instrument (e.g. double focusing sector ICP-MS) can be used to resolve polyatomic inteferences through accurate mass determination5. Owing to the high specificity, sensitivity, and reproducibility in elemental analysis by ICP-MS, this technique is now used in clinical laboratories for toxic metal and trace elements quantitation in a wide variety of samples, these include; whole blood, serum, plasma, urine and dry spots of these liquid samples (using laser ablation with ICP-MS). Sample collections in metal-free tubes are required for accurate determinations5,34,35. Other sample types used in forensic toxicology include; urine, hair, nail, tissue, and or other forensic materials.

Toxic metals and metal exposures

Metals represent some of the oldest toxicants known, with records of toxic metal exposures dating back to ancient times1. Nonetheless, many metals are also essential or trace elements with vital functions for life (i.e. cobalt, copper, iron, magnesium, selenium or zinc), but will become toxic with increased levels or pathologic metabolism like Cu in Wilson Disease (WD)5. Others like; thallium, arsenic, mercury, and lead, are poisons with no well-established physiological function. Other potentially toxic metals include: chromium, cadmium, platinum, nickel, aluminum, and gadolinium5. Metals exert their toxic effects through redox chemistry with biological targets, a process that might change the oxidation state of the metal and lead to formation of characteristic organometallic compounds5,36. Each metal has a specific mechanism of toxicity with different metal species varying in toxic effects. For this reason, metal speciation is an important aspect of clinical evaluations of toxic metal exposures36. Speciation involves identification and quantitation of different forms of a given chemical species. For example, chromiumVI (CrVI) is a powerful toxic oxidant whereas CrIII is less toxic and plays a role in metabolism5,36,. Elemental mercury (Hg°) has a lower toxicity than methyl mercury (MeHg), and arsenic is present in seafood as innocuous arsenocholine and arsenobetaine, but elemental arsenic is highly reactive and toxic to humans5,36. The different metal species can be distinguished through distinct; isotopic composition, oxidation state, or over-all molecular structure with speciationbeing essential in the-evaluation of some toxic metal exposures34-36. Speciation with LC-ICP-MS effectively relies on LC separation of various metal species followed by MS detection. To date, methods have been developed for speciation of Hg, Arsenic, Cr and other36.

Furthermore, isotopic fractionation by high resolution ICP-MS (HR-ICP-MS) or Q-ICP-MS can function as another method of metal identification. For example, lead isotopic ratios (206Pb, 207Pb, 208Pb) may be useful to confirm the source of metal exposure in clinical toxicology or in forensic toxicology5. Studies have also shown 65Cu/63Cu isotopes ratios in dried urine spots or serum can be used to classify treated and untreated Waldenstrom’s disease (WD) patients when isotopically enriched sampes are administered36-38. For this reason, ICP-MS is a powerful tool for evaluation of metal exposures in forensic and clinical investigations with the ability to also use isotopic analysis to confirm the source of lead contamination. These distinctions are important since anthropogenic activities have introduced toxic metals such as lead (from gasoline) into the environment (air, water, and soil), the workplace, and consumer products such as food and pharmaceuticals5,34-36. Furthermore, metals are also used in implants for joint replacement (e.g cobalt, chromium, and titanium) and may leach-out during wear of the prosthetic device leading to the endogenous accumulation with potentially toxic consequences36,39. For these reasons, ICP-MS screening and speciation assays for toxic metals are commonly developed in order to evaluate toxic exposures in clinical toxicology, lethal exposures in forensic toxicology, and investigate environmental sources of metal exposure.

ICP-MS applications in clinical toxicology

ICP-MS is extensively used in multi-analyte toxic metal screens in whole blood, plasma serum and urine5. Blood and urine analysis is generally useful in assessing acute and chronic metal exposure with reference values available to aid with result interpretation from several geographical locations around the world36. Newer applications using dried blood or urine spots along with laser ablation for multi analyte metal analysis have also been described38,40. The multi-analyte ICP-MS metal panels can include up to dozens of targets including; lead, mercury, arsenic, cobalt, chromium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, aluminum, and silver5,36. Lead is commonly evaluated in children due to its adverse effects on development41. Exposures can also occur from buildings with old lead water pipes, lead containing paint, or exposure from environment accumulation due to historic use of gasoline with tetraethyl lead5,41. Mercury exposure can occur from eating carnivorous fish which tend to contain high MeHg content as it accumulates up the food chain from environmental contamination. Exposures to mineral mercury leaching from dental amalgams has also been described42. Mineral mercury is usually measured in plasma and MeHg in whole blood to distinguish exposures from seafood and dental amalgams5,36,42. Arsenic is a substance that has been used in intentional poisonings, but accidental exposure can also occur through contaminated ground water5,43. Toxic levels of cobalt, chromium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel and titanium have been shown in people with various metal replacement joints or dental implants5,39. Aluminum is routinely quantified in plasma to monitor hemodialysis patients and it is also the subject of toxicological controversies associated with adverse effects from vaccines5. Historically, silver has been used as an effective bactericide but when taken in excess, exposures can result with development of argyria along with neurologic, hematologic, renal, or hepatic involvement with blood silver toxic levels as reported from cases of argyria44-46.

ICP-MS applications in forensic toxicology

Deaths due to metal toxicity are uncommon and often unexpected, as a result, all unexplained deaths often prompt blood analysis for traditional metal poisons (e.g arsenic, thallium) toxic heavy metals (e.g arsenic, lead, cadmium, mercury) and other toxic metals (e.g aluminum, chromium, cobalt, molybdenum, nickel, vanadium or tungsten) or drugs (e.g contrast media). One advantage of forensic metals analysis by ICP-MS is the ability to use other sample types in addition to blood or urine5. For example, the use of laser ablation coupled with ICP-MS detection can allow the analysis of various samples such as nail and hair in clinical or forensic toxicology analysis5,40,47. Blood and urine usually reflect exposure in the last days or hours5. Hair is a cumulative biomarker for longer term exposure compared to blood or urine. Each centimeter of hair represents one-month of exposure and can therefore be used to check for a longer window of exposure in clinical and forensic toxicology investigations. Hair can be used in conjunction with blood or urine results to differentiate a single exposure from chronic exposure by comparison with hair samples from a given growth period5. Alternatively, nails are another biomarker for forensic metals analysis by ICP-MS. Nails incorporate elements from blood during linear growth and thickening, providing a window of detection spanning 3 to 5 month for toxic metal exposure5. In clinical toxicology, nail collections are also considered non-invasive and contain more disulfide groups which help incorporate higher metal content, making it a preferred matrix for metals analysis for a longer window of detection when hair is not available due to balding or other reasons (e.g. religious reason)5. Lastly, tissue and biopsies for metals analysis by ICP-MS becomes important when blood and urine are not available and hair and nails are affected by external contamination, or when specific organs biopsies need to be checked for metal accumulation5.Go to:

CONCLUSIONS

In summary, mass spectrometry (MS) is a powerful analytical technique able to distinguish ionizable chemical compounds or elements based on their m/z ratio in the gas phase. With exceptional sensitivity, accuracy, precision, and dynamic range, MS has emerged as an important tool in analytical determinations of poisons and their metabolites in clinical, forensic, and environmental toxicological evaluations. GC-MS is commonly used for general unknown screen (GUS) of poisons, drugs and their metabolites based on the capacity to identify a vast majority of chemical compounds using inter-laboratory EI-MS libraries. The limitation of GC-MS is that compounds need to be volatile or heat stable for compatibility with GC separation. This restriction often requires derivatization of non-volatile compounds for compatibility with GC separation and limits analysis of heat labile compounds which often includes drugs and their metabolites. LC-MS overcomes these limitations by using ESI to introduce ions from liquid samples into the MS for analysis of non-volatile and heat labile compounds. As such, LC-MS is slowly replacing GC-MS for the analysis of poisons, drugs, and their metabolites. Disadvantages of LC-MS include high cost and the inability to use inter-laboratory spectra for compound identification. To date, both GC/LC-MS are used in advanced laboratories along with MS/MS and MSn applications for increased specificity in drug identification, drug metabolite analysis, and structural determination. Lastly, ICP-MS is commonly used for trace and toxic metal analysis in toxicology laboratories. A key advantage of ICP-MS is the ability to do multi-element panels in toxicological analysis along with the use of MS/MS, HR-MS, and DRC applications for resolving interfering compounds. Overall, MS is a versatile analytical tool with many useful applications and has the potential for automation. In general, trends for adopting MS applications for toxicology relies on the ability to multiplex quantitative and qualitative compound evaluations and hyphenated MS applications with higher mass resolution for increased analytical specificity.Go to:

Abbreviations (in alphabetical order)

ADME:absorption, distribution, metabolism, and elimination
APCI:atmospheric pressure chemical ionization
API:atmospheric pressure ionization techniques
CI:chemical ionization
CID:collision induced dissociation
DOA:drugs of abuse
DRC:dynamic reaction center
EI:electron ionization
ESI:electrospray ionization
FDA:food and drug administration
FS:full scan
F T-ICR:fourier transform ion cyclotron resonance
F T-IT:fourier transform ion trap
FWHM:full width at half height
GC:gas chromatography
GC-MS:gas chromatography mass spectrometry
GLC:gas-liquid chromatography
HR:high resolution
IA:immunoassays
ICP-MS:inductively coupled mass spectrometry
IT:ion trap
LC:liquid chromatography
LC-MS:liquid chromatography mass spectrometry
m/z:mass to charge ratio
MALDI:matrix assisted laser desorption ionization
MRM:multiple reaction monitoring
MS:mass spectrometry
MS/MS and MSn:tandem mass spectrometry
MW:molecular weight
PAH:polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons
PK/PD:pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamics
Q1:first quadrupole in MS instrument
Q2:second quadrupole in MS instrument
Q3:third quadrupole in MS instrument
QE or Q Exactive:hydrid qudrupole-orbitrap mass spectrometer
QIT:quadrupole ion traps
QTOF:hybrid quadrupole time-of-flight mass spectrometer
RF:radion frequency
SRM:single reaction monitoring
TDM:therapeutic drug monitoring
TOF:time of flight
TQ-MS/MS:triple quadrupole tandem mass spectrometer
WD:waldenstrom’s disease
2D:two dimension
3D:three dimension

Go to:

REFERENCES

1. Langman L. J., Kapur B. M. (2006) Toxicology: Then and now, Clin Biochem 39, 498-510. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]2. Holsapple M. P., Wallace K. B. (2008) Dose response considerations in risk assessment–an overview of recent ILSI activities, Toxicol Lett 180, 85-92. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]3. Smith M. L., Vorce S. P., Holler J. M., Shimomura E., Magluilo J., Jacobs A. J., Huestis M. A. (2007) Modern instrumental methods in forensic toxicology, J Anal Toxicol 31, 237-253, 238A-239A. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]4. Viette V., Hochstrasser D., Fathi M. (2012) LC-MS (/MS) in Clinical Toxicology Screening Methods, Chimia 66, 339-342. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]5. Goulle J. P., Saussereau E., Mahieu L., Guerbet M. (2014) Current role of ICP-MS in clinical toxicology and forensic toxicology: a metallic profile, Bioanalysis 6, 2245-2259. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]6. Shannon M., Cox M. N., Baum C. R. (1998) Toxicology reviews: Immunoassay in detecting drugs of abuse, Pediatr Emerg Care 14, 372-375. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]7. Holstege C. P., Borek H. A. (2012) Toxidromes, Crit Care Clin 28, 479-+. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]8. Pappas A. A., Massoll N. A., Cannon D. J. (1999) Toxicology: Past, present, and future, Ann Clin Lab Sci 29, 253-262. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]9. Ettre L. S., Sakodynskii K. I. (1993) Tswett,M.S. And the Discovery of Chromatography .2. Completion of the Development of Chromatography (1903-1910), Chromatographia 35, 329-338. [Google Scholar]10. Pippenger C. E. (1979) Therapeutic drug monitoring: an overview, Ther Drug Monit 1, 3-9. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]11. Wen B., Zhu M. S. (2015) Applications of mass spectrometry in drug metabolism: 50 years of progress, Drug Metab Rev 47, 71-87. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]12. Glish G. L., Vachet R. W. (2003) The basics of mass spectrometry in the twenty-first century, Nat Rev Drug Discov 2, 140-150. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]13. Grebe S. K. G., Singh R. J. (2011) LC-MS/MS in the Clinical Laboratory – Where to From Here?, Clin. Biochem. Rev. 32, 5-31. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]14. Garg U., Zhang Y. V. (2016) Mass Spectrometry in Clinical Laboratory: Applications in Therapeutic Drug Monitoring and Toxicology, Methods Mol Biol 1383, 1-10. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]15. Maurer H. H., Meyer M. R. (2016) High-resolution mass spectrometry in toxicology: current status and future perspectives, Arch Toxicol 90, 2161-2172. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]16. Hart-Smith G., Blanksby S. J. (2012) Mass analysis, in Mass Spectrometry in Polymer Chemistry (eds Barner-Kowollik C., Gruendling T., Falkenhagen J., Weidner S.), Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, Germany: doi: 10.1002/9783527641826.ch1. [Google Scholar]17. Nair H., Woo F., Hoofnagle A. N., Baird G. S. (2013) Why GCMS Remains an Invaluable Tool in a Toxicology Lab: A Novel Approach to Clinical Validation of a High Sensitive GCMS Platform for Urine Drug Screening, American journal of clinical pathology 140, 431-431. [Google Scholar]18. Ojanpera I., Kolmonen M., Pelander A. (2012) Current use of high-resolution mass spectrometry in drug screening relevant to clinical and forensic toxicology and doping control, Anal Bioanal Chem 403, 1203-1220. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]19. Becker J. O., Hoofnagle A. N. (2012) Replacing immunoassays with tryptic digestion-peptide immunoaffinity enrichment and LC-MS/MS, Bioanalysis 4, 281-290. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]20. Strathmann F. G., Hoofnagle A. N. (2011) Current and future applications of mass spectrometry to the clinical laboratory, American journal of clinical pathology 136, 609-616. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]21. Jannetto P. J., Fitzerald R. L. (2016) Effective Use of Mass Spectrometry in the Clinical Laboratory, Clin Chem 62, 92-98. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]22. Adaway J. E., Keevil B. G., Owen L. J. (2015) Liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry in the clinical laboratory, Ann Clin Biochem 52, 18-38. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]23. Lynch K. L., Breaud A. R., Vandenberghe H., Wu A. H. B., Clarke W. (2010) Performance evaluation of three liquid chromatography mass spectrometry methods for broad spectrum drug screening, Clin Chim Acta 411, 1474-1481. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]24. Chauhan A., Goyal M. K., Chauhan P. (2014) GC-MS Technique and its Analytical Applications in Science and Technology, J. Anal. Bioanal. Tech. 5, 222. [Google Scholar]25. Yuan C., Chen D., Wang S. H. (2015) Drug confirmation by mass spectrometry: Identification criteria and complicating factors, Clin Chim Acta 438, 119-125. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]26. Vogeser M. (2003) Liquid chromatography-tandem mass spectrometry – Application in the clinical laboratory, Clin Chem Lab Med 41, 117-126. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]27. Fernandez M. D. R., Di Fazio V., Wille S. M. R., Kummer N., Samyn N. (2014) A quantitative, selective and fast ultra-high performance liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry method for the simultaneous analysis of 33 basic drugs in hair (amphetamines, cocaine, opiates, opioids and metabolites), J Chromatogr B 965, 7-18. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]28. Maurer H. H. (2010) Perspectives of Liquid Chromatography Coupled to Low- and High-Resolution Mass Spectrometry for Screening, Identification, and Quantification of Drugs in Clinical and Forensic Toxicology, Ther Drug Monit 32, 324-327. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]29. Meyer M. R., Maurer H. H. (2012) Current applications of high-resolution mass spectrometry in drug metabolism studies, Anal Bioanal Chem 403, 1221-1231. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]30. Caldwell G. W., Yan Z., Tang W., Dasgupta M., Hasting B. (2009) ADME optimization and toxicity assessment in early- and late-phase drug discovery, Curr Top Med Chem 9, 965-980. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]31. Meyer M. R., Maurer H. H. (2016) Review: LC coupled to low- and high-resolution mass spectrometry for new psychoactive substance screening in biological matrices – Where do we stand today?, Anal Chim Acta 927, 13-20. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]32. Lyon T. D. B., Fell G. S., Hutton R. C., Eaton A. N. (1988) Evaluation of Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Mass-Spectrometry (Icp-Ms) for Simultaneous Mult-Element Trace Analysis in Clinical-Chemistry, J Anal Atom Spectrom 3, 265-271. [Google Scholar]33. Mekoli M. L. (2012) Novel biological, forensic, and historical applications of inductively coupled plasma-mass spectrometry., Graduate eses and Dissertations. University of Iowa, Aimes, IA. [Google Scholar]34. Rodushkin I., Engstrom E., Baxter D. C. (2013) Isotopic analyses by ICP-MS in clinical samples, Anal Bioanal Chem 405, 2785-2797. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]35. Profrock D., Prange A. (2012) Inductively coupled plasma-mass spectrometry (ICP-MS) for quantitative analysis in environmental and life sciences: a review of challenges, solutions, and trends, Appl Spectrosc 66, 843-868. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]36. Delafiori J., Ring G., Furey A. (2016) Clinical applications of HPLC-ICP-MS element speciation: A review, Talanta 153, 306-331. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]37. Aramendia M., Rello L., Resano M., Vanhaecke F. (2013) Isotopic analysis of Cu in serum samples for diagnosis of Wilson’s disease: a pilot study, J Anal Atom Spectrom 28, 675-681. [Google Scholar]38. Resano M., Aramendia M., Rello L., Calvo M. L., Berail S., Pecheyran C. (2013) Direct determination of Cu isotope ratios in dried urine spots by means of fs-LA-MC-ICPMS. Potential to diagnose Wilson’s disease, J Anal Atom Spectrom 28, 98-106. [Google Scholar]39. Russell R. D., Estrera K. A., Pivec R., Mont M. A., Huo M. H. (2013) What’s New in Total Hip Arthroplasty, J Bone Joint Surg Am 95A, 1719-1725. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]40. Ghazi A. M., Wataha J. C., O’Dell N. L., Singh B. B., Simmons R., Shuttleworth S. (2002) Quantitative concentration profiling of nickel in tissues around metal implants: a new biomedical application of laser ablation sector field ICP-MS, J Anal Atom Spectrom 17, 1295-1299. [Google Scholar]41. Chandramouli K., Steer C. D., Ellis M., Emond A. M. (2009) Effects of early childhood lead exposure on academic performance and behaviour of school age children, Arch Dis Child 94, 844-848. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]42. Rodriguez-Farre E., Testai E., Bruzell E., De Jong W., Schmalz G., Thomsen M., Hensten A. (2016) The safety of dental amalgam and alternative dental restoration materials for patients and users, Regul Toxicol Pharm 79, 108-109. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]43. Samanta G., Sharma R., Roychowdhury T., Chakraborti D. (2004) Arsenic and other elements in hair, nails, and skin-scales of arsenic victims in West Bengal, India, Sci Total Environ 326, 33-47. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]44. Cho E. A., Lee W. S., Kim K. M., Kim S. Y. (2008) Occupational generalized argyria after exposure to aerosolized silver, J Dermatol 35, 759-760. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]45. East B. W., Boddy K., Williams E. D., Macintyre D., Mclay A. L. C. (1980) Silver Retention, Total-Body Silver and Tissue Silver Concentrations in Argyria Associated with Exposure to an Ant-Smoking Remedy Containing Silver Acetate, Clin Exp Dermatol 5, 305-311. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]46. Rosenman K. D., Moss A., Kon S. (1979) Argyria – Clinical Implications of Exposure to Silver-Nitrate and Silver-Oxide, J Occup Environ Med 21, 430-435. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]47. Chaudhuri S. N., Butala S. J., Ball R. W., Braniff C. T. (2009) Pilot study for utilization of dried blood spots for screening of lead, mercury and cadmium in newborns, J Expo Sci Environ Epidemiol 19, 298-316. [PubMed] [Google Scholar]

Posted on Leave a comment

Fluorescence Spectroscopy Market 2018: Global Industry Overview 2028

Future Market Insights has announced the addition of the “Fluorescence Spectroscopy Market” report to their offering

This press release was orginally distributed by SBWire

Valley Cottage, NY — SBWIRE — 05242019 — At present, there are various diagnostic techniques available for the diagnosis of medically important microorganisms like viruses, bacteria, parasites, and fungi. But, these techniques are time-consuming with some limitations or inconvenience. Fluorescence spectroscopy seems to be a promising emerging diagnostic technique with fast and rapid diagnosis ability which can be used in many filed of medical sciences. Fluorescence spectroscopy is a method which is used to analyze the sample fluorescence properties by determining the concentration of an analyte in a sample. Fluorescence spectroscopy is extensively used for measuring compounds in a solution and is usually considered an easy method to perform. Fluorescence spectroscopy is a kind of electromagnetic spectroscopy which examines fluorescence from a sample. In fluorescence spectroscopy, a specific wavelength light band is usually passed through a solution, which emits the light into a detector through a filter for measurement. The amount of light absorbed by the sample and the amount of light that is emitted by the sample can be quantified. There are generally five parameters measured in fluorescence spectroscopy and they are emission spectrum, excitation spectrum, decay times, quantum yield, and anisotropy.

Fluorescence Spectroscopy Market: Drivers and Restraints

Fluorescence spectroscopy market is expected to show a noteworthy growth over the forecast period due to the increasing adoption of new and advanced technologies among the targeted population. Furthermore, continues advancement in the fluorescence spectroscopy equipment’s and competition among the fluorescence spectroscopy market players are some of the other factors which are driving the growth of the global fluorescence spectroscopy market. However, there are some factors responsible for hampering the growth of the global fluorescence spectroscopy market. Factors such as the fluorescence spectroscopy devices are expensive and provide less focus on developing new techniques due to lack of awareness and less profitability. These are some of the factors that could impede and drive the growth of the global fluorescence spectroscopy market.

Posted on Leave a comment

Bioimpedance spectroscopy better than tape measure for assessing woman’s lymphedema risk

Bioimpedance spectroscopy BIS is better than a tape measure for assessing a woman's risk for developing lymphedema after breast cancer surgery, according to interim results of a study led by Sheila Ridner, PhD, RN, Martha Ingram Professor and director of the PhD in Nursing Science Program at Vanderbilt University School of Nursing. The multisite international study compares the two methods for identifying women who should be prescribed compression sleeves and gauntlets to reduce lymphatic fluid in the arm and prevent progression to lymphedema. BIS surveillance reduced rates of progression by approximately 10%, a clinically meaningful improvement. Interim findings from the study were published May 3 in Annals of Surgical Oncology and Ridner presented the analysis during the annual meeting of The American Society of Breast Surgeons in Dallas. &#13; The bioimpedance device measures lymphatic fluid, and the tape measures everything. It takes more lymphatic fluid to make your whole arm volume change than it does to make the device pick up changes. The device is just more sensitive to changes in lymphatic fluid." &#13; &#13; Sheila Ridner, researcher with Vanderbilt-Ingram Cancer Center &#13; Breast cancer related lymphedema affects between 20% and 30% percent of women due to damage to the lymph glands from surgery, radiation and some medicines, Ridner said. Lymphedema causes swelling in the arm, can be physically debilitating and puts women at greater risk for infections as well as psychological stress. The results are an interim analysis of an ongoing controlled trial called PREVENT, launched in 2014 and led by Ridner. The analysis involved 508 participants who had been monitored for a year or longer. Participants identified at risk for lymphedema received compression sleeves and gauntlets and were instructed to wear them 12 hours daily for 28 days to prevent progression to lymphedema. Patients who developed lymphedema reached their endpoint with the trial and were referred to clinicians for complex decongestive physiotherapy CDP. "CDP is resource intensive and costly," Ridner said. "Lymphedema therapists are not accessible everywhere and mostly are in metropolitan areas. You go an hour-and-a-half in any direction outside of Nashville, for example, and we can't find people to treat these patients." Clinicians have traditionally used tape measures to monitor breast cancer patients for lymphedema, but that method can vary greatly depending upon how a clinician does this. "Tape measure is the most commonly used method around the world even though it is fraught with error," Ridner said. "To get accurate measurements for a research study, there is an incredible amount of training to teach all the sites in this international study how to measure the same way. I do annual fidelity oversight visits to every single site to make sure there has not been any slippage in the protocol." BIS is a painless and noninvasive procedure that entails running an electronic signal through the body. The technology is similar to electronic monitors for body mass index, but much more refined. Although the study showed that participants in the BIS experienced reduced rates of progression to lymphedema requiring CDP, the tape measure group triggered an intervention more often and earlier. The median time that triggered an intervention in the tape measure group was 2.8 months versus 9.5 months for the BIS group. "It is possible that at three months post-surgery in some patients there remains a generalized, whole-arm inflammatory response that is identified by tape measure," the analysis states. "reased extracellular fluid may not be a major factor in that volume change." Ridner and the research team will evaluate the factors associated with triggering for both groups going forward. "We had statistically significant more people trigger an intervention that were in the tape group than in the BIS group, which was contrary to what many people thought would have happened in the study. One of the concerns about BIS in general was that it might generate false positives and we might psychologically distress people," Ridner said. "That was never my experience in the 15 to 16 years I've been working with the technology." The PREVENT trial has enrolled a total of 1,201 participants with 325 of them being patients of the Vanderbilt Breast Center. The findings released at the annual meeting of the American Society of Breast Surgeons involved the first 500 to have been monitored for 12 months or longer. The trial is anticipated to continue through December 2020. Other sites involved in the trial include Alleghany General Hospital, Columbia University Medical Center, Mayor Clinic Jacksonville, Fla., University of Louisville, Macquarie University New South Wales, Australia, MD Anderson Cancer Center, University of Kansas Medical Center, Cleveland Clinic and Southeast Health Southeast Cancer Center Cape Girardeau, Mo.. Vanderbilt University Journal reference: Ridner, S. et al. 2019 A Randomized Trial Evaluating Bioimpedance Spectroscopy Versus Tape Measurement for the Prevention of Lymphedema Following Treatment for Breast Cancer: Interim Analysis. Annals of Surgical Oncology. doi10.1245s10434-019-07344-5

Posted on Leave a comment

Waht is FTIR Analysis (FTIR Spectroscopy)

we’re going to talk about FTIR analysis. FTIR analysis is fourier transform infrared spectroscopy.

it’s a molecular versus an atomic analysis which means that we’re going to look at the molecule not at the individual atoms. it’s qualitative versus quantitative, however you can do quantitative analysis with it but at laboratory testing we simply do qualitative the analysis is performed in absorbance.

it can be converted to transmittance as well if you look at the screen on the left that spectra is in absorbance the screen on the right is in transmittance.

they’re just inversions of each other this is the infrared spectrometer. it has a infrared light source that is the baseline of the energy and what happens is as a sample is put into that light source and then the absorbance of that sample is what is used to measure the bonds of the carbon atoms.

FTIR analysis is handy to use for several different types of samples.

we can have powdered samples we can have solid samples we can have thin film samples and we can have liquid samples.

there are several different ways to get the sample into the FTA our one is using a potassium bromide along with a powdered sample screw it together and press it into a pellet and then we put that pellet on the rack that will go into the light path and we shine the light directly through there.

another way is with a thin film. if the sample is already thin or it can be pressed into a thin film we put it in this cassette and then we put the cassette in the light path and we read the analysis from that we could also do nujol which is liquids.

they’re placed on a sodium chloride plates put two of them together with the liquid between it and shine a light path through there. put it in that holder and we can measure that material in liquid form through the glass plates.

another sampling method is attenuated total reflectance and that lets us put a solid sample on top of a crystal and then we tighten down the clamp so that the solid sample is held in tight proximity to the crystal and then the IR light is bounced off of that and we sample the material and that method the first thing that we’re going to do when we do an analysis is gather a background spectra, so that can be subtracted from the spectra that we get so that all we’re seeing is the actual sample. that’s gathered once the background spectra is collected then we’re ready to do an analysis this is a 10 you ated total reflectance mode we have a piece of material that is supposed to be polyethylene and we’re going to place that onto the spectrometer tighten down the clamp and then we’ll begin to gather the spectra for that as you can see the spectra is being gathered and from that spectra the will then run it through our libraries so that we can determine what the material is the spectrometer runs many scans at one time so that we get a good sampling of the material once it’s done then we will take it and compare it to our libraries so that we can see what the material is the spectra has been transferred to our library program and now we’re going to search through the libraries to see what material the libraries come up with once we run it through our library the library has determined that the material is polyethylene it comes up with the best match first and then decreasing percentage of matches down below and the best match was polyethylene high-density

Posted on Leave a comment

Ftir sample preparation kbr pellet

In this technique, a small amount of finely ground solid sample is mixed with 100 times its weight of potassium bromide and compressed into a thin transparent pellet using a hydraulic press. These pellets are transparent to IR radiation and it is used for analysis. you can keep your disk with this device very easy in high accuracy position if you have this instrument for solid item you didn’t need SMART ATR 100% work and tested.

Why KBr pellet is used in IR?

KBr is used as a carrier for the sample in IR spectrum and it is optically transparent for the light in the range of IR measurement. So that no interference in absorbence would occur. KBr, has a transmittance of 100 % in the range of wave number (4000-400 cm-1). Therefore, it does not exhibit absorption in this range 

What is a KBr pellet?

KBr Pellet Method. … Potassium bromide (KBr) is the commonest alkali halide used in the pellets. Cesium iodide (CsI) may also be used to measure the infrared spectrum in the 400 to 250 cm-1 low-wavenumber region.

How to buy Ftir sample preparation kbr pellet:

Contact us from this link
http://easylablife.com/contact-us-2/

Posted on Leave a comment

What is difference between FTIR and FTIR-ATR?

ATR is one accessory to measure FTIR spectra. Mostly there are three types of accessories namely Transmission, ATR and specular reflectance. If you want to measure surface properties you can use this technique. This will have penetration depth of around 1 or 2 micrometers depending on your ATR crystal material.

actually ATR (Attenuated total reflection) is a unite used instead of preparation KBr disk part . It’s more efficient and give more accurate result , low signal to noise ratio . also small sample need to make analyzed, only 0.5-1 micron .

ATR is one accessory to measure FTIR spectra. Mostly there are three types of accessories namely Transmission, ATR and specular reflectance. If you want to measure surface properties you can use this technique. This will have penetration depth of around 1 or 2 micrometers depending on your ATR crystal material. I am attaching one ppt file for your reference which I have made to explain this technique to my students. In this file I have mentioned about sampling methods which will help you to understand.